JP2022021271A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To achieve both prevention of the positional deviation and vibration of an outer rail and facilitating of a work of the outer rail and attachment of the outer rail to a game board, and to improve a performance effect of reservation display.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of guide holes gh along an outer rail 14. Particularly, in the outer rail 14, the number of guide holes gh in a first range H1 is larger than that in a second range H2, and the number of guide holes gh in the second range H2 is larger than that in a third range H3. In a case where a normal-time special reservation display in which an in-residence operation is repeated in the same cycle as a normal-time default reservation display is started during execution of the normal-time default reservation display, the in-residence operation of the normal-time special reservation display is synchronized with that of the normal-time default reservation display. On the other hand, a time-reduction time default reservation display in which the in-residence operation is repeated in a cycle different from the normal-time default reservation display is never started during the execution of the normal-time default reservation display.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 65

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine provided with an outer rail and performing a hold display.

Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with an outer rail is known (see Patent Document 1). This gaming machine is provided with an outer rail that guides the gaming ball launched by the launching device to the gaming area.
Further, conventionally, a gaming machine that executes a hold display is known (see Patent Document 2). In this gaming machine, a specific hold display for displaying an operation at a predetermined cycle is executed during the occurrence of a predetermined gaming state. In particular, when a new specific hold display is started during the execution of one specific hold display, the new specific hold display is synchronized with the one specific hold display.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-89073 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-199051

However, with a conventional gaming machine, there is a risk that it is not possible to achieve both prevention of misalignment and vibration of the outer rail, processing of the outer rail, and facilitation of attachment to the gaming board.
Further, in the conventional gaming machine, the effect of the hold display may be reduced. That is, in the conventional gaming machine, when a configuration is configured in which a plurality of types of hold displays having different operation display cycles can be executed, a plurality of types of hold displays having different operation display cycles are executed at the same time, and the hold display is displayed. The content becomes complicated, and there is a risk that the effect of the hold display will be reduced.
An object of the present invention is to achieve both prevention of misalignment and vibration of the outer rail, processing of the outer rail and facilitation of attachment to the game board, and improvement of the effect of holding display.

In order to achieve the above object, the game machine according to the first invention has a game board forming a game area, an outer rail attached to the game board, and a first hold display that repeats operation display in the first cycle. The outer rail is provided with a display control means capable of executing a second hold display that repeats the operation display in the first cycle and a third hold display that repeats the operation display in the second cycle. A plurality of guide portions for guiding the mounting position with respect to the game board are formed along the outer rail, and the range from the start end of the outer rail to the left apex is the first range, and the outer rail is above the left apex. When the range to the apex is the second range and the range from the upper apex to the end of the outer rail is the third range, the guide portion is provided in the first range than in the second range. The number of the guides is larger in the second range than in the third range, and the display control means is the first while the first hold display is being executed. 2 When starting the hold display, the operation display of the second hold display is controlled to be synchronized with the operation display of the first hold display, and the third hold display is not started during the execution of the first hold display. It is characterized by controlling so as to.
In the gaming machine according to the first invention, a plurality of guide portions are provided along the outer rail. This makes it possible to arrange the outer rail at an accurate position on the game board.
Here, in the outer rail, the impact received by the collision of the launched game ball is larger at the starting end side than at the ending side portion, and the influence on the launching direction of the launched game ball is larger. .. As a result, in the outer rail, a higher mounting strength is required at the start end side portion than at the end end side portion, and more accurate placement is required.
Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the first invention, the number of guide portions provided on the base end side portion of the outer rail is increased to prevent misalignment and vibration at the base end side portion. It becomes possible. In particular, it is possible to stabilize the trajectory of the game ball and execute the game as designed. On the other hand, by reducing the number of guide portions provided at the terminal portion of the outer rail, it is possible to easily process the outer rail and attach it to the game board. This makes it possible to prevent misalignment and vibration of the outer rail, and to facilitate processing of the outer rail and attachment to the game board.
Here, the upper apex of the outer rail is a portion located on the uppermost side of the outer rail formed in an arc shape. Further, the left apex of the outer rail is a portion located on the leftmost side of the outer rail formed in an arc shape.
Further, in the gaming machine according to the first invention, when the second hold display in which the operation display is repeated in the same cycle as the first hold display is started during the execution of the first hold display, the second hold display is displayed. The operation display is synchronized with the operation display of the first hold display. On the other hand, during the execution of the first hold display, the third hold display in which the operation display is repeated at a cycle different from that of the first hold display is not started.
This prevents a situation in which a plurality of types of hold displays having different operation display cycles are executed at the same time, and prevents the contents of the hold display from becoming complicated. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the hold display.
The mode of the operation display of the first hold display and the mode of the operation display of the second hold display may be the same or different. Further, it does not matter whether the configuration is such that the second cycle is shorter than the first cycle or the second cycle is longer than the first cycle.
Here, as the game board, the game board 11 described later corresponds. As the outer rail, the outer rail 14 described later corresponds to this. The guide hole gh, which will be described later, corresponds to the guide unit. As the upper vertex, the upper vertex P1 described later corresponds. The left vertex corresponds to the left vertex P2, which will be described later. As the first range, the first range H1 described later corresponds. The second range corresponds to the second range H2, which will be described later. The third range corresponds to the third range H3, which will be described later. The first hold display corresponds to the normal default hold display described later. The second hold display corresponds to the normal special hold display described later. As the third hold display, the time saving default hold display described later corresponds. As the display control means, the effect control board 300 described later corresponds. The operation display corresponds to the operation during the stay, which will be described later.

The gaming machine according to the second invention is the gaming machine according to the first invention, in which the display control means can execute the fourth hold display that repeats the operation display in the second cycle, and the fourth hold display. When the third hold display is started during the execution of, the operation display of the third hold display is controlled to be synchronized with the operation display of the fourth hold display, and the fourth hold display is being executed during the execution of the fourth hold display. 2 It is characterized in that it is controlled not to start the hold display.
In the gaming machine according to the second invention, when the third hold display in which the operation display is repeated in the same cycle as the fourth hold display is started during the execution of the fourth hold display, the operation display of the third hold display is started. Is synchronized with the operation display of the fourth hold display. On the other hand, during the execution of the fourth hold display, the second hold display in which the operation display is repeated at a cycle different from that of the fourth hold display is not started.
This prevents a situation in which a plurality of types of hold displays having different operation display cycles are executed at the same time, and prevents the contents of the hold display from becoming complicated. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the hold display.
The mode of the operation display of the third hold display and the mode of the operation display of the fourth hold display may be the same or different.
Here, as the fourth hold display, the time-saving special hold display described later corresponds.

The gaming machine according to the third invention includes a game information acquisition means for acquiring game information and a display control means for executing a hold display corresponding to the game information acquired by the game information acquisition means. When other game information is acquired during the execution of the hold display corresponding to the game information, the hold display corresponding to the other game information is subjected to the standby display (standby mode / standby state) and then the one game information. It is characterized in that the synchronous display (synchronization mode / synchronization state) synchronized with the hold display corresponding to the above.
In the gaming machine according to the third invention, the hold display corresponding to other game information to be started later is synchronized with the hold display corresponding to one game information started earlier after being set to the standby display. It is displayed synchronously.
As a result, even before the timing when the hold display corresponding to other game information can be synchronized with the hold display corresponding to one game information (the timing when the synchronization display can be started) occurs, the other It is possible to start the hold display (standby display) corresponding to the game information of.
Here, the game information corresponds to the special figure 1 game information or the special figure 2 game information described later. The main control board 200 (step S9-3), which will be described later, corresponds to the game information acquisition means. The hold display corresponds to the hold display (display of the hold symbol h) described later. As the display control means, the effect control board 300 described later corresponds. The standby display corresponds to the standby animation display (standby state) described later. The stay animation display described later corresponds to the synchronized display.
The gaming machine according to the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to the third invention, wherein the synchronous display is a moving image (animation image), and the standby display is a still image. In the gaming machine according to the fourth invention, it is possible to suppress an increase in the control load.
The gaming machine according to the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to the third or fourth invention, the synchronous display is a moving image (animation image), the standby display is a still image, and the standby display. Is characterized by consisting of an image of the first frame of the moving image. In the gaming machine according to the fifth invention, it is possible to naturally connect (shift) from the standby display to the synchronous display.
The gaming machine according to the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the third to fifth inventions, in which the hold display and the synchronous display corresponding to the one game information are periodically repeated. It is a moving image (animation image) having the same content, and when the display of the image of the first frame of the moving image related to the holding display corresponding to the one game information is started, the holding corresponding to the other game information is started. The display is synchronized with the hold display corresponding to the one game information (referred to as the synchronization display). In the gaming machine according to the sixth invention, it is possible to simplify the process of synchronizing the hold display.

The gaming machine according to the seventh invention includes a game information acquisition means for acquiring game information, a game determination means for executing a game determination based on the game information acquired by the game information acquisition means, and the game determination (or the game determination). , The display control means for executing the hold display corresponding to the game information on which the result of the game determination is held) is provided, and other game information is displayed during the execution of the hold display corresponding to one game information. When acquired, the hold display corresponding to the other game information is synchronized with the hold display corresponding to the one game information after the waiting time (standby display / standby mode / standby state) (synchronous display / synchronization). If there is game information for which the game determination (or the derivation of the result of the game determination) is suspended at the time of turning on the power (when the power is restored after the power is cut off), all of the above. It is characterized in that the hold display related to the game information of is started in a state of being synchronized with each other.
In the gaming machine according to the seventh invention, it is possible to simplify the process for synchronizing a plurality of hold displays when the power is turned on.
Here, the game information corresponds to the special figure 1 game information or the special figure 2 game information described later. The main control board 200 (step S9-3), which will be described later, corresponds to the game information acquisition means. The game determination corresponds to the start determination described later. The main control board 200 (steps S11-7 to S11-11) described later corresponds to the game determination means. The hold display corresponds to the hold display (display of the hold symbol h) described later. As the display control means, the effect control board 300 described later corresponds. The waiting time corresponds to the time in the waiting state, which will be described later.
The gaming machine according to the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to the seventh invention, in which a plurality of pedestal images (moving images / animation images) included in the interface image are displayed in synchronization with each other when the power is turned on. It is characterized by being started. Here, the "pedestal image" is an image showing the pedestal of the hold display (same in the following invention).

The gaming machine according to the ninth invention includes a game information acquisition means for acquiring game information, a game determination means for executing a game determination based on the game information acquired by the game information acquisition means, and the game determination (or the game determination). , The display control means for executing the hold display corresponding to the game information on which the result of the game determination is held) is provided, and other game information is displayed during the execution of the hold display corresponding to one game information. When acquired, the hold display corresponding to the other game information is synchronized with the hold display corresponding to the one game information (synchronous display / synchronization) after the waiting time (standby display / standby mode / standby state). If there is game information for which the game determination (or the derivation of the result of the game determination) is suspended at the time of transition (change) of the game state, all the game information concerned. Is characterized in that the display is started in a state of being synchronized with each other.
In the gaming machine according to the ninth invention, it is possible to simplify the process for synchronizing a plurality of hold displays at the time of transition of the gaming state.
Here, the game information corresponds to the special figure 1 game information or the special figure 2 game information described later. The main control board 200 (step S9-3), which will be described later, corresponds to the game information acquisition means. The game determination corresponds to the start determination described later. The main control board 200 (steps S11-7 to S11-11) described later corresponds to the game determination means. The hold display corresponds to the hold display (display of the hold symbol h) described later. As the display control means, the effect control board 300 described later corresponds. The waiting time corresponds to the time in the waiting state, which will be described later. The gaming state corresponds to the execution of the time reduction control described later or the stoppage of the time reduction control.
The gaming machine according to the tenth invention is the gaming machine according to the eighth invention, in a state in which a plurality of pedestal images (moving images / animation images) included in the interface image are synchronized with each other at the time of transition of the gaming state. The display is started. Here, the "pedestal image" is an image showing the pedestal of the hold display.

The gaming machine according to the eleventh invention includes a game information acquisition means for acquiring game information, a game determination means for executing a game determination based on the game information acquired by the game information acquisition means, and the game determination ( Alternatively, the display control means for executing the hold display corresponding to the game information for which the derivation of the result of the game determination) is held is provided, and other game information is being executed during the execution of the hold display corresponding to one game information. Is acquired, the hold display corresponding to the other game information is synchronized with the hold display corresponding to the one game information after the waiting time (standby display / standby mode / standby state) (synchronous display / standby state). When the number of game information for which the game determination (or the derivation of the result of the game determination) is reserved is subtracted (decreased), the game determination (or the result of the game determination) is performed. When there is game information for which the derivation of the above is held, the hold display related to all the game information is started to be displayed in a state of being synchronized with each other.
In the gaming machine according to the eleventh invention, when the number of gaming information for which a game determination (or the derivation of the result of the game determination) is pending is subtracted (decreased), a plurality of reserved displays are synchronized. It is possible to simplify the process.
Here, the game information corresponds to the special figure 1 game information or the special figure 2 game information described later. The main control board 200 (step S9-3), which will be described later, corresponds to the game information acquisition means. The game determination corresponds to the start determination described later. The main control board 200 (steps S11-7 to S11-11) described later corresponds to the game determination means. The hold display corresponds to the hold display (display of the hold symbol h) described later. As the display control means, the effect control board 300 described later corresponds. The waiting time corresponds to the time in the waiting state, which will be described later.

According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the outer rail from being displaced or vibrated, and to facilitate the processing of the outer rail and the attachment to the game board, and to improve the effect of holding the display. Is possible.

It is a perspective view which shows the whole structure of a pachinko machine. It is the figure which showed the front of the game board, and schematically showed the part necessary for explanation. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the control system of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the firing condition detection circuit and the firing control circuit. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of an effect control board. It is an address map of the memory area used by CPU 210. It is a flowchart which shows the CPU initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows the main loop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the evacuation process at the time of power-off. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the dynamic port output processing. It is a flowchart which shows the performance display device output processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting-related processing. It is a flowchart which shows the switch management process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure start ball detection process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a starting ball detection process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 start ball detection process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the special game management process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during special figure change. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during stop of a special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the processing before opening the big prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric service opening / closing switching processing. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening opening control process. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening closure effective processing. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening opening end wait processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary game management process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure fluctuation waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during a change of a normal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during stop of a normal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the processing before opening of a normal electric accessory. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary electric service opening / closing switching processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary electric accessory opening control process. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary electric accessory closing effective processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary electric accessory opening end weight processing. It is a flowchart which shows the performance display device control process. It is a flowchart which shows the sub CPU initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows the initial transfer process. It is a flowchart which shows the subtimer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the hold command reception processing. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead command reception process. It is a flowchart which shows the variable command reception processing. It is a flowchart which shows the stop command reception processing. It is a flowchart which shows the opening command reception processing. It is a flowchart which shows the Vsync interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command construction task processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command construction process. It is a flowchart which shows the sound interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ramp interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the movable body interrupt processing. It is a figure which shows the flow of the process from the construction of a drawing command to the generation and output of a video signal. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the frame image which constitutes a stay animation, and the timing when a synchronization flag is turned ON state. It is a figure which shows the progress of the hold display which concerns on 1st example. It is a figure which shows the progress of the hold display which concerns on the 2nd example. It is a figure which shows the progress of the hold display which concerns on 3rd example. It is a figure which shows the progress of the hold display which concerns on 4th example. It is a figure which shows the progress of the hold display which concerns on 5th example. It is a figure which shows the progress of the hold display which concerns on 6th example. It is a flowchart which shows the synchronization flag setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the synchronization monitoring process. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is a figure which shows the structure of the outer rail. It is a figure which shows the arrangement of the guide hole gh in an outer rail. It is sectional drawing of a rail base. It is sectional drawing which follows the AA line shown in FIG. It is an enlarged view of FIG. 67.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the present embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to the pachinko machine 1.

(Overall configuration of pachinko machine 1)
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of a pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame unit 2, an inner frame unit 3, a front frame unit 4, and a game board unit 10.
The outer frame unit 2, the inner frame unit 3, and the front frame unit 4 are fixed to each other via a hinge mechanism. As a result, the inner frame unit 3 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2. Further, the front frame unit 4 can be opened and closed with respect to each of the inner frame unit 3 and the outer frame unit 2.
The outer frame unit 2 is configured to include a rectangular frame body (outer frame). Then, the outer frame included in the outer frame unit 2 is fixed to the island equipment of the amusement park.
The inner frame unit 3 is configured to include a rectangular frame body (inner frame). The inner frame unit 3 is arranged inside the outer frame unit 2.
The front frame unit 4 is formed in the shape of a rectangular door. The front frame unit 4 includes a rectangular frame body (front frame), a pair of transparent plates g1 and g2 arranged in a substantially central portion of the frame body, and a design portion arranged around the transparent plates g1 and g2. It has a (decorative portion) 40, a saucer unit 5 arranged on the lower side of the transparent plates g1 and g2, and a firing handle unit 6 arranged on the side of the saucer unit 5.
The pair of transparent plates g1 and g2 are arranged in parallel along the depth direction. Each of the transparent plates g1 and g2 is formed in a flat plate shape by a transparent material such as resin or glass.
The design portion 40 is formed of a resin material and has a shape that bulges (protrudes) toward the front side. Each upper corner of the design portion 40 is provided with a sound extraction portion 4c in which a speaker 22 (see FIG. 3) is arranged. Each sound extraction unit 4c is provided with a plurality of sound extraction holes through which the sound output by the speaker 22 passes. Further, a frame lamp 20 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the design portion 40. The frame lamp 20 includes a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) driven by dynamic lighting control.

The saucer unit 5 includes a saucer 5a for receiving game balls (rental balls and prize balls) and various operating means that can be operated by the player.
In the present embodiment, various operation means include an effect button 5b, a rotary selector 5c, a light amount adjustment button (not shown), a volume adjustment button (not shown), a cross key button (not shown), and the like. ing.
The effect button 5b includes an operation unit that can be pressed by the player, and a button switch 25 (see FIG. 3) that detects the pressing operation of the operation unit. The button switch 25 outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 300 (see FIG. 3) each time the operation unit is pressed.
The rotary selector 5c (so-called “jog dial”) includes an operation unit that can be rotated by a player, and a dial switch 26 (see FIG. 3) that detects a rotation operation of the operation unit. The dial switch 26 outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 300 each time the operation unit is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 60 [°]).

The light amount adjustment button has two operation units (first operation unit and second operation unit) that can be pressed by the player, and a light amount adjustment switch 27 (see FIG. 3) that detects the pressing operation of each operation unit. And is configured to include. The light amount adjusting switch 27 outputs the first detection signal to the effect control board 300 each time the first operation unit is pressed, and the second operation unit is pressed each time the second operation unit is pressed. Is output to the effect control board 300.
The volume adjustment buttons are two operation units (first operation unit and second operation unit) that can be pressed by the player, and a volume adjustment switch 28 that detects the pressing operation of each operation unit (see FIG. 3). And are configured to include. The volume adjustment switch 28 outputs the first detection signal to the effect control board 300 each time the first operation unit is pressed, and the second operation unit is pressed each time the second operation unit is pressed. Is output to the effect control board 300.
The cross key buttons are four operation units (up key button, down key button, left key button, and right key button) that can be pressed by the player, and a cross key switch that detects the press operation of each operation unit. 29 (see FIG. 3) and 29 (see FIG. 3). The cross-shaped key switch 29 outputs a first detection signal to the effect control board 300 each time the upper key button is pressed, and outputs a second detection signal each time the lower key button is pressed. It is output to the effect control board 300, and every time the left key button is pressed, a third detection signal is output to the effect control board 300, and every time the right key button is pressed, the fourth is output. Is output to the effect control board 300.

Further, a lending operation unit 7 is arranged on the upper surface of the saucer unit 5. The lending operation unit 7 has a ball lending button 7a, a return button 7b, and a frequency display device 7c.
Here, the pachinko machine 1 is communicably connected to the CR unit 700 capable of reading and updating the information recorded on the prepaid card. Then, when the prepaid card (not shown) is inserted into the CR unit 700, the remaining frequency of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 700 is displayed on the frequency display device 7c.
Further, when the ball lending button 7a is operated with the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 700, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the saucer 5a. At this time, the remaining frequency of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card is updated according to the number of game balls paid out, and the remaining frequency of the updated valuable medium is displayed on the frequency display device 7c.
Further, if the return button 7b is operated with the prepaid card having the remaining frequency of the valuable medium inserted in the CR unit 700, the prepaid card is returned from the CR unit 700.
Here, the prepaid cart corresponds to, for example, a magnetic storage medium, a medium with a built-in storage IC, or the like.

The firing handle unit 6 includes a handle base portion (not shown), a handle operating portion (not shown), and a firing stop button (not shown).
The handle base portion is attached to the front side of the front frame unit 4. A bearing portion is provided on the front side of the handle base portion.
The handle operation unit is configured in a shape that allows the player to grip it. A rotating shaft portion is provided on the back side of the handle operating portion. The handle operating portion is rotatably attached to the handle base portion by the rotation shaft portion being pivotally supported by the bearing portion of the handle base portion.
The handle operation unit can be rotated (displaced) from a predetermined initial position to a predetermined limit position. Inside the firing handle unit 6, an urging means (spring in the present embodiment) for urging the handle operating portion toward the initial position side is arranged. As a result, the handle operation unit is arranged (displaced) at the initial position when the rotation operation by the player is not performed.
The launch stop button is provided on the side surface side of the handle operation unit. The launch stop button can be pressed by the player.

Further, the firing handle unit 6 includes a firing volume 411, a touch sensor 412, and a firing stop switch 413.
The firing volume 411 is composed of a variable resistor. The firing volume 411 detects the rotation operation amount of the handle operation unit (the angle at which the handle operation unit is rotated). Specifically, the firing volume 411 includes a rotation shaft and a resistor whose resistance value changes according to the rotation amount (rotation angle) of the rotation shaft. The rotation shaft of the firing volume 411 is coaxially fixed to the rotation shaft portion of the handle operating portion. As a result, the rotation axis of the firing volume 411 is rotated according to the rotation operation of the handle operating unit, and the resistance value of the firing volume 411 changes according to the rotation operation amount of the handle operating unit.
The firing volume 411 is electrically connected to the operation detection unit 421 (see FIG. 4). The operation detection unit 421 detects the rotation operation (rotation operation amount) of the handle operation unit based on the change in the resistance value (voltage value) of the firing volume 411.
The touch sensor 412 detects contact (grasping) by the player with the steering wheel operating portion based on the change in capacitance. Then, the touch sensor 412 outputs a touch signal to the firing possible condition detection unit 422 (see FIG. 4) when the player's contact with the steering wheel operation unit is detected (the touch signal is defined as a high level). do). On the other hand, the touch sensor 412 stops the output of the touch signal to the launchable condition detection unit 422 (the touch signal is set to the low level) when the contact with the steering wheel operation unit by the player is not detected.
The firing stop switch 413 detects the pressing operation of the firing stop button. Then, the launch stop switch 413 outputs a launch stop signal to the launch enable condition detection unit 422 (the launch stop signal is set to a high level) when the pressing operation of the launch stop button is not detected. On the other hand, the launch stop switch 413 stops the output of the launch stop signal to the launchable condition detection unit 422 when the pressing operation of the launch stop button is detected (the launch stop signal is set to a low level).

(Structure of game board unit 10)
Next, the configuration of the game board unit 10 will be described.
FIG. 2 shows the front surface of the game board unit, and is a diagram schematically showing a portion particularly necessary for explanation. FIG. 63 is an exploded perspective view of the game board. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing the configuration of the outer rail. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing the arrangement of guide holes gh on the outer rail. FIG. 66 is a cross-sectional view of the rail base.
In FIG. 2, the display of the rail base 13 and the like is omitted. Further, FIG. 64 (a) shows a state in which the outer rail 14 is viewed from the side, and FIG. 64 (b) shows a state in which the outer rail 14 is viewed from the front side. Further, FIG. 65 shows a state in which the outer rail 14 attached to the game board 11 is viewed from the front side. Further, in FIG. 66, the game ball is indicated by the reference numeral “B”.
The game board unit 10 is supported by the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the game board unit 10 is attached to the inside of the inner frame included in the inner frame unit 3. As a result, the game board unit 10 is arranged on the back side of the front frame unit 4. Then, the player can visually recognize the game board 11 (game area 30) described later via the transparent plates g1 and g2. In the present embodiment, the game area 30 described later is configured between the back surface of the transparent plate g2 arranged on the back surface side of the pair of transparent plates g1 and g2 and the front surface of the game board 11.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board unit 10 includes a set plate (not shown), a game board 11 attached to the set plate, and various effect devices (main image display device 31, sub) attached to the set plate. An image display device 32, a movable body unit, etc.).
The set plate is formed in a box shape with the front side open. An opening formed of a through hole is provided in a substantially central portion of the back plate of the set plate.

The game board 11 is attached to the front side of the set board.
As shown in FIG. 63, the game board 11 is formed of a resin into a flat plate shape. An opening (not shown in FIG. 63) formed of a through hole is provided in a substantially central portion of the game board 11. Then, the player can visually recognize the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 through the opening provided in the game board 11 and the opening provided in the set plate.
An inner rail 12, a rail base 13, and an outer rail 14 are attached to the front surface of the game board 11. The game area 30 is divided by the inner rail 12, the outer rail 14, and the like.
The inner rail 12 is made of resin or the like. The inner rail 12 is formed in an arc shape when viewed from the front side. The outer peripheral surface of the inner rail 12 constitutes an inner guide surface 12a for guiding the game ball. A return ball prevention piece 12b is provided at the tip of the inner rail 12. The return ball prevention piece 12b prevents the game ball launched from the launch passage r1 into the game area 30 from returning to the launch passage r1 again.

The rail base 13 is made of resin or the like. As shown in FIG. 63, the rail base 13 is provided with a guide surface 13b that supports the outer rail 14. The guide surface 13b extends in an arc shape when viewed from the front side.
At least a part of the guide surface 13b in the longitudinal direction is inclined toward the back surface side (front side of the game board 11). In the present embodiment, substantially the entire longitudinal direction of the guide surface 13b is inclined toward the back surface side. As a result, with respect to the outer guide surface 14c of the outer rail 14 supported by the guide surface 13b, at least a part in the longitudinal direction (in the present embodiment, substantially the entire area) is directed toward the back side (front side of the game board 11). Can be tilted. As a result, the game ball launched by the game ball launching device 430 is less likely to flow to the front side (transparent plate g2 side), and contact with the transparent plate g2 can be suppressed.
A plurality of protruding portions (bosses) pr are provided on the guide surface 13b. Each protruding portion pr is formed as a substantially elliptical convex portion, and is provided so as to protrude from the guide surface 13b. Each protruding portion pr is fitted into a guide hole gh provided in the outer rail 14, and positions the outer rail 14 with respect to the rail base 13 (game board 11).
The base end portion (starting end portion) of the rail base 13 is provided with a base end side support portion (not shown) for supporting the base end side bent portion 14a provided on the outer rail 14. The proximal end side support portion is configured as a recess into which the proximal end side bent portion 14a can be inserted. Further, the tip end portion (termination portion) of the rail base 13 is provided with a tip end side support portion (not shown) for supporting the tip end side bent portion 14b provided on the outer rail 14. The tip-side support portion is configured as a recess into which the tip-side bent portion 14b can be inserted.
Further, the rail base 13 is provided with a covering portion 13a that covers (supports) the side surface (side surface on the front side) of the outer rail 14 when viewed from the front side.

The outer rail 14 is made of metal. As shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the outer rail 14 is formed in a flat plate shape and extends in an arc shape when viewed from the front side.
A base end side bent portion 14a is provided at the base end portion (starting end portion) of the outer rail 14. The base end side bent portion 14a is formed by bending the base end portion of the outer rail 14 into a substantially L shape. The tip end portion (termination portion) of the outer rail 14 is provided with a tip end side bent portion 14b. The tip side bent portion 14b is formed by bending the tip portion of the outer rail 14 into a substantially U shape.
The outer peripheral surface of the outer rail 14 formed in an arc shape is supported by the guide surface 13b of the rail base 13. The inner peripheral surface of the outer rail 14 formed in an arc shape constitutes the outer guide surface 14c for guiding the game ball.
The outer rail 14 (outer guide surface 14c) is provided with a plurality of guide holes gh. Each guide hole gh is a through hole that penetrates the outer rail 14 in the thickness direction. Each guide hole gh is a substantially elliptical through hole into which the protruding portion pr can be fitted.
In the outer rail 14 (outer guide surface 14c), in a state where the outer rail 14 is supported by the guide surface 13b (attached state), a guide hole is provided at a position corresponding to each protrusion pr provided on the guide surface 13b. gh is provided. As a result, the guide hole gh and the protruding portion pr guide (define) the mounting position of the outer rail 14 with respect to the rail base 13 (guide surface 13b), and eventually guide (define) the mounting position of the outer rail 14 with respect to the game board 11. )do.

Next, the arrangement of the guide holes gh on the outer rail 14 (outer guide surface 14c) will be described.
Here, the arrangement of the plurality of guide holes gh on the outer rail 14 and the arrangement of the plurality of protrusions pr on the guide surface 13b correspond to each other.
Therefore, the arrangement condition of the plurality of guide holes gh on the outer rail 14 and the arrangement condition of the plurality of protrusions pr on the guide surface 13b are the same as each other.
Therefore, the conditions for arranging the plurality of guide holes gh on the outer rail 14 will be described below, and the conditions for arranging the plurality of protrusions pr on the guide surface 13b will be omitted.
The outer rail 14 is attached to the front surface of the game board 11 via the rail base 13. The outer rail 14 (outer guide surface 14c) extends in an arc shape when viewed from the front side in a state of being attached to the game board 11.
As shown in FIG. 65, in the following description, when the outer rail 14 attached to the game board 11 is viewed from the front side, the uppermost portion (upper apex) of the outer rail 14 is referred to as “upper apex P1”. , And the leftmost portion (left apex) of the outer rail 14 is referred to as “left apex P2”.
Then, the range from the base end (starting end) of the outer rail 14 to the left apex P2 is defined as the "first range H1", and the range from the left apex P2 to the upper apex P1 of the outer rail 14 is defined as the "second range H2". The range from the upper apex P1 of the outer rail 14 to the tip (end) is defined as the "third range H3".
Further, the range from the left apex P2 of the outer rail 14 to the tip (end) is defined as the "fourth range". That is, the fourth range = the second range H2 + the third range H3.
Further, the range from the base end (starting end) of the outer rail 14 to the upper vertex P1 is defined as the "fifth range". That is, the fifth range = the first range H1 + the second range H2.
Further, the range from the base end (starting end) to the intermediate portion of the outer rail 14 is defined as the "sixth range", and the range from the intermediate portion to the tip (terminating) of the outer rail 14 is defined as the "seventh range". Here, the "intermediate portion" is an intermediate (center) portion in the longitudinal direction of the outer rail 14.

In the present embodiment, the number of guide holes gh provided in the first range H1 is larger than that in the second range H2, and the guide holes in the second range H2 are larger than those in the third range H3. The number of gh provided is increasing.
Further, in the present embodiment, the number of guide holes gh provided in the first range H1 is equal to or greater than the number of guide holes gh provided in the second range H2, and the guide holes gh are provided in the second range H2. The number of guide holes gh is equal to or greater than the number of guide holes gh provided in the third range H3.
Further, in the present embodiment, the number of guide holes gh provided in the first range H1 is equal to or greater than the number of guide holes gh provided in the third range H3, and the guide holes gh are provided in the second range H2. The number of guide holes gh is equal to or greater than the number of guide holes gh provided in the third range H3.
Further, in the present embodiment, the number of guide holes gh provided in the first range H1 is equal to or greater than the number of guide holes gh provided in the second range H2, and the guide holes gh are provided in the first range H1. The number of guide holes gh is equal to or greater than the number of guide holes gh provided in the third range H3.
Further, in the present embodiment, the number of guide holes gh provided in the first range H1 is larger than that in the fourth range.
Further, in the present embodiment, the number of guide holes gh provided is larger in the fifth range than in the third range H3.
Further, in the present embodiment, the number of guide holes gh provided is larger in the sixth range than in the seventh range.

Specifically, the first range H1 is provided with three guide holes gh along the longitudinal direction. On the other hand, the second range H2 is provided with two guide holes gh along the longitudinal direction. On the other hand, the guide hole gh is not provided in the third range H3.
As a result, the fourth range is provided with two guide holes gh along the longitudinal direction. Further, in the fifth range, five guide holes gh are provided along the longitudinal direction. Further, in the sixth range, four guide holes gh are provided along the longitudinal direction. Further, in the seventh range, one guide hole gh is provided along the longitudinal direction.
That is, in the outer rail 14, the impact on the base end side (game ball launching device 430 side) is received by the collision of the game ball launched by the game ball launching device 430 rather than the tip side (terminating side) portion. In addition, the influence on the launch direction of the game ball launched by the game ball launcher 430 becomes large.
As a result, in the outer rail 14, higher mounting strength is required at the base end side (game ball launcher 430 side) than at the tip end side (termination side), and more accurate placement is possible. Required.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, by increasing the number of guide holes gh provided in the base end side (game ball launching device 430 side) of the outer rail 14, the position shift in the base end side portion is increased. And vibration can be prevented. In addition, the trajectory of the game ball can be stabilized and the game can be executed according to the design value. In particular, it is possible to prevent damage and vibration of the outer rail 14 due to the collision of the launched game ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball of the launched game ball from shaking due to the damage or vibration, and it is possible to stably send the launched game ball to the board surface of the game board 11. As a result, the irregular movement of the game ball is reduced, and the game can be stably executed.
On the other hand, by reducing the number of guide holes gh provided at the tip side (termination side) of the outer rail 14, it is possible to facilitate the processing of the outer rail 14 and the attachment to the rail base 13. It will be possible.
As described above, it is possible to prevent the outer rail 14 from being displaced or vibrated, and to facilitate the processing of the outer rail 14 and the attachment to the game board 11.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the guide holes gh are not formed at the upper apex P1 and the left apex P2 of the outer rail 14.
That is, when an impact is applied to the upper and lower side surfaces or the left and right side surfaces of the game board 11, the impact is strongly transmitted to the upper apex P1 or the left apex P2 of the outer rail 14. As a result, when the guide holes gh are formed in the upper apex P1 and the left apex P2 of the outer rail 14, the strengths of the upper apex P1 and the left apex P2 are reduced due to the formation of the guide holes gh, and when the above impact is transmitted. The outer rail 14 may be damaged. Therefore, by forming the guide hole gh while avoiding the upper apex P1 and the left apex P2 of the outer rail 14, it is possible to suppress the damage of the outer rail 14.
Further, in the present embodiment, the guide hole gh is not formed in the third range H3. This makes it possible to easily process the outer rail 14 and attach it to the rail base 13. In the third range H3, one or more guide holes gh may be formed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the outer rail 14, five guide holes gh are formed along the longitudinal direction. At this time, the arrangement intervals of the five guide holes gh are non-uniform. In particular, the arrangement interval of the five guide holes gh is set so as to be wider toward the tip side (end side). In other words, the arrangement interval of the five guide holes gh is set so as to be narrower toward the proximal end side (starting end side).
Each guide hole gh is formed at a position where the game ball launched by the game ball launcher 430 does not come into contact with each other. That is, as shown in FIG. 66, each guide hole gh is formed at the end of the outer rail 14 on the back side (front side of the game board 11) in the width direction. In particular, each guide hole gh is formed in the width direction of the outer rail 14 at a position on the back side (front side of the game board 11) from the front side of the game board 11 by the radius of the game ball. ing.

Next, a method of attaching the rails 12 and 14 to the game board 11 will be described.
In order to attach the inner rail 12 to the game board 11, a positioning convex portion (not shown) provided on the back side of the inner rail 12 is provided with a positioning concave portion (not shown) provided on the front surface of the game board 11. (Not shown). As a result, the inner rail 12 is arranged at a predetermined position in front of the game board 11. Then, the inner rail 12 is fixed to the front surface of the game board 11 by screwing.
To attach the outer rail 14 to the game board 11, first, the rail base 13 is attached to the front surface of the game board 11. For this purpose, a positioning convex portion (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the rail base 13 is inserted into a positioning concave portion (not shown) provided on the front surface of the game board 11. As a result, the rail base 13 is arranged at a predetermined position in front of the game board 11. Then, the rail base 13 is fixed to the front surface of the game board 11 by screwing.
Next, the outer rail 14 is attached to the rail base 13. For this purpose, the outer peripheral surface of the outer rail 14 is arranged along the guide surface 13b of the rail base 13. Further, the base end side bent portion 14a of the outer rail 14 is inserted (fitted) into the base end side support portion of the rail base 13, and the tip end side bent portion 14b of the outer rail 14 is supported on the tip end side of the rail base 13. Insert (fit) into the part. Further, each protruding portion pr provided on the guide surface 13b is inserted (fitted) into each guide hole gh provided on the outer rail 14. As a result, the outer rail 14 is attached to the rail base 13 in a state where substantially the entire longitudinal direction of the outer peripheral surface of the outer rail 14 is supported by the guide surface 13b.

On the front surface of the game board 11, the game area 30 is divided by the inner rail 12, the outer rail 14, and the like. In the game area 30, a left-hand path (left-handed area) formed on the left side of the main image display device 31 and a right-hand path (right-handed) formed on the right side of the main image display device 31 are used as paths for the game ball to flow down. Area) and.
Further, on the front surface of the game board 11, the inner guide surface 12a of the inner rail 12 and the outer guide surface 14c of the outer rail 14 are arranged at predetermined intervals so as to face each other. Then, between the inner guide surface 12a and the outer guide surface 14c, a launch passage r1 that guides the game ball launched by the game ball launcher 430 to the game area 30 is configured.
Further, in the game area 30, a guide passage r2 that guides (guides) the game ball launched from the launch passage r1 to the right path is formed. The guide passage r2 is formed at the upper end of the game area 30. The guide passage r2 is formed on the upper side of the main image display device 31. The guide passage r2 extends in an arc shape when viewed from the front side.
In the present embodiment, the outer guide surface 14c constitutes the outer peripheral surface ra of the guide passage r2. Further, a decorative portion 33 is provided above the opening on the front surface of the game board 11. Then, on the upper surface of the decorative portion 33, the inner peripheral surface rb of the guide passage r2 is configured.
The game ball launched by the game ball launcher 430 passes through the launch passage r1 and flows into the game area 30. At this time, if the momentum of the launched game ball is weak, the game ball that has passed through the launch passage r1 flows into the left path. On the other hand, when the momentum of the launched game ball is strong, the game ball that has passed through the launch passage r1 passes through the guidance passage r2 and flows into the right path.

Here, the positional relationship between the design unit 40 and the guide passage r2 will be described.
FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in FIG. FIG. 68 is an enlarged view of FIG. 67. In FIGS. 67 and 68, the game ball is indicated by the reference numeral “B”.
As shown in FIG. 67, a design portion 40 is provided at the upper end portion of the front frame unit 4. The design portion 40 is provided so as to surround the transparent plates g1 and g2 when viewed from the front side. The design portion 40 is provided so as to bulge (project) from the front surface of the front frame unit 4 (front frame) toward the front side. In particular, the design portion 40 is provided so as to bulge (project) toward the front side with respect to the transparent plates g1 and g2.
Specifically, the design portion 40 has an upper surface 41 extending from the front surface of the front frame unit 4 (front frame) toward the front side and a front surface 42 extending downward from the front end portion (front end portion) of the upper surface 41. And a lower surface 43 extending from the lower end of the front surface 42 toward the back surface side. As a result, the design portion 40 has a substantially U-shaped cross section (substantially U-shaped).
The end portion (rear end portion) on the back surface side of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 extends to the front surface of the transparent plate g1. In the present embodiment, the end portion of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 on the back surface side is in contact with the front surface of the transparent plate g1.
In particular, the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 is inclined in the depth direction so that the front side is low and the back side is high. As a result, when viewed from the front side, a part of the upper end portion of the game board 11 is covered (concealed) by the lower end portion of the design portion 40.
Further, the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 is curved so that each end portion in the left-right direction is low and the central portion in the left-right direction is high.

In the following description, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, a portion orthogonal to the front surface of the game board 11 and located at the uppermost point (apex / top) of the outer peripheral surface ra of the guidance passage r2 (hereinafter, “” The virtual line passing through (referred to as the outer peripheral vertex) is referred to as the “first reference line k1”. In this embodiment, the outer peripheral apex coincides with the upper apex P1.
Further, a virtual line extending along the vertical direction, intersecting the first reference line k1, and intersecting the rear end (rear end) of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 is defined as the "first vertical straight line". "(Not shown). Then, the portion of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 that intersects the first vertical straight line is referred to as the “first design portion d1”.
Further, a virtual line that extends along the vertical direction, intersects the first reference line k1, and intersects the lowermost portion (lowest portion) on the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 is "second. "Vertical line" (not shown). Then, the portion of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 that intersects the second vertical straight line is referred to as the “second design portion d2”.
Further, a virtual line orthogonal to the front surface of the game board 11 and passing through a portion of the inner peripheral surface rb of the guidance passage r2 located directly below the outer peripheral apex is referred to as a “second reference line k2”. That is, the second reference line k2 is directly below the first reference line k1 and parallel to the first reference line k1.
As a result, the virtual line that extends along the vertical direction, intersects the second reference line k2, and intersects the rear end (rear end) of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 is the above-mentioned first. 1 Consistent with the plumb bob. Then, as described above, the portion of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 that intersects the first vertical line becomes the first design portion d1.
Further, the virtual line extending along the vertical direction, intersecting the second reference line k2, and intersecting the lowermost portion (lowest portion) on the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 is described above. Consistent with the second plumb line. Then, as described above, the portion of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 that intersects the second vertical line becomes the second design portion d2.

In the present embodiment, the first design portion d1 is arranged below (lower position) than the first reference line k1. In particular, the distance (dimension) A from the first reference line k1 to the first design portion d1 is equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball (4 [mm] in this embodiment). Here, the distance A is the height difference between the position of the first reference line k1 and the position of the first design portion d1.
Further, in the present embodiment, the second design portion d2 is arranged below (lower position) than the first reference line k1. In particular, the distance (dimension) B from the first reference line k1 to the second design portion d2 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball (40 [mm] in this embodiment). Here, the distance B is the height difference between the position of the first reference line k1 and the position of the second design portion d2.
As described above, in the present embodiment, the second design portion d2 is arranged below the first reference line k1 (lower position), and in particular, the distance B from the first reference line k1 to the second design portion d2 is played. By making the diameter larger than the diameter of the sphere, the design portion 40 can be enlarged in the vertical direction. On the other hand, by setting the distance A from the first reference line k1 to the first design portion d1 to be equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball is strongly launched by the game ball launching device 430, and the game ball is placed in the guide passage r2. When rolling along the outer peripheral surface ra, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the game ball from the front side. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, since the visibility of the game ball is ensured, it is possible for the player to prevent the game ball from being overlooked and to play the game normally. As a result, it becomes possible to stably perform the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first design portion d1 is arranged above (higher position) than the second reference line k2. In particular, the distance (dimension) C from the second reference line k2 to the first design portion d1 is equal to or greater than the radius of the game ball (14 [mm] in this embodiment). Here, the distance C is the height difference between the position of the second reference line k2 and the position of the first design portion d1.
Further, in the present embodiment, the second design portion d2 is arranged below (lower position) than the second reference line k2. In particular, the distance (dimension) D from the second reference line k2 to the second design portion d2 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball (22 [mm] in this embodiment). Here, the distance D is the height difference between the position of the second reference line k2 and the position of the second design portion d2.
As described above, in the present embodiment, the second design portion d2 is arranged below the second reference line k2 (lower position), and in particular, the distance D from the second reference line k2 to the second design portion d2 is played. By making the diameter larger than the diameter of the sphere, the design portion 40 can be enlarged in the vertical direction. On the other hand, by setting the distance C from the second reference line k2 to the first design portion d1 to be equal to or greater than the radius of the game ball, the game ball is weakly launched by the game ball launching device 430, and the game ball is launched in the guide passage r2. When rolling along the inner peripheral surface rb, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the game ball from the front side. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, since the visibility of the game ball is ensured, it is possible for the player to prevent the game ball from being overlooked and to play the game normally. As a result, it becomes possible to stably perform the game.

A board lamp 21 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the game area 30 of the game board 11. The board lamp 21 is configured to include a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) driven by dynamic lighting control.
The main image display device 31 is attached to the back side of the set plate. The main image display device 31 is composed of a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display and a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display.
The main image display device 31 is configured to include a display screen 31a capable of displaying various effect images (moving images / still images).
On the display screen 31a, three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 (not shown) on which the first effect symbol z1 (not shown) and the second effect symbol z2 (not shown) are displayed. It is possible to configure one second effect symbol display area a4 (not shown).
The first effect symbol z1 is configured to include identification information (design) such as numbers, characters, symbols, and characters. In each of the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the first effect symbol z1. The second effect symbol z2 is composed of a color bar. In the second effect symbol display area a4, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the second effect symbol z2.

The variable display of the effect symbols z1 and z2 means that the first effect symbol z1 is moved (scrolled) in each of the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 and is displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4. 2 A display in which the type of the effect symbol z2 is changed (the color represented by the color bar is sequentially changed).
The stop display of the effect symbols z1 and z2 means that the first effect symbol z1 of one type is stopped at the lottery result display positions of the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, and the second effect symbol display area a4. In, a display in which one type of second effect symbol z2 is displayed (a color bar represents a predetermined color).
Then, a special symbol is created by combining the first effect symbol z1 stopped and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 and the second effect symbol z2 stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4. The result of the lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is displayed.
Further, on the display screen 31a, it is possible to configure the reserved symbol display areas b1 and b2 (not shown) on which the reserved symbol h (not shown) is displayed. In the reserved symbol display areas b1 and b2, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the game information for which the derivation of the result of the start determination (completion of the stop display of the special symbol) which will be described later is suspended is displayed.
In the reserved symbol display area b1, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the game information in the notification display (variation display and stop display of the special symbol) is displayed. In the reserved symbol display area b2, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the game information for which the notification display is suspended is displayed.

The sub image display device 32 is arranged at a position on the front side of the main image display device 31.
The sub-image display device 32 is composed of a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display and a CRT display. The sub image display device 32 has a display screen 32a capable of displaying an effect image.
The sub-image display device 32 can be displaced (moved) along the vertical direction by a drive mechanism (not shown). Specifically, the sub-image display device 32 can be displaced within a predetermined range including the origin position (see FIG. 2) and the effect position below the origin position (not shown). ..
The sub-image display device 32 arranged (displaced) at the origin position is arranged above the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 and does not cover the display screen 31a. On the other hand, the sub-image display device 32 arranged (displaced) at the effect position is arranged on the front side of the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 and covers a part of the display screen 31a.

A first starting port 51 is provided below the display screen 31a in the game area 30. The first starting port 51 is an entry port (so-called “navel”) that opens upward, and allows the entry of a game ball at all times. The first starting port 51 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the left path (it is impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the right path).
A special starting port switch 101 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the first starting port 51. The special figure 1 start port switch 101 sends a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball that has entered the first start port 51 (the entry of the game ball into the first start port 51). Output. The main control board 200 executes the first special symbol lottery in response to the input of the detection signal from the special figure 1 start port switch 101.

On the left side of the first starting port 51 in the game area 30, an upper left other winning opening 55, a left middle other winning opening 56, and a lower left other winning opening 57 are provided. Each of the other winning openings 55 to 57 is an entrance opening that opens upward, and it is possible to enter a game ball at all times. Each of the other winning openings 55 to 57 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the left route (it is not possible to enter a game ball flowing down the right route).
The game board 11 is provided with a left winning opening switch 106 (see FIG. 3). The left winning opening switch 106 is a game ball that has entered the upper left other winning opening 55 (a game ball has entered the upper left other winning opening 55), and a game ball that has entered the left middle other winning opening 56 (left middle other winning opening). The detection signal is sent to the main control board in response to the detection of the game ball entering the mouth 56) and the game ball entering the lower left other winning opening 57 (the entry of the game ball into the lower left other winning opening 57). Output for 200. The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the left prize opening switch 106.

A start gate 41 is provided on the right side of the display screen 31a in the game area 30. The starting gate 41 is formed so that it can be passed by a game ball at all times. The starting gate 41 allows the game ball flowing down the right path to pass through (the game ball flowing down the left side path cannot pass through).
A gate switch 104 (see FIG. 3) is arranged at the starting gate 41. The gate switch 104 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball passing through the start gate 41 (passing by the game ball through the start gate 41). The main control board 200 executes a normal symbol lottery in response to the input of the detection signal from the gate switch 104.

A large winning opening 53 is provided below the starting gate 41 in the game area 30. The large winning opening 53 is displaced to a closed state that makes it impossible for the game ball to enter the large winning opening 53 and an open state that allows the game ball to enter the large winning opening 53. A special electric accessory (special electric accessory) 53a (so-called "attacker") is provided.
The special electric accessory 53a is opened and closed by the special electric accessory solenoid 65 (see FIG. 3). In the large winning opening 53, the special electric accessory 53a is normally closed and it is impossible to enter the game ball, but the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery is won. When a big hit game state occurs, the special electric accessory 53a is opened and the game ball can enter the ball. The large winning opening 53 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right route (it is impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the left route).
A count switch 103 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the large winning opening 53. The count switch 103 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 53 (the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening 53). The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the count switch 103.

A second starting opening 52 is provided below the large winning opening 53 in the game area 30. The second starting port 52 has a closed state that makes it impossible for the game ball to enter the second starting port 52 and an open state that allows the game ball to enter the second starting port 52. An ordinary electric accessory (ordinary electric accessory) 52a (so-called "electric tulip") that can be displaced is provided.
The ordinary electric accessory 52a is opened and closed by the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 64 (see FIG. 3). At the second starting port 52, the normal electric accessory 52a is normally closed so that the game ball cannot enter the second starting port 52. However, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the ordinary electric accessory 52a is not allowed to enter. The 52a is set to the open state, and the game ball can enter the ball. The second starting port 52 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right path (it is impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the left path).
A special figure 2 start port switch 102 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the second start port 52. The special figure 2 start port switch 102 sends a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball that has entered the second start port 52 (the entry of the game ball into the second start port 52). Output. The main control board 200 executes the second special symbol lottery in response to the input of the detection signal from the special figure 2 start port switch 102.

Below the second starting opening 52 in the game area 30, a right other winning opening 54 is provided. The right other winning opening 54 is an entry opening that opens upward, and a game ball can be entered at all times. The right other winning opening 54 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right route (it is impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the left route).
A right winning opening switch 105 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the right other winning opening 54. The right winning opening switch 105 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball that has entered the right other winning opening 54 (the entry of the game ball into the right other winning opening 54). .. The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the right prize opening switch 105.

At the lowermost position in the game area 30, an out port 58 for ejecting a game ball that has not been entered (winned) in any of the winning openings 51 to 57 is provided.
Here, the inner frame unit 3 includes a discharge path (not shown) through which the game ball discharged from the game area 30 passes. Specifically, the discharge path is attached to the back side of the inner frame included in the inner frame unit 3. The pachinko machine 1 is configured so that all the game balls launched into the game area 30 (all the game balls discharged from the game area 30) pass through the discharge path. That is, the game ball launched into the game area 30 is discharged from the game area 30 and flows into the discharge path by entering any of the winning openings 51 to 57 or by passing through the out opening 58. do.
Specifically, the game balls that have entered each of the winning openings 51 to 57 are guided to the discharge path after being detected by the switches 101 to 103, 105, 106 arranged in the winning openings. Further, the game ball discharged from the out port 58 is guided to the discharge path.
The inner frame unit 3 is provided with an out switch 109 (see FIG. 3). Then, the out switch 109 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball passing through the discharge path (the game ball discharged from the game area 30). As a result, all the game balls discharged from the game area 30 are detected by the out switch 109.
Further, in the game area 30, a plurality of nails (not shown) are arranged so as to guide the game ball to each of the winning openings 51 to 57 and the starting gate 41.

The game board 11 is provided with a main display device 60. The main display device 60 is configured to include a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is composed of a light emitting element (LED in this embodiment).
Information about the game is displayed on the main display device 60.
The main display device 60 includes a special figure 1 display device, a special figure 2 display device, a normal figure display device, a special figure 1 hold display device, a special figure 2 hold display device, a normal figure hold display device, and a round. It includes a display device, a right-handed display device, a probability variation display device, and a time saving display device.
Specifically, the main display device 60 is configured to include 32 lighting elements (LED1 to LED32).
In the main display device 60, LEDs 1 to LED 8 constitute a special figure 1 display device, LEDs 7 to LED 16 constitute a special figure 2 display device, and LEDs 17 and 18 constitute a normal figure display device, and LED 19 ~ LED23 constitutes a round display device, LED24 constitutes a right-handed display device, LEDs 25 and 26 constitute a special figure 1 hold display device, and LEDs 27 and 28 constitute a special figure 2 hold display device. However, the LEDs 29 and 30 constitute a normal drawing hold display device, the LED 31 constitutes a probability variation display device, and the LED 32 constitutes a time saving display device.

The special figure 1 display device can perform variable display and stop display of the first special symbol composed of numbers, symbols, and the like. Then, in the special figure 1 display device, the result of the first special symbol lottery is displayed by the first special symbol that is stopped and displayed.
The special figure 2 display device can perform variable display and stop display of the second special symbol composed of numbers, symbols, and the like. Then, in the special figure 2 display device, the result of the second special symbol lottery is displayed by the second special symbol which is stopped and displayed.
Here, the display of the special symbol (first special symbol or the second special symbol) in the special symbol display device and the display of the effect symbols z1 and z2 in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4 are the times when the variable display is started. , The time when the stop display is started, and the lottery result indicated by the stopped display symbol are associated with each other.
Then, when the first special symbol (stop symbol) stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device becomes a specific symbol (big hit symbol), or when the second special symbol (stop displayed) displayed on the special figure 2 display device is stopped. When the stop symbol) becomes a specific symbol (big hit symbol), a jackpot gaming state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is generated.
The normal symbol display device can perform variable display and stop display of a normal symbol composed of numbers, symbols, and the like. Then, in the normal symbol display device, the result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed by the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed. Then, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device becomes a specific symbol (a normal symbol per symbol), a game state per normal symbol, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is generated.

The special figure 1 hold display device displays the number of times (special figure 1 hold number) that the display of the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery is held. That is, the special figure 1 hold number is the number of special figure 1 game information in which the start determination is held.
The special figure 2 hold display device displays the number of times (special figure 2 hold number) that the display of the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is held. That is, the special figure 2 hold number is the number of special figure 2 game information in which the start determination is held.
The number of times the display of the lottery result of the ordinary symbol lottery is held (the number of times the normal figure is held) is displayed on the normal figure hold display device. That is, the number of reserved Fuzu is the number of Fuzu game information for which the start determination is suspended.
The round display device displays the number of round games (type of big hit game state) executed during the big hit game state.
The right-handed display device displays the route (left side route or right side route) at which the game ball should be launched.
The probability variation display device displays the gaming state (during the occurrence of the special figure high probability state or during the occurrence of the special figure low probability state) at the time of power recovery.
The time saving display device displays the current gaming state (time saving control is being executed or stopped).

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with one or a plurality of movable body units (not shown). In the present embodiment, one or more movable body units are arranged in the front frame unit 4, and one or more movable body units are arranged in the game board unit 10.
Each movable body unit of the front frame unit 4 is arranged on the front surface of the design portion 40, the upper surface of the tray unit 5, and the like, and it is possible to perform a predetermined effect operation.
Each movable body unit of the game board unit 10 is attached to the front side of the set plate. Specifically, each movable body unit is arranged in a space (hereinafter referred to as "effect space") between the game board 11 and the main image display device 31 (display screen 31a). Then, each movable body unit can perform a predetermined effect operation in the effect space.
Each movable body unit includes an effect member, a drive mechanism, a drive source, and a position detection sensor 24 (see FIG. 3). In this embodiment, a motor 23 (see FIG. 3) is used as a drive source. The motor 23 is a stepping motor. A solenoid may be used as the drive source.
The effect member can be displaced along a predetermined direction by a drive mechanism. Specifically, the effect member can be displaced to a plurality of positions including an initial position and an effect position. The effect member is driven (displaced) by the motor 23.

The position detection sensor 24 is composed of a photo sensor or the like. The position detection sensor 24 detects the position of the effect member. Specifically, the position detection sensor 24 includes a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit that receives the light projected from the light projecting unit. Then, the position detection sensor 24 outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 300 in response to the light reception (detection) of the light projected from the light projection unit by the light receiving unit. On the other hand, when the position detection sensor 24 does not receive (detect) the light projected from the light emitting unit by the light receiving unit, the position detection sensor 24 stops outputting the detection signal to the effect control board 300.
Further, a shielding plate is provided at a predetermined position of the effect member. Then, when the effect member is arranged at the initial position, the shielding plate is arranged between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the position detection sensor 24, and the light entering the light receiving portion is blocked. As a result, when the effect member is arranged at the initial position, the output of the detection signal from the position detection sensor 24 to the effect control board 300 is stopped. On the other hand, when the effect member is not arranged at the initial position, the position detection sensor 24 outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 300.
As a result, the effect control board 300 can detect whether or not the effect member is arranged at the initial position depending on the input status of the detection signal from the position detection sensor 24.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a detection sensor for detecting various abnormal states.
In the present embodiment, as the detection sensor, a glass frame opening sensor 107, an inner frame opening sensor 108, a vibration detection sensor 113, a radio wave detection sensor 114, a magnetic detection sensor 115, and the like are arranged.
The glass frame opening sensor 107 detects the opening of the front frame unit 4 with respect to the inner frame unit 3. Then, the glass frame opening sensor 107 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 in response to the opening of the front frame unit 4 with respect to the inner frame unit 3.
The inner frame opening sensor 108 detects the opening of the inner frame unit 3 with respect to the outer frame unit 2. Then, the inner frame opening sensor 108 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 in response to the opening of the inner frame unit 3 with respect to the outer frame unit 2.

The vibration detection sensor 113 detects the vibration of the game board 11. In this embodiment, the vibration detection sensor 113 is arranged on the game board 11. Then, the vibration detection sensor 113 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the vibration of the game board 11.
The radio wave detection sensor 114 detects radio waves generated around the game board 11. In the present embodiment, the game board 11 is provided with two radio wave detection sensors 114. Then, each radio wave detection sensor 114 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the radio wave.
The magnetic detection sensor 115 detects the magnetism generated around the game board 11. In this embodiment, three magnetic detection sensors 115 are arranged. Specifically, one magnetic detection sensor 115 is arranged in the inner frame unit 3 (discharge path). Further, in the game board 11, two magnetic detection sensors 115 are arranged. Then, the magnetic detection sensor 115 arranged in the inner frame unit 3 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 in response to the detection of magnetism. Further, each magnetic detection sensor 115 arranged on the game board 11 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of magnetism.

(Control system configuration)
Next, the configuration of the control system in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a control system of a pachinko machine. FIG. 6 is an address map of the memory area used by the CPU 210.
The pachinko machine 1 includes various control boards.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 1 supplies power (electric power) to the main control board 200, the effect control board 300, the payout control board 400, each control board 200, 300, 400, and the like. It includes a plurality of control boards such as a power supply board 600, a driver board 330, and a sub-connection board 340.
The plurality of control boards 200, 300, 400, 600 are independent (separate) circuit boards. Further, each control board 200, 300, 400, 600 is housed in a separate board case.
The main control board 200 and the effect control board 300 are included in the game board unit 10. Specifically, the main control board 200 and the effect control board 300 are attached to the back side of the game board 11.
The payout control board 400 is included in the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the payout control board 400 is attached to the back side of the inner frame included in the inner frame unit 3.

(Structure of main control board 200)
First, the configuration of the main control board 200 will be described.
The main control board 200 controls the progress of the game.
The main control board 200 includes a one-chip microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer), a clock generation circuit 202, a random number generation circuit 203, an input port 204, an output port 205, a performance display device 206, a RAM clear switch 207, a setting key switch 208, and a sink. It is configured to include a driver 240, source drivers 250a, 250b, and the like.
The one-chip microcomputer is an LSI in which a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, and the like are integrated. Specifically, the one-chip microcomputer includes a CPU 210, a ROM 220, a RAM 230, and the like.

The main control board 200 is configured to include a memory area used by the CPU 210. As shown in FIG. 6, the memory area used by the CPU 210 includes a memory area (0000H to 2FFFH) allocated to the ROM 220 and a memory area (F000H to F3FFH) allocated to the RAM 230. ..
Here, in FIG. 6, the address for specifying the memory area is shown in hexadecimal (“H” indicates that it is in hexadecimal).

The ROM 220 (memory area of the ROM 220) includes a used area m1 (0000H to 1A7AH) and a non-used area m2 (2000H to 2BFFH).
The used area m1 includes a program area, an unused area, and a data area. A program (program code) for controlling the progress of the game is stored in the program area. Data (program data) for controlling the progress of the game is stored in the data area. The used area m1 may be configured without including the unused area.

The unused area m2 is configured to include a program area and a data area.
In the program area, there is a program (program code) for executing the processing related to the test specified by the game machine rules, and a program (program) for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 (specifically, calculating the base ratio). Code) and is stored. In the data area, data (program data) for executing the process related to the test defined by the game machine rules and data (program data) for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 are stored.
Further, in addition to the used area m1 and the unused area m2, the ROM 220 is provided with an unused area, a ROM comment area, a program management area, and the like.
Arbitrary data such as the title and version of the program is stored in the ROM comment area. On the other hand, the program management area stores information necessary for the CPU 210 to execute various programs.
Further, the ROM 220 is provided with an unused area m3 of a predetermined byte (for example, 16 bytes or more) between the used area m1 and the unused area m2. As a result, the boundary between the used area m1 and the non-used area m2 is clarified.

The RAM 230 (memory area of the RAM 230) includes a used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) and a non-used area M2 (F300H to F3FFH).
The used area M1 is configured to include a work area and a stack area.
The work area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of a program (a program for controlling the progress of a game) stored in the used area m1. On the other hand, the stack area is used as an area for temporarily saving various data during the execution of the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the used area m1. The used area M1 may be configured without including the unused area.
Specifically, the work area includes a set value area, a game machine state flag area, a checksum area, a backup flag area, an error-related area, a normal game-related area 1, and a normal game-related area 2. It is configured to include.
The set value is stored in the set value area. The gaming machine status flag is stored in the gaming machine status flag area. A checksum is stored in the checksum area. The backup flag is stored in the backup flag area. Information about the error is stored in the error-related area. A subcommand pointer or the like is stored in the normal game-related area 1. In the normal game-related area 2, input / output data in the main control board 200, data for arithmetic processing, various counters (random number counter, timer counter, etc.), lottery results, flags for managing the game state, and the like are stored. In particular, the normal game-related area 2 is an area for storing game information acquired by inputting detection signals from each of the special figure 1 start port switch 101, the special figure 2 start port switch 102, and the gate switch 104. It is configured to include (a game information storage area described later).

The unused area M2 is configured to include a work area and a stack area.
The work area is stored in the unused area m2 during execution of a program (a program for executing a process related to a test specified by a game machine rule or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206). It is used as an area to temporarily store various data. On the other hand, in the stack area, a program stored in the unused area m2 (a program for executing a process related to a test specified by a game machine rule or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206) is being executed. In addition, it is used as an area to temporarily save various data.
Specifically, the work area is configured to include a performance display-related area. The performance display-related area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206.
Further, the RAM 230 is provided with an unused area M3 having a predetermined byte (16 bytes or more) between the used area M1 and the unused area M2. As a result, the boundary between the used area M1 and the non-used area M2 is clarified.

In the present embodiment, it is permitted to refer to the data stored in the out-of-use area M2 in the process based on the program (the program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1.
On the other hand, it is prohibited to rewrite (change) the data stored in the non-used area M2 by the process based on the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the used area m1. There is.
Further, in the processing based on the program stored in the non-use area m2 (the program for executing the processing related to the test specified by the game machine rules, or the program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206), the use area. It is permitted to refer to the data stored in M1.
On the other hand, the used area is obtained by the processing based on the program stored in the non-used area m2 (the program for executing the processing related to the test specified by the game machine rules or the program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206). It is prohibited to rewrite (change) the data stored in M1.
The game in the pachinko machine 1 can be progressed (completed) by a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the used area m1.

The clock generation circuit 202 generates a clock (synchronous signal) at a predetermined clock frequency (12 [MHz] in this embodiment), and outputs this clock to each of the CPU 210 and the random number generation circuit 203.
The random number generation circuit 203 generates a first loop counter that generates a winning random number in a normal symbol lottery, a second loop counter that generates a jackpot random number in the first special symbol lottery, and a second loop counter that generates a jackpot random number in the second special symbol lottery. It is configured to include a three-loop counter and a fourth loop counter that generates a reach group random number.
The first loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (in the present embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. A random number is generated by winning a normal symbol lottery. In the present embodiment, the value of the first loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s] / 12 [MHz] = 0.083 [μs]).
The second loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (in the present embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. Generate a big hit random number for the first special symbol lottery. In the present embodiment, the value of the second loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s] / 12 [MHz] = 0.083 [μs]).

The third loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (in the present embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. Generate a big hit random number for the second special symbol lottery. In the present embodiment, the value of the third loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s] / 12 [MHz] = 0.083 [μs]).
The fourth loop counter keeps the value of the loop counter within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, 0 to 10006) every time 32 clocks are input from the clock generation circuit 202 (once every 32 divisions of the clock frequency). Reach group random numbers are generated by updating one by one in (within the range). In the present embodiment, the value of the fourth loop counter is updated every 2.666 [μs] (32 [s] / 12 [MHz] = 2.666 [μs]).

The input port 204 is configured to include a plurality of input ports (in this embodiment, input port 0 to input port 3).
At the input port 0, a detection signal from the glass frame opening sensor 107, a detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108, a detection signal from the vibration detection sensor 113, a detection signal from one of the radio wave detection sensors 114, and a magnetic detection sensor 115. The detection signal etc. from is input.
A RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 207, a detection signal from the setting key switch 208, a handle detection signal from the launchable condition detection unit 422, and the like are input to the input port 1.
The input port 2 has a detection signal from the count switch 103, a detection signal from the right winning port switch 105, a detection signal from the left winning port switch 106, a detection signal from the out switch 109, and a radio wave detection sensor 114 from the other. A detection signal or the like is input.
A detection signal from the start port switch 101 of FIG. 1, a detection signal from the start port switch 102 of the special figure 2, a detection signal from the gate switch 104, and the like are input to the input port 3.
Each input port (input port 0 to input port 3) is provided with a reception storage area corresponding to each switch sensor (detection signal). In the reception storage area corresponding to each switch sensor, 1-bit data indicating the reception state of the detection signal from the switch sensor is set.
Specifically, when the detection signal from the switch sensor is input (high level), "1" is set in the reception storage area corresponding to each switch sensor, and the switch sensor is set. When the detection signal from is not input (low level), "0" is set.

The output port 205 is configured to include a plurality of output ports (in this embodiment, output ports 0 to output ports 4).
The output port 0 outputs a data signal (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60. Then, the data signal output from the output port 0 is input to the source driver 250a.
The output port 1 outputs a common signal (“COM0” to “COM3”) for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206, a launch permission signal for detecting the launch conditions described later, and the like. The common signal output from the output port 1 is input to the sink driver 240.
The output port 2 outputs an external signal. At this time, the external signal output from the output port 2 is input to the hall computer via the payout control board 400 and the external terminal board 450.
The output port 3 outputs a control signal for controlling the drive of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 64, a control signal for controlling the drive of the special electric accessory solenoid 65, and the like.
The output port 4 outputs a data signal (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 206. Then, the data signal output from the output port 4 is input to the source driver 250b.

Further, the main control board 200 includes a command output port 1 and a command output port 2. Then, the CPU 210 transmits a control command (subcommand) from the command output port 1 to the effect control board 300, and also transmits a control command (payout command) from the command output port 2 to the payout control board 400. do.
The command output port 1 and the command output port 2 have a transmission data register (not shown), a FIFO (First In First Out) buffer (not shown), and a transmission shift register (not shown), respectively. have.
The transmission data register outputs the control command input based on the subcommand transmission process (step S2-4) described later to the FIFO buffer.
The FIFO buffer is composed of a plurality of registers and can store a plurality of control commands. Then, the FIFO buffer stores the control commands input from the transmission data register and outputs the stored control commands to the transmission shift register in the input order.
The transmission shift register performs parallel-serial conversion on the control command input from the FIFO buffer, and transmits it as serial data to the effect control board 300 or the payout control board 400.

The performance display device 206 is configured to include a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is composed of a light emitting element (LED in this embodiment). Since the performance display device 206 is arranged on the back side of the game board 11, it cannot be visually recognized by the player.
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, as the state of the gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "gaming machine state"), a game-enabled state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, a setting abnormality state, and a RAM abnormality state are used. And the backup abnormal state are specified. Then, the information displayed on the performance display device 206 changes according to the state of the gaming machine being generated.

The performance display device 206 is configured to include four (four-digit) display units (not shown). Each display unit is composed of eight lighting elements. That is, each display unit is composed of a 7-segment LED capable of displaying numbers, symbols, etc., and a dot segment LED capable of displaying dots such as a decimal point.
Specifically, the performance display device 206 is configured to include 32 lighting elements (LED 33 to LED 64). In the performance display device 206, the LEDs 33 to LED40 serve as the first digit display unit, the LEDs 41 to LED48 serve as the second digit display unit, the LEDs 49 to LED56 serve as the third digit display unit, and the LEDs 57 to LED64. Is the display unit of the 4th digit.

The game can be advanced while the game is in a playable state. Then, during the occurrence of the playable state, the base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206.
In the present embodiment, the first base ratio and the second base ratio are set every predetermined time (5.0 [s] in the present embodiment) in the performance display device 206 during the occurrence of the playable state. , Are displayed alternately.
The "first base ratio" is the base ratio of the current section (the base ratio calculated for the period from the start of the current section to the present time).
The "second base ratio" is the base ratio of the previous section (the final base ratio calculated for the previous section).
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, information for identifying the type of base ratio (first base ratio or second base ratio) is provided by the upper two-digit display unit among the four-digit display units. It is displayed, and a number indicating the base ratio (percentage) is displayed by the display unit of the lower two digits.

The set value can be changed while the setting change state is occurring. Then, during the occurrence of the setting change state, the set value stored (set) in the set value area of the RAM 230 is displayed on the performance display device 206.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, the information indicating that the setting change state is occurring by the upper 3 digit display unit among the 4 digit display units (specifically, the upper 1st digit is ""R","n." In the upper 2 digits, "-" in the upper 3 digits) is displayed, and a number indicating the set value stored in the set value area is displayed by the display unit of the lowest 1 digit. Will be done.
The set value can be confirmed while the setting confirmation state is occurring. Then, during the occurrence of the setting confirmation state, the set value stored (set) in the set value area of the RAM 230 is displayed on the performance display device 206.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, the information indicating that the setting confirmation state is being generated by the upper 3 digit display unit among the 4 digit display units (specifically, the upper 1st digit is ""r","n." In the upper 2nd digit, no display in the upper 3rd digit) is displayed, and a number indicating the set value stored in the set value area is displayed by the display unit of the lowest 1 digit. To.

During the game stop state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, and backup abnormal state), the game cannot proceed. Then, during the occurrence of the game stop state, the performance display device 206 displays an error code corresponding to the occurrence of the abnormality.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, the information indicating that the game stop state is occurring by the upper 3 digit display unit among the 4 digit display units (specifically, the upper 1st digit is ""E","r." In the upper 2nd digit, no display in the upper 3rd digit) is displayed, and the error that occurred (setting error state, RAM error state, or backup error) is displayed by the display unit of the lowest 1 digit. A number indicating the error code corresponding to the status) is displayed.

The RAM clear switch 207 is a tactile switch. That is, the RAM clear switch 207 is configured to include an operation unit that can be pressed. Then, the RAM clear switch 207 outputs a RAM clear signal to the input port 1 when the operation unit is pressed.
The setting key switch 208 is a key lock switch. That is, the setting key switch 208 is configured to include an operation unit provided with a keyhole. By inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole, the operation unit is unlocked and can be rotated (switched) from the OFF state to the ON state. Then, the setting key switch 208 outputs a detection signal to the input port 1 when the operation unit is in the ON state.

The sink driver 240 controls the output of the common signal to the display devices 60 and 206 according to the common signal (“COM0” to “COM3”) output from the output port 1.
The source driver 250a controls the output of the data signal to the main display device 60 according to the data signal (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) output from the output port 0.
The source driver 250b controls the output of the data signal to the performance display device 206 according to the data signal (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) output from the output port 4.
The pachinko machine 1 is provided with a source driver 250a corresponding to the main display device 60 and a source driver 250b corresponding to the performance display device 206. The application of the power supply voltage Vcc to the data signal line is individually controlled by the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1, a common sink driver 240 is provided for the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206. The grounding of the common signal line is collectively controlled by the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206.
This eliminates the need to provide a sink driver 240 corresponding to each of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206, and as a result, an output port (common signal is output) corresponding to each of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206. There is no need to provide an output port).
Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts required for lighting control of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206, and in the main control board 200 (CPU 210), the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206 can be reduced. It is not necessary to generate a common signal corresponding to each of the above, and it is possible to reduce the control load for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206.

Further, the main control board 200 is configured to include a test signal output circuit (not shown).
In the test signal output process (step S4-24) described later, the CPU 210 generates test information (test signal) indicating an internal state (big hit game state, time saving control execution state, special symbol lottery probability state, etc.). Then, the generated test signal is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, the test signal stored in the port output request buffer is output from the predetermined output port. Then, the test signal output from the predetermined output port is input to the interface board of the computer for testing (not shown) via the test signal output circuit.
Further, in the main control board 200, the detection signal from the start port switch 101 of the special figure 1, the detection signal from the start port switch 102 of the special figure 2, the detection signal from the gate switch 104, the detection signal from the count switch 103, and the right prize. The detection signal from the port switch 105, the detection signal from the left winning port switch 106, the detection signal from the out switch 109, etc. are input to the input port 204, and at the same time, the test signal of the test computer is input via the test signal output circuit. It is input to the interface board.
Further, in the main control board 200, control signals for controlling the drive of each solenoid (ordinary electric accessory solenoid 64, special electric accessory solenoid 65, etc.) output from the output port 3 are transmitted to the solenoids 64 and 65. At the same time as being input, it is input to the interface board of the computer for testing via the test signal output circuit.

(Structure of payout control board 400)
Next, the configuration of the payout control board 400 will be described.
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a launch condition detection circuit and a launch control circuit.
The payout control board 400 controls the launch of the game ball to the game area 30 and the payout of the game ball.
The payout control board 400 includes a one-chip microcomputer.
The one-chip microcomputer is an LSI in which a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, and the like are integrated. Specifically, the one-chip microcomputer includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and the like.
The payout control board 400 controls the game ball payout operation (prize ball payout operation) by the game ball payout device 440 based on the control command received from the main control board 200. Further, the payout control board 400 controls the game ball payout operation (ball payout operation) by the game ball payout device 440 based on the ball lending instruction signal received from the CR unit 700.
Further, the payout control board 400 includes a resistance value (voltage value) input from the firing volume 411, a touch signal input from the touch sensor 412, a firing stop signal input from the firing stop switch 413, and a main control board. Based on the launch permission signal input from the 200 and the CR connection signal input from the CR unit 700, the game ball launch operation by the game ball launcher 430 (launch solenoid 431) is controlled.
Hereinafter, a method of controlling the game ball launching operation by the payout control board 400 will be described in detail.

As shown in FIG. 4, the payout control board 400 includes a launch condition detection circuit 420 and a launch control circuit 425 as a circuit for controlling the game ball payout operation.
The launch condition detection circuit 420 is a circuit that detects the establishment of the launch condition described later.
The launch condition detection circuit 420 includes an operation detection unit 421, a launchable condition detection unit 422, and a launch condition detection unit 423.
The operation detection unit 421 is a circuit that detects the rotation operation (rotation operation amount) of the handle operation unit.
The operation detection unit 421 includes an operational amplifier that controls the output of the operation detection signal according to the resistance value (voltage value) of the firing volume 411 (the operation detection signal is set to a high level or a low level).
Specifically, in the firing handle unit 6, the resistance value of the firing volume 411 changes according to the amount of rotation of the handle operating unit. Then, the operation detection unit 421 detects the resistance value (voltage value) of the firing volume 411, and based on the detected resistance value (voltage value), the presence / absence of the rotation operation of the handle operation unit and the rotation operation of the handle operation unit. Detect the amount and.
Then, the operation detection unit 421 generates an operation detection signal while detecting the rotation operation of the steering wheel operation unit, and outputs the generated operation detection signal to the launchable condition detection unit 422 (operation detection). Make the signal high level). On the other hand, the operation detection unit 421 stops the output of the operation detection signal to the launchable condition detection unit 422 (the operation detection signal is set to the low level) when the rotation operation of the handle operation unit is not detected.
Further, when the operation detection unit 421 detects the rotation operation of the handle operation unit, the operation detection unit 421 generates a firing intensity signal according to the rotation operation amount of the handle operation unit (resistance value of the firing volume 411), and the generated firing. The intensity signal is output to the launch control circuit 425.

The launchable condition detection unit 422 is a circuit for detecting the establishment of the launchable condition.
The launchable condition detection unit 422 has an AND gate IC (logic IC) that controls output / stop of a predetermined signal according to the calculation result of the logical product of the operation detection signal, the touch signal, and the launch stop signal, and an AND gate. It includes a transistor that switches the output / stop of the handle detection signal according to a predetermined signal output from the IC.
The "launchable condition" is a condition related to the player's operation (player's intention) among a plurality of conditions constituting the launch condition described later.
The firing conditions include (1) a condition based on the detection status of the firing volume 441 and the operation detection unit 421 (detection status of the rotation operation of the handle operation unit), and (2) the detection status of the touch sensor 412 (handle by the player). It includes a condition based on (detection status of contact with the operation unit) and (3) a condition based on the detection status of the launch stop switch 413 (detection status of pressing operation of the launch stop button).

In the present embodiment, (1) the firing volume 441 and the operation detection unit 421 detect the rotation operation of the handle operation unit, and (2) the touch sensor 412 detects the contact of the player with the handle operation unit. The firing condition is satisfied when all the conditions of (3) that the pressing operation of the firing stop button is not detected by the firing stop switch 413 are satisfied. On the other hand, when at least one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the launchable condition is not satisfied.
Here, the firing conditions include (1) a condition based on the detection status of the firing volume 441 and the operation detection unit 421 (detection status of the rotation operation of the handle operation unit), and (2) the detection status of the touch sensor 412 (player). (3) The condition based on the detection status of the launch stop switch 413 (the detection status of the press operation of the launch stop button) is not included. It doesn't matter.
That is, (1) the firing volume 441 and the operation detection unit 421 detect the rotation operation of the steering wheel operation unit, and (2) the touch sensor 412 detects the contact of the player with the steering wheel operation unit. When both of the conditions are satisfied, the launchable condition is satisfied, and when at least one of the conditions (1) and (2) is not satisfied, the launchable condition is not satisfied. It doesn't matter.

Specifically, the launchable condition detection unit 422 has an operation detection signal input from the operation detection unit 421, a touch signal input from the touch sensor 412, and a launch stop signal input from the launch stop switch 413. Based on this, it is detected whether or not the launchable condition is satisfied.
At this time, the launchable condition detection unit 422 detects that the launchable condition is satisfied when all of the operation detection signal, the touch signal, and the launch stop signal are input. On the other hand, when at least one of the operation detection signal, the touch signal, and the launch stop signal is not input, the establishment of the launchable condition is not detected.
The launchable condition detection unit 422 generates a handle detection signal when detecting the establishment of the launchable condition, and the generated handle detection signal is sent to each of the main control board 200 and the launch condition detection unit 423. Output (set the handle detection signal to high level). On the other hand, when the launchable condition detection unit 422 does not detect the establishment of the launchable condition, the output of the handle detection signal to each of the main control board 200 and the launch condition detection unit 423 is stopped (the handle detection signal is low). Level).

The launch condition detection unit 423 is a circuit for detecting the establishment of the launch condition.
The launch condition detection unit 423 includes an AND gate IC (logic IC) that controls output / stop of the launch signal according to the operation result of the AND of the handle detection signal, the launch permission signal, and the CR connection signal. To.
The "launch condition" is a condition for executing the launch of the game ball (game ball launch operation) to the game area 30 by the game ball launcher 430 (launch solenoid 431).
In this embodiment, (1) the launchable condition is satisfied, (2) the launch permission signal is input from the main control board 200, and (3) the CR connection signal is input from the CR unit 700. The firing condition is satisfied when all the conditions of being done are satisfied. On the other hand, when at least one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the firing condition is not satisfied.

The "launch permission signal" indicates that communication is possible between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 (the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 are electrically connected). As a premise, when the playable state is set, it is output from the main control board 200 to the firing condition detection unit 423.
Here, the firing permission signal may be output from the main control board 200 to the firing condition detection unit 423 while the power is being turned on to the main control board 200, regardless of the gaming machine state. do not have. That is, when communication is possible between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 (when the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 are electrically connected), a firing permission signal is emitted. However, it may be configured to be output from the main control board 200 to the firing condition detection unit 423.
The "CR connection signal" is used when communication is possible between the CR unit 700 and the payout control board 400 (when the CR unit 700 and the payout control board 400 are electrically connected). It is output from the CR unit 700 to the firing condition detection unit 423.

Specifically, the launch condition detection unit 423 includes a handle detection signal input from the launchable condition detection unit 422, a launch permission signal input from the main control board 200, and a CR connection signal input from the CR unit 700. , Whether or not the firing condition is satisfied is detected.
At this time, the launch condition detection unit 423 detects that the launch condition is satisfied when all of the handle detection signal, the launch permission signal, and the CR connection signal are input. On the other hand, when at least one of the handle detection signal, the launch permission signal, and the CR connection signal is not input, the establishment of the launch condition is not detected.
The launch condition detection unit 423 generates a launch signal when detecting the establishment of the launch condition, and outputs the generated launch signal to the launch control circuit 425 (the launch signal is set to a high level). On the other hand, when the launch condition detection unit 423 does not detect the establishment of the launch condition, the launch signal output to the launch control circuit 425 is stopped (the launch signal is set to a low level).

The launch control circuit 425 is a circuit that controls the launch intensity of the game ball by the game ball launcher 430 and the launch timing of the game ball by the game ball launcher 430. That is, the launch control circuit 425 controls the output of the drive signal to the game ball launcher 430 (launch solenoid 431).
Specifically, the firing control circuit 425 includes a clock generation unit (not shown), a firing timing control unit (not shown), and a firing solenoid driving unit (not shown).
The clock generation unit outputs a clock signal having a predetermined frequency to the emission timing control unit.
The firing timing control unit generates a pulse signal for controlling the firing timing based on the clock signal input from the clock generating section, and outputs the generated pulse signal to the firing solenoid driving section. At this time, the firing timing control unit generates a pulse signal so that the number of game balls fired per minute is a predetermined number (for example, 100 [balls]).
The firing solenoid drive unit is based on a firing signal input from the firing condition detection unit 423, a pulse signal input from the firing timing control unit, and a firing intensity signal input from the operation detection unit 421. It controls the output of the drive signal to 431.
Specifically, the firing solenoid drive unit is input from the operation detection unit 421 when the firing signal is input from the firing condition detection unit 423 and the pulse signal is input from the firing timing control unit. A drive signal (drive current) corresponding to the firing intensity signal is output to the firing solenoid 431. As a result, the game ball is launched with an intensity corresponding to the firing intensity signal input from the operation detection unit 421.
On the other hand, the firing solenoid driving unit stops the output of the driving signal to the firing solenoid 431 when the firing signal is not input from the firing condition detection unit 423. As a result, the launch of the game ball is stopped.

The game ball launching device 430 includes a hitting mallet (not shown) and a launching solenoid 431 for driving the hitting mallet. The firing solenoid 431 is composed of a rotary solenoid. Here, the hitting mallet may be driven by another drive source such as a motor.
A game ball is supplied to the game ball launcher 430 from a ball feed unit (not shown). Then, when a drive signal is input to the launch solenoid 431, the launch solenoid 431 is driven according to the input drive signal, and the game ball is launched by the hitting mallet. As a result, the game ball is fired at the game area 30.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the launch is stopped on the premise that the playable state is set in the main control board 200 and the communication between the CR unit 700 and the payout control board 400 is possible. When the handle operation unit is rotated (displaced from the initial position toward the limit position side) by the contact of the player without pressing the button, the game ball launching operation by the game ball launching device 430 is started. .. Then, during the execution of the game ball launching operation by the game ball launching device 430, the game ball is launched to the game area 30 with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the handle operation unit.
Further, when the launch stop button is pressed, the game ball launch operation by the game ball launcher 430 is stopped. That is, even when the handle operation unit is rotated by the contact of the player, when the launch stop button is pressed, the game ball launch operation by the game ball launcher 430 is stopped.
Further, when the handle operation unit is returned to the initial position (when the handle operation unit is not rotated), the game ball launch operation by the game ball launcher 430 is stopped. That is, even when the player is in contact with the handle operation unit, when the handle operation unit is returned to the initial position, the game ball launching operation by the game ball launcher 430 is stopped.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the output of the handle detection signal from the launchable condition detection unit 422 to the main control board 200 is maintained while the launchable condition is satisfied (hereinafter referred to as the “launchable state”). Will be done.
That is, a state is occurring in which the rotation operation of the handle operation unit is detected, the contact with the handle operation unit is detected, and the pressing operation of the firing stop button is not detected (launchable state). In addition, the output of the handle detection signal from the launch condition detection circuit 420 to the main control board 200 is maintained.
At this time, as long as the launchable state is generated, regardless of whether or not the launch permission signal is input from the main control board 200 to the launch condition detection circuit 420 (regardless of the game machine state set in the main control board 200). The output of the handle detection signal from the launch condition detection circuit 420 to the main control board 200 is maintained.
Further, as long as the launchable state is generated, communication is possible between the CR unit 700 and the payout control board 400 regardless of whether or not a CR connection signal is input from the CR unit 700 to the launch condition detection circuit 420. The output of the handle detection signal from the launch condition detection circuit 420 to the main control board 200 is maintained regardless of whether it is in a state or not).
As described above, the main control board 200 can detect (understand) whether or not the launchable state is occurring, and control the progress of the game, the content of the effect, etc. according to the occurrence status of the launchable state. It becomes possible to do.

That is, the main control board 200 can be fired when it detects that the handle detection signal has changed from the non-input state to the input state (the handle detection signal has changed from the low level to the high level). A game status specification command for designating the occurrence (start) of a state is transmitted to the effect control board 300.
On the other hand, the main control board 200 can be fired when it detects that the handle detection signal has changed from the input state to the non-input state (the handle detection signal has changed from the high level to the low level). A game status specification command for designating the release (end) of the state is transmitted to the effect control board 300.
As a result, the effect control board 300 detects the occurrence of the launchable state by receiving the game status specification command that specifies the occurrence of the launchable state, and receives the game status specification command that specifies the release of the launchable state. It is possible to detect the release of the fireable state.
Then, the effect control board 300 can change the effect content depending on whether or not the launchable state is being generated.

(Structure of effect control board 300)
Next, the configuration of the effect control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the effect control board.
The effect control board 300 controls the effect (display effect, sound effect, lamp effect, movable body effect, etc.) based on the control command received from the main control board 200.
As shown in FIG. 5, the effect control board 300 includes a microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 301 and various external devices externally connected to the microcomputer 301.
In the present embodiment, various external devices include a control ROM 302, a CGROM (Character Generator Read Only Memory) 303, a DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory) 304, and the like.

The control ROM 302 stores a control program for controlling the operation of the microcomputer 301, various data necessary for executing the control program, and the like. In particular, in the control ROM 302, the effect scenario data corresponding to each effect number, the animation table corresponding to each display effect number, the sound table corresponding to each sound effect number, the lamp control table corresponding to each lamp effect number, and each movable A movable body control table corresponding to the body effect number, various compression lamp drive data, and various compression motor drive data are stored (stored).
The "compressed lamp drive data" is data obtained by compressing (encoding) the lamp drive data in a predetermined format. The "lamp drive data" is data for driving various lamps 20 and 21 (data for designating the luminance values of the lamps 20 and 21 belonging to each system).
The "compression motor drive data" is data obtained by compressing (encoding) the motor drive data in a predetermined format. The "motor drive data" is data for driving various motors 23 (data defining output values of each motor 23).
In this embodiment, a NOR type flash memory (NOR type ROM) is used as the control ROM 302. Here, as the control ROM 302, an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory) may be used.
The control ROM 302 is connected to the HOST interface 313 of the microcomputer 301.

Various compressed image data, various compressed audio data, and the like are stored (stored) in the CGROM 303.
The "compressed image data" is data obtained by compressing (encoding) image data (material data) in a predetermined format. The "image data (material data)" is data of an image (moving image / still image) that is a material for drawing processing.
The "compressed audio data" is data obtained by compressing (encoding) audio data in a predetermined format. The "voice data" is voice data output from various speakers 22.
In this embodiment, a NAND flash memory (NAND type ROM) is used as the CGROM 303. Specifically, the CGROM 303 is configured by an SSD (Solid State Drive) using a NAND flash memory as a storage unit.
The CGROM 303 is connected to the CG bus interface 314 of the microcomputer 301. The CG bus interface 314 is a SATA (Serial AT Atchment) standard connection interface. As a result, the reading of various data stored in the CGROM 303 is SATA-transferred.

The DRAM 304 is provided with a preload area. Various data (specifically, compressed image data, compressed audio data, etc.) stored in the CGROM 303 are transferred (preloaded) to the preload area.
Further, the DRAM 304 is provided with a drawing command buffer area, a sound command buffer area, a lamp command buffer area, and a motor command buffer area. In the present embodiment, a double buffering method is adopted for the drawing command buffer area, and the DRAM 304 is provided with two drawing command buffer areas.
The two drawing command buffer areas have the same size. Of the two drawing command buffer areas, the other drawing command buffer area is designated as the transfer area while one drawing command buffer area is designated as the construction area. Further, for each drawing command buffer area, the designation of the construction area and the designation of the transfer area are alternately switched for each frame.
Then, for each drawing command buffer area, during the period designated in the construction area, the display list described later is stored (generated / constructed) in the drawing command buffer area, and during the period designated in the transfer area. , The display list stored in the drawing command buffer area is transferred to the VDP (specifically, the preloader circuit 319).
The DRAM 304 is connected to the DRAM interface 315 of the microcomputer 301.

The microcomputer 301 is an LSI in which a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, and the like are integrated.
The microcomputer 301 controls the effect operation by various effect means based on the control command received from the main control board 200.
The "various effect means" include various image display devices 31, 32, various speakers 22, various lamps 20, 21, and various motors 23 (various movable bodies). Therefore, in the "effect operation by various effect means", the display of the effect image by the various image display devices 31 and 32, the output of the sound by the various speakers 22, the driving (lighting) of the various lamps 20 and 21, and the various motors 23 ( The drive of various movable bodies) is included.
The microcomputer 301 includes a CPU 310, a work memory for a CPU 311, a CPU interface 312, a host interface 313, a CG bus interface 314, a DRAM interface 315, a VRAM 316, a serial communication controller 317, a transfer circuit 318, a preloader circuit 319, a display circuit 320, and a graphic. It includes internal devices such as a CPU circuit 321 and a drawing circuit 322, and a sound controller 323, and these internal devices are bus-connected to the data bus 324.

The CPU 310 is connected to the HOST interface 313 via the CPU interface 312. Further, the main control board 200 is connected to the HOST interface 313, and a control command from the main control board 200 is input. Further, a data bus 324 is connected to the HOST interface 313.
As a result, the CPU 310 can receive a control command (subcommand) from the main control board 200 via the HOST interface 313.
Further, the CPU 310 can communicate with internal devices such as a serial communication controller 317, a preloader circuit 319, a display circuit 320, and a sound controller 323 via the HOST interface 313 and the data bus 324. ..
Further, the CPU 310 can read various data (control program, control data, etc.) stored in the control ROM 302 via the HOST interface 313.
Further, the CPU 310 can read various data (compressed audio data) stored in the CGROM 303 via the HOST interface 313, the data bus 324, and the CG bus interface 314.
Further, the CPU 310 can read / write data to / from the DRAM 304 via the HOST interface 313, the data bus 324, and the DRAM interface 315.

The CPU 310 executes various arithmetic processes required for controlling the effect operation by the various effect means, control processes of the internal device corresponding to the various arithmetic processes, and the like.
At this time, the CPU 310 uses the CPU work memory (RAM) 311 and the DRAM 304 as a work area for various arithmetic processing, a buffer area for various arithmetic processing data, a table data area, a buffer area for various input / output data, and the like. do.
That is, the CPU 310 selects the effect (effect number) to be executed based on the control command received from the main control board 200, and selects and sets the effect scenario data corresponding to the selected effect number. In addition, various command information (messages) are sequentially set according to the selected / set production scenario data. Further, various control data (animation table, sound table, lamp control table, movable body control table, etc.) are selected and set according to the set command information. Then, internal commands (drawing command, sound command, lamp command, etc.) for controlling various internal devices (VDP, sound controller 323, lamp controller 317a, motor controller 317b, etc.) according to various control data selected and set are used. (Motor command, etc.) is generated.

Specifically, the CPU 310 generates a display list in the drawing command buffer area designated in the construction area according to the animation table.
The "display list" is a collection of drawing commands for one frame. That is, the drawing commands for one frame are described in the display list in a predetermined order. Then, in the VDP, the drawing data for one frame is generated by executing the processing based on each drawing command in the order described in the display list.
The "drawing command" is information that specifies the content of the drawing process (drawing control) to be executed by VDP. In particular, the drawing command includes the address of the storage area in which the compressed image data used for drawing is stored (hereinafter referred to as "image address"), the magnification (magnification / reduction ratio) at the time of drawing the image data, and the said. The coordinates for drawing the image data (coordinates in the frame buffer area), the transparency at the time of drawing the image data (transparency / transparency / transparency), and the like are specified.

Further, the CPU 310 generates a sound command in the sound command buffer area according to the sound table.
The "sound command" is information that specifies the content of the voice output process (sound output control) to be executed by the sound controller 323.
Further, the CPU 310 generates a lamp command in the lamp command buffer area according to the lamp control table.
The "lamp command" is information that specifies the content of the lamp drive process (lamp drive control) to be executed by the lamp controller 317a.
Further, the CPU 310 generates a motor command in the motor command buffer area according to the movable body control table.
The "motor command" is information that specifies the content of the motor drive process (motor drive control) to be executed by the motor controller 317b.

Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 310 transfers (preloads) the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 to the preload area of the DRAM 304.
That is, the NAND type flash memory such as the CGROM 303 can easily increase the capacity as compared with the NOR type flash memory such as the control ROM 302, but the data read speed is slow. Therefore, if the compressed audio data is directly read from the CGROM 303 (NAND flash memory) when the audio output process is executed by the sound controller 323, the processing performance may be significantly deteriorated.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, before the audio output process is executed, the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 is transferred to the DRAM 304, which is a storage means having a faster data reading speed than the CGROM 303. .. Further, the compressed audio data is read from the DRAM 304 when the audio output process is executed, thereby preventing the processing performance from deteriorating.

Specifically, when the power is turned on, the CPU 310 transfers (preloads) a predetermined compressed audio data among the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 to the preload area of the DRAM 304. At this time, in the present embodiment, all the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 is transferred to the preload area of the DRAM 304. Here, among the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303, a part of the compressed audio data may be transferred to the preload area of the DRAM 304.
Then, in the pachinko machine 1, after the transfer of the predetermined compressed voice data is completed, it is possible to control the voice output by the various speakers 22 (voice output processing by the sound controller 323). In other words, before the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it becomes impossible to control the audio output by the various speakers 22 (audio output processing by the sound controller 323).
Further, after the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it is possible to control the display of the effect image (drawing process by VDP) by the various image display devices 31 and 32. In other words, before the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it becomes impossible to control the display of the effect image (drawing process by VDP) by the various image display devices 31 and 32. ..

On the other hand, before the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it is possible to control the driving (light emission) of the various lamps 20 and 21 (lamp driving processing by the lamp controller 317a).
Further, before the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it is possible to control the drive of the various motors 23 (various movable bodies) (motor drive process by the motor controller 317b).

The transfer circuit 318 executes the transfer of various data between internal devices.
Specifically, the transfer circuit 318 transfers the display list stored in the drawing command buffer area designated in the transfer area to the preloader circuit 319. Further, the transfer circuit 318 transfers the display list rewritten by the preloader circuit 319 to the drawing circuit 322.
Further, the transfer circuit 318 transfers the sound command stored in the sound command buffer area to the sound controller 323. Further, the transfer circuit 318 transfers the lamp command stored in the lamp command buffer area to the lamp controller 317a. Further, the transfer circuit 318 transfers the motor command stored in the motor command buffer area to the motor controller 317b.

The VRAM 316 is provided with an image development area. Then, the image data (material data) expanded (restored / decoded) by the graphics decoder circuit 321 is temporarily stored in the image expansion area.
Further, the VRAM 316 is provided with a frame buffer area. In the present embodiment, a double buffering method is adopted for the frame buffer area, and the VRAM 316 is provided with two frame buffer areas.
The two frame buffer areas have the same size. Of the two frame buffer areas, the other frame buffer area is designated as the output area while one frame buffer area is designated as the drawing area. Further, for each frame buffer area, the designation of the drawing area and the designation of the output area are alternately switched for each frame.
Then, for each frame buffer area, during the period designated for the drawing area, drawing data for one frame is stored (generated / drawn) in the frame buffer area, and during the period designated for the output area. , The output of the video signal is executed based on the drawing data for one frame stored in the frame buffer area.

In the microcomputer 301, the preloader circuit 319, the display circuit 320, the graphics decoder circuit 321 and the drawing circuit 322 function as a VDP (Video Display Processor).
The VDP controls the display of the effect image by the various image display devices 31 and 32. Specifically, the VDP generates drawing data in response to receiving a display list (drawing command) from the CPU 310, generates a video signal based on the generated drawing data, and uses the generated video signal as various images. Output to the display devices 31 and 32.
The preloader circuit 319 can read various data (compressed image data) stored in the CGROM 303 via the CG bus interface 314.
In particular, the preloader circuit 319 transfers (preloads) the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 to the preload area of the DRAM 304 before the drawing process by the drawing circuit 322 is executed.
That is, as described above, the NAND type flash memory such as the CGROM 303 can easily increase the capacity as compared with the NOR type flash memory such as the control ROM 302, but the data read speed is slow. Therefore, if the compressed image data is directly read from the CGROM 303 (NAND flash memory) when the drawing process is executed by the drawing circuit 322, the processing performance may be significantly deteriorated.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, before the drawing process is executed, the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 is transferred to the DRAM 304, which is a storage means having a faster data reading speed than the CGROM 303. Further, the compressed image data is read out from the DRAM 304 when the drawing process is executed, thereby preventing the processing performance from deteriorating.

Specifically, each time the preloader circuit 319 receives the display list, the preload area of the DRAM 304 uses the compressed image data for one frame specified in the display list among the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303. Transfer (preload) to. At this time, the preloader circuit 319 rewrites the display list.
That is, in the display list generated by the CPU 310, an address that specifies the storage area of the CGROM 303 is described as an image address included in each drawing command. Therefore, the preloader circuit 319 stores compressed image data stored in the storage area (storage area of the CGROM 303) designated by the image address included in the drawing command for each drawing command included in the display list in a predetermined area of the DRAM 304. After transferring to, the image address included in the drawing command is rewritten to an address that specifies the storage area (predetermined area of DRAM 304) after transfer. This will generate a new display list with the image address rewritten.
Here, in the present embodiment, the preloader circuit 319 is configured to transfer (preload) the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 to the preload area of the DRAM 304. However, the preloader circuit 319 may be configured to transfer the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 to a predetermined area (preload area) of the VRAM 316.
The display list rewritten by the preloader circuit 319 is transferred to the drawing circuit 320 by the transfer circuit 318.

The drawing circuit 322 stores (generates / draws) drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer area designated as the drawing area according to the display list received from the preloader circuit 319.
Specifically, each time the drawing circuit 320 receives a display list, the drawing circuit 320 reads out one frame of compressed image data specified in the display list from the DRAM 304. One frame of compressed image data read from the DRAM 304 is restored (decoded / decoded) by the graphic decoder circuit 321 and stored (decompressed) in the image expansion area of the VRAM 316. Then, the drawing circuit 320 uses the image data stored in the image development area to generate drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer area designated in the drawing area.

The display circuit 320 generates a video signal based on the drawing data for one frame stored (generated / drawn) in the frame buffer area designated in the output area, and displays the generated video signal in various images. Output to devices 31 and 32. In this embodiment, a digital RGB signal is output as a video signal. Here, the LVDS (Low voltage differential signaling) signal may be output as the video signal.
Specifically, the display circuit 320 includes a data acquisition circuit (not shown), a scaler circuit (not shown), a color correction circuit (not shown), a ditherer circuit (not shown), and a synchronization signal generation circuit (not shown). It is composed of including) and the like.
The data acquisition circuit reads the drawing data stored in the frame buffer area specified in the output area.
The scaler circuit can perform scaling processing (enlargement processing / reduction processing) on the drawing data read by the data acquisition circuit.
The color correction circuit can perform color correction processing on the drawing data after processing by the scaler circuit.
The ditherer circuit can perform dithering processing on the drawing data after processing by the color correction circuit.
Then, the drawing data processed by the dithering circuit is output as a video signal (digital RGB signal).
The synchronization signal generation circuit generates a horizontal synchronization signal and a vertical synchronization signal (Vsync). Then, the synchronization signal generation circuit outputs the generated horizontal synchronization signal and vertical synchronization signal to the various image display devices 31 and 32. Further, the synchronization signal generation circuit outputs the generated vertical synchronization signal to the CPU 310.
Here, in the present embodiment, the display of the effect image (display of the effect image based on the drawing data for one frame) in the image display devices 31 and 32 is updated every 16.66 [ms]. Therefore, the synchronization signal generation circuit outputs a vertical synchronization signal to the CPU 310 (high level) every 16.66 [ms].

The sound controller 323 controls the output of audio by the various speakers 22.
Specifically, the sound controller 323 generates an audio signal in response to receiving a sound command from the CPU 310, and outputs the generated audio signal to various speakers 22.
The sound controller 323 includes a voice decoder circuit (not shown). The voice decoder circuit reads the compressed voice data specified by the sound command from the DRAM 304 in response to the reception of the sound command from the CPU 310. In addition, the read compressed audio data is restored (decoded / decoded). Then, an audio signal is generated based on the restored audio data, and the generated audio signal is output to various speakers 22.

The serial communication controller 317 includes a lamp controller 317a and a motor controller 317b.
The lamp controller 317a controls driving (light emission) of various lamps 20 and 21.
Specifically, the lamp controller 317a generates lamp drive data in response to the reception of the lamp command from the CPU 310, and outputs the generated lamp drive data together with the clock signal to the lamp drivers 332 and 342. At this time, the lamp drive data is output as serial data.
The lamp controller 317a includes a lamp decoder circuit (not shown). The lamp decoder circuit reads the compressed lamp drive data specified by the lamp command from the control ROM 302 in response to the reception of the lamp command from the CPU 310. In addition, the read compression lamp drive data is restored (decoded / decoded). Then, the lamp drive data is generated based on the restored lamp drive data, and the generated lamp drive data is output to the lamp drivers 332 and 342.

The motor controller 317b controls the drive of various motors 23 (various movable bodies).
Specifically, the motor controller 317b generates motor drive data in response to receiving a motor command from the CPU 310, and outputs the generated motor drive data to the motor drivers 333 and 343 together with the clock signal. At this time, the motor drive data is output as serial data.
The motor controller 317b includes a motor sequencer circuit (not shown). The motor sequencer circuit reads the compression motor drive data specified by the motor command from the control ROM 302 in response to the reception of the motor command from the CPU 310. In addition, the read compression motor drive data is restored (decoded / decoded). Then, the motor drive data is generated based on the restored motor drive data, and the generated motor drive data is output to the motor driver 333, 343.
Further, information indicating the detection status of various sensors 24 is input to the motor controller 317b from the driver board 330, information indicating the detection status of each switch 25 to 29 from the sub-connection board 340, and various sensors 24. Information indicating the detection status of is input.

(Method of controlling the effect by the effect control board 300)
Next, a method of controlling the effect by the effect control board 300 will be described.
The CPU 310 selects an effect (effect number) to be executed according to a control command received from the main control board 200. Then, the effect scenario data corresponding to the selected effect number and the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data are set in the effect scenario setting area of the DRAM 304.
The "production scenario data" is information that defines the progress of the production. Specifically, a plurality of process data are registered in the production scenario data in chronological order. That is, a plurality of process data and information for designating the start time (start timing) of the process based on each process data are registered in the effect scenario data.
Each process data contains one or more command information (messages). In particular, as command information, command information (hereinafter referred to as "effect start command") for designating the start of sub-effect (display effect, sound effect, lamp effect, or movable body effect), sub-effect (display effect, sound). Command information (hereinafter referred to as "effect end command") for designating the end of the effect (effect, lamp effect, or movable body effect) is specified.
The effect start command is configured to include information for designating a sub effect (display effect, sound effect, lamp effect, or movable body effect) to be started. Specifically, the effect start command is configured to include information for designating a sub effect number (display effect number, sound effect number, lamp effect number, or movable body effect number) of the sub effect to be started.
The effect end command is configured to include information for designating a sub-effect (display effect, sound effect, lamp effect, or movable body effect) to be terminated. Specifically, the effect end command is configured to include information for designating a sub effect number (display effect number, sound effect number, lamp effect number, or movable body effect number) of the sub effect to be terminated.

Then, the CPU 310 controls the progress of the effect based on the effect scenario data set in the effect scenario setting area.
Specifically, the CPU 310 updates the effect scenario timer set in the effect scenario setting area in the first predetermined cycle (1/30 [s] in this embodiment), and also updates the effect scenario timer after the update. Based on the value of, it is determined whether or not the process data whose start time has come exists in the process data registered in the effect scenario data set in the effect scenario setting area. Then, when it is determined that the process data whose start time has arrived exists, each command information included in the process data is stored (stored) in the buffer area corresponding to the command information.
At this time, the command information related to the display effect (effect start command for designating the start of the display effect, effect end command for designating the end of the display effect, etc.) is stored in the display command buffer area.
On the other hand, command information related to the sound effect (effect start command for designating the start of the sound effect, effect end command for designating the end of the sound effect, etc.) is stored in the sound command buffer area.
On the other hand, the command information regarding the lamp effect (effect start command for designating the start of the lamp effect, effect end command for designating the end of the lamp effect, etc.) is stored in the lamp command buffer area.
On the other hand, command information related to the movable body effect (effect start command for designating the start of the movable body effect, effect end command for designating the end of the movable body effect, etc.) is stored in the movable body command buffer area.

(Control method of display effect)
Next, a method of controlling the display effect (display) by the effect control board 300 will be described.
The control ROM 302 stores an animation table corresponding to each display effect (each display effect number). Then, in the animation table corresponding to each display effect, the display priority information corresponding to the display effect (image constituting the display effect) and the index number corresponding to the display effect (image constituting the display effect) are displayed. And are associated with each other.
The "display priority information" is information for designating the display priority.
The "display priority" is information that specifies the priority of display (drawing).
When a plurality of display effects (displays) are executed in duplicate in a timely manner, the display screen 31a is displayed (displayed on the display screen 31a) based on the plurality of display effects (images related to the plurality of display effects). Production image) is configured. In this case, of the plurality of display effects (plural images) constituting the display (the effect image), the display effect (image) having the higher display priority is relative to the display effect (image) having the lower display priority. , Is displayed with priority. That is, with respect to a plurality of display effects (the plurality of images) constituting the effect image, the display effect (image) having a higher display priority is displayed with priority.
In other words, of the plurality of display effects (plural images) constituting the effect image, the display effect (image) having the higher display priority is on the front side (player) of the display effect (image) having the lower display priority. Displayed on the side). That is, with respect to a plurality of display effects (the plurality of images) constituting the effect image, the display effect (image) having a higher display priority is displayed on the front side.
As a result, among the plurality of display effects (plural images) constituting the effect image, the portion that overlaps with the display effect (image) having a higher display priority and the display effect (image) having a lower display priority. If it exists, the display effect (image) having the higher display priority is displayed with priority for the overlapping portion.

The "index number" is a number unique to the display effect (the animation table).
In the present embodiment, it is possible to set the frame rate for each display effect (animation table). In other words, it is possible to individually set the frame rate for a plurality of display effects (plural images) constituting the display of the display screen 31a (effect images displayed on the display screen 31a). This makes it possible to set different frame rates for a plurality of display effects (plural images) constituting the display of the display screen 31a (effect images displayed on the display screen 31a).
At this time, for each display effect (each animation table), one of the frame rates of "30 [FPS]" and "60 [FPS]" is set according to the index number of the display effect (the animation table). Will be done.
The control ROM 302 stores a frame rate setting table in which the correspondence between the index number and the frame rate (“30 [FPS]” or “60 [FPS]”) is registered. Then, when setting the frame rate corresponding to each display effect (each animation table), the frame rate corresponding to the index number assigned to the display effect (animation table) is referred to with reference to the frame rate setting table. Is set.

The CPU 310 (display control unit) determines whether or not the command information is stored in the display command buffer area in the second predetermined cycle (1/60 [s] in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the command information is stored in the display command buffer area, each command information stored in the display command buffer area is analyzed, and processing according to the analysis result is executed.
Here, the second predetermined cycle is shorter than the first predetermined cycle. In particular, in the present embodiment, the second predetermined cycle is half the cycle of the first predetermined cycle.
At this time, when the effect start command is stored in the display command buffer area, the animation table corresponding to the display effect number designated by the effect start command is read out from the animation tables stored in the control ROM 302. Then, in the animation table setting area of the DRAM 304, the read animation table and the frame rate corresponding to the animation table are set (stored / registered).
As a result, the animation table stored in the control ROM 302 is duplicated in the animation table setting area. It is possible to set a plurality of animation tables in the animation table setting area.

The "animation table" is information (various parameters for controlling the display of the image) that defines the progress of the display effect (display of the effect image) by the various image display devices 31 and 32. In other words, the animation table is information that defines the movement of the image.
Specifically, a predetermined number of frame information is registered in the animation table in chronological order. Then, with respect to the predetermined number of frame information registered in the animation table, the display effect is advanced by sequentially displaying the images based on the frame information according to the registered order.
Each frame information is various parameters for controlling (execution / configuration) the display of an image for one frame. That is, each frame information includes information (image address information) that specifies image data (compressed image data) used for drawing, information that specifies the display priority of the image data (display effect) (display priority information), and the image. Information that specifies the magnification (magnification / reduction ratio) when drawing data (hereinafter referred to as "display magnification information"), information that specifies coordinates for drawing the image data (coordinates in the frame buffer area) (hereinafter, "display magnification information") It is configured to include information (hereinafter referred to as "transparency information") that specifies the transparency (transparency / transparency / transparency) at the time of drawing the image data (hereinafter referred to as "display coordinate information"). ..

Then, the CPU 310 controls the display of the effect image corresponding to each frame based on one or a plurality of animation tables set in the animation table setting area.
Specifically, the CPU 310 executes a command construction process described later in a second predetermined cycle (1/60 [s] in this embodiment).
Here, the DRAM 304 is provided with an update timing determination area. The update timing determination area is an area in which 1 bit of information can be stored. That is, "0" or "1" is set (stored) in the update timing determination area.
Then, in the command construction process, first, the value set in the update timing determination area is inverted. That is, when "0" is set in the update timing determination area, "1" is set instead of this, and when "1" is set in the update timing determination area, it is replaced with this. And set "0".

In the command construction process, next, the animation table to be executed for updating the frame information is selected.
Specifically, first, the value set in the update timing determination area is confirmed.
When the value set in the update timing determination area = "1", among the animation tables set in the animation table setting area, the animation table in which the frame rate = 30 [FPS] is set and the animation table. The animation table for which the frame rate = 60 [FPS] is set is selected as the target for updating the frame information. That is, in this case, all the animation tables set in the animation table setting area are selected as targets for updating the frame information.
On the other hand, when the value set in the update timing determination area = "0", only the animation table in which the frame rate = 60 [FPS] is set among the animation tables set in the animation table setting area. , Select as the target to update the frame information. That is, in this case, among the animation tables set in the animation table setting area, the animation table for which the frame rate = 30 [FPS] is set is not selected as the target for updating the frame information.
Then, the frame information is updated for each animation table selected as the target for updating the frame information. That is, as the frame information for constructing the display list, the frame information of the next rank is selected instead of the currently selected frame information.

As described above, among the animation tables set in the animation table setting area, the animation table for which the frame rate = 60 [FPS] is set is executed in each command construction process (each command construction process is executed). Every time), the frame information is updated. As a result, for the animation table for which the frame rate = 60 [FPS] is set, the frame information is updated every 1/60 [s]. Therefore, the image data (frame) is updated (replaced) every 1/60 [s].
On the other hand, among the animation tables set in the animation table setting area, for the animation table in which the frame rate = 30 [FPS] is set, the command construction process of (2 [times] is performed in the alternate command construction process. Every time it is executed), the frame information is updated. As a result, for the animation table for which the frame rate = 30 [FPS] is set, the frame information is updated every 1/30 [s]. Therefore, the image data (frame) is updated (replaced) every 1/30 [s].

Next, in the command construction process, a display list is constructed in the drawing command buffer area designated in the construction area based on all the animation tables set in the animation table setting area.
Specifically, for all the animation tables set in the animation table setting area, the frame information selected as the target for constructing the display list among the frame information registered in each animation table is acquired. Then, a display list is constructed based on all the acquired frame information.
At this time, for the animation table for which the frame information was updated in the command construction process this time, among the frame information registered in the animation table, the frame information updated by the command construction process this time is the display list. Will be acquired as the target for building. As a result, the frame information (image / frame) updated by the previous command construction process is updated to the frame information (image / frame) updated by the current command construction process.
On the other hand, for the animation table for which the frame information has not been updated in the command construction process this time, among the frame information registered in the animation table, the frame information updated by the previous command construction process is displayed in the display list. Will be acquired as the target for building. As a result, the frame information (image / frame) updated by the previous command construction process is maintained in the current command construction process.

As described above, the VDP is controlled according to the display list generated in the drawing command buffer area, and the display of the effect image (display composed of one or a plurality of display effects) by the image display devices 31 and 32 is controlled.
That is, when one animation table is set in the animation table setting area, a display list that specifies drawing of image data related to the one animation table (one frame information) is constructed.
On the other hand, when a plurality of animation tables are set in the animation table setting area, drawing of image data related to the plurality of animation tables (multiple frame information) is executed in a predetermined order (order). A display list is built that specifies.
At this time, based on the display priority specified by the display priority information set in the animation table setting area, the order in which the drawing of the image data corresponding to the display priority information is executed is set.
Specifically, among the plurality of image data, the image data having a lower display priority is drawn first with respect to the image data having a higher display priority. That is, of the plurality of image data, the image data having the lower display priority is drawn first.
As a result, among the plurality of image data, the part that overlaps with the image data having a lower display priority (image data drawn first) and the image data having a higher display priority (image data drawn later) If it exists, the image data having a lower display priority is replaced (overwritten) with the image data having a higher display priority for the overlapping portion. Therefore, the image data having a higher display priority is preferentially displayed with respect to the image data having a lower display priority.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, on the display screen 31a, a display effect that constitutes a hold display (display of a hold symbol h, etc.), a display effect that constitutes a look-ahead notice effect, and a display effect that constitutes a special figure variation effect ( (Display of first effect symbol z1 etc.), display effect constituting special figure stop effect (display of first effect symbol z1 etc.), display effect constituting main notice effect, display of background image, display of interface image, etc. Various display effects are executed.
Further, on the display screen 31a, various displays such as right-handed notification image display, left-handed notification image display, error notification image display, volume adjustment image display, light amount adjustment image display, button image display, etc. are executed. Will be done.
In particular, among the various display effects / displays described above, one or a plurality of display effects / displays are combined to form an effect image on the display screen 31a.
The "interface image" is an image that decorates the periphery of the effect symbol display areas a1 to a3. Specifically, the interface image is an image that defines (specifies) the position where the first effect symbol z1 is displayed, the position where the reserved symbol h is displayed, and the like. In detail, the interface image is an image that displays a pedestal of the reserved symbol h, a frame (decoration) surrounding an area in which the first effect symbol z1 is variablely displayed / stopped, and the like.
The "background image" is an image that becomes the background of the first effect symbol z1.
The "right-handed notification image" is an image instructing (notifying) the player to launch the game ball to the right route. The right-handed notification image is displayed during the right-handed period.
The "left-handed notification image" is an image instructing (notifying) the player to launch the game ball to the left route. The left-handed notification image is displayed during the left-handed period. In particular, the left-handed notification image is displayed only for a predetermined time when the right-handed period ends and the left-handed period starts.
The "error notification image" includes various errors (error occurrence (error generated by detecting vibration in the game board 11), magnetic error occurrence (error detected in the vicinity of the game board 11). Error that occurs), radio error (error that occurs when radio waves are detected around the game board 11), right-handed error (error that the game ball is detected for the left path during the right-handed period) Error that occurs), fraudulent winning error (error that occurs when a ball is detected during the period when no ball is detected for the variable entry port), error during payout (error that pays out the prize ball) Error), full tank error (error caused by the full tank of prize balls stored in the saucer), ball jam error (error caused by ball jam in the game ball payout device 440), etc. ) Is an image that informs the occurrence of. The error notification image is displayed according to the occurrence of various errors.
The "volume adjustment image" is an image showing the current volume setting and the volume setting (adjustment) method. The volume adjustment image is displayed for a predetermined time when the operation of the volume adjustment button is detected.
The "light amount adjustment image" is an image showing the current light amount setting and the light amount setting (adjustment) method. The light amount adjustment image is displayed for a predetermined time when the operation of the light amount adjustment button is detected.
The "button image" is an image that urges the player to press the effect button 5b. In other words, the button image is an image that notifies that the pressing operation of the effect button 5b is valid. The button image is displayed during the period during which the pressing operation of the effect button 5b is valid.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, a first display type and a second display type are defined as display effect / display types. Then, a frame rate = 60 [FPS] is set for each display effect / display belonging to the first display type, and a frame rate = 30 [FPS] is set for each display effect / display belonging to the second display type. ..
In the present embodiment, as the display effect / display belonging to the first display type, a display effect (hereinafter referred to as "specific normal reach display") constituting a specific "normal reach variation effect" is defined.
On the other hand, as display effects / displays belonging to the second display type, all other display effects / displays except "specific normal reach display" are specified. That is, as the display effect / display belonging to the second display type, the display effect constituting the hold display, the display effect constituting the look-ahead notice effect, the display effect constituting the special figure variation effect (excluding "specific normal reach display"), Display effect that constitutes the special figure stop effect (display of the first effect symbol z1, etc.), display effect that constitutes the main notice effect, background image display, interface image display, right-handed notification image display, left-handed notification image Display, error notification image display, volume adjustment image display, light amount adjustment image display, button image display, etc. are specified.

As a result, during the execution of the "specific normal reach display", among the displays on the display screen 31a, the "specific normal reach display" (display of the first effect symbol z1, display of the effect given to the first effect symbol z1, etc.). For, the image data (frame) is updated every 1/60 [s], and other displays (display effect constituting the hold display (display of the hold symbol h), display effect constituting the look-ahead notice effect, main). The image data (frame) is updated every 1/30 [s] for the display effect constituting the notice effect, the display of the background image, the display of the interface image, the display of the right-handed notification image, and the like).
In other words, during the execution of the "specific normal reach display", among the images displayed on the display screen 31a, the images constituting the "specific normal reach display" (image data of the first effect symbol z1 and the first effect symbol z1). For the image data of the effect to be added), the image data (frame) is updated every 1/60 [s], and the image constituting another display (the image constituting the hold display (image of the hold symbol h)). ), The image that constitutes the look-ahead notice effect, the image that constitutes the main notice effect, the background image, the interface image, the right-handed notification image, etc.), the image data (frame) is updated every 1/30 [s]. To.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to individually set the frame rate for a plurality of displays (display effects) executed at the same time on the display screen 31a. In other words, on the display screen 31a, it is possible to individually set the frame rate for a plurality of images displayed at the same time.

(Control method of sound production)
Next, a method of controlling the sound effect by the effect control board 300 will be described.
The CPU 310 (sound control unit) determines whether or not the command information is stored in the sound command buffer area in the first predetermined cycle (1/30 [s] in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the command information is stored in the sound command buffer area, each command information stored in the sound command buffer area is analyzed, and processing according to the analysis result is executed.
At this time, when the effect start command is stored in the sound command buffer area, the sound table corresponding to the sound effect number designated by the effect start command is read out from the sound tables stored in the control ROM 302. Then, the read sound table is set (stored) in the sound table setting area of the DRAM 304.
It is possible to set one or more sound tables in the sound table setting area.
The "sound table" is information that defines the progress of sound production (sound output) by various speakers 22.
Then, the CPU 310 controls the progress of the sound effect based on one or a plurality of sound tables set in the sound table setting area.
Specifically, the CPU 310 executes the sound interrupt processing described later in the first predetermined cycle (1/30 [s] in this embodiment).
In the sound interrupt processing, the information registered in each sound table is updated for all the sound tables set in the sound table setting area, and the sound command is executed in the sound command buffer area based on the updated information. Generate.
As a result, the sound controller 323 is controlled according to the sound command generated in the sound command buffer area, and the sound effect (output of sound by various speakers 22) is controlled.

(Control method of lamp production)
Next, a method of controlling the lamp effect by the effect control board 300 will be described.
The CPU 310 (lamp control unit) determines whether or not the command information is stored in the lamp command buffer area in the first predetermined cycle (1/30 [s] in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the command information is stored in the lamp command buffer area, each command information stored in the lamp command buffer area is analyzed, and processing according to the analysis result is executed.
At this time, when the effect start command is stored in the lamp command buffer area, the lamp control table corresponding to the lamp effect number designated by the effect start command is read out from the lamp control tables stored in the control ROM 302. Then, the read lamp control table is set (stored) in the lamp control table setting area of the DRAM 304.
It is possible to set one or a plurality of lamp control tables in the lamp control table setting area.
The "lamp control table" is information that defines the progress of the lamp effect (driving (light emission) pattern of the various lamps 20 and 21) by the various lamps 20 and 21.
Then, the CPU 310 controls the progress of the lamp effect based on one or a plurality of lamp control tables set in the lamp control table setting area.
Specifically, the CPU 310 executes the lamp interrupt processing described later in the first predetermined cycle (1/30 [s] in this embodiment).
In the lamp interrupt processing, the information registered in each lamp control table is updated for all the lamp control tables set in the lamp control table setting area, and based on the updated information, in the lamp command buffer area. Generate a ramp command.
As a result, the lamp controller 317a is controlled according to the lamp command generated in the lamp command buffer area, and the lamp effect (driving (lighting) of the various lamps 20 and 21) is controlled.

(Control method for moving body production)
Next, a method of controlling the movable body effect by the effect control board 300 will be described.
The CPU 310 (movable body control unit) determines whether or not the command information is stored in the movable body command buffer area in the first predetermined cycle (1/30 [s] in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the command information is stored in the movable body command buffer area, each command information stored in the movable body command buffer area is analyzed, and processing according to the analysis result is executed.
At this time, when the effect start command is stored in the movable body command buffer area, the movable body control corresponding to the movable body effect number specified by the effect start command in the movable body control table stored in the control ROM 302. Read the table. Then, the read movable body control table is set (stored) in the movable body control table setting area of the DRAM 304.
The "movable body control table" is information that defines the progress of the movable body effect (the drive pattern of the various motors 23 (various movable bodies)) by the various motors 23 (various movable bodies).
Then, the CPU 310 controls the progress of the movable body effect based on one or a plurality of movable body control tables set in the movable body control table setting area.
Specifically, the CPU 310 executes the movable body interrupt process described later in the first predetermined cycle (1/30 [s] in this embodiment).
In the movable body interrupt processing, the information registered in each movable body control table is updated for all the movable body control tables set in the movable body control table setting area, and the motor command is based on the updated information. Generate a motor command in the buffer area.
As a result, the motor controller 317b is controlled according to the motor command generated in the motor command buffer area, and the movable body effect (driving of various motors 23 (various movable bodies)) is controlled.

(Configuration of driver board 330)
The driver board 330 includes a parallel serial conversion circuit 331, a lamp driver 332, and a motor driver 333.
The lamp driver 332 controls the drive (light emission) of the light emitting element group of each system constituting the board lamp 21 according to the lamp drive data input from the lamp controller 317a.
At this time, in the lamp drive data, the luminance value corresponding to each system constituting the board lamp 21 is specified. Then, an excitation signal (drive current) corresponding to the luminance value specified in the lamp drive data is supplied to each system constituting the board lamp 21. As a result, the drive (light emission) of the light emitting element group constituting the system is controlled for each system.
The motor driver 333 is an excitation signal (drive current) for various motors 23 (motors 23 constituting various movable body units) arranged in the game board unit 10 according to the motor drive data input from the motor controller 317b. Controls the output of.
At this time, in the motor drive data, the output value of each motor 23 arranged in the game board unit 10 is specified. Then, an excitation signal (drive current) corresponding to the output value specified in the motor drive data is supplied to each motor 23. As a result, the drive is controlled for each motor 23.
Detection signals from various sensors 24 are input to the parallel serial conversion circuit 331. Then, the parallel serial conversion circuit 331 converts the detection signals from the various sensors 24 into serial data and outputs the detection signals to the serial communication controller 317.

(Structure of sub-connection board 340)
The sub-connection board 340 includes a parallel serial conversion circuit 341, a lamp driver 342, and a motor driver 343.
The lamp driver 342 controls the driving (light emission) of the light emitting element group of each system constituting the frame lamp 20 according to the lamp driving data input from the lamp controller 317a.
At this time, in the lamp drive data, the luminance value corresponding to each system constituting the frame lamp 20 is specified. Then, an excitation signal (drive current) corresponding to the luminance value specified in the lamp drive data is supplied to each system constituting the frame lamp 20. As a result, the drive (light emission) of the light emitting element group constituting the system is controlled for each system.
The motor driver 343 is an excitation signal (drive current) for various motors 23 (motors 23 constituting various movable body units) arranged in the front frame unit 4 according to the motor drive data input from the motor controller 317b. Controls the output of.
At this time, in the motor drive data, the output value of each motor 23 arranged in the front frame unit 4 is specified. Then, an excitation signal (drive current) corresponding to the output value specified in the motor drive data is supplied to each motor 23. As a result, the drive is controlled for each motor 23.
The detection signals from the various sensors 24 and the detection signals from the various switches 25 to 29 are input to the parallel serial conversion circuit 341. Then, the parallel serial conversion circuit 341 converts the detection signals from the various sensors 24 and the detection signals from the various switches 25 to 29 into serial data and outputs the detection signals to the serial communication controller 317.

(About the state of the gaming machine)
In the pachinko machine 1, six states (specifically, a game-enabled state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, a setting abnormality state, a RAM abnormality state, and a backup abnormality state) are defined as the gaming machine states. ..
The RAM 230 of the main control board 200 is provided with a gaming machine state flag area. In the gaming machine status flag area, six gaming machine states (specifically, a game available state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, a setting abnormality state, a RAM abnormality state, and a backup abnormality state) are set as game machine state flags. ), The value corresponding to any one of the gaming machine states is stored (set). Then, in the pachinko machine 1, a gaming machine state corresponding to the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is generated.
The "playable state" is a game machine state in which the game can proceed.
During the game-enabled state, the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, are permitted to be executed. This enables the progress of games (ordinary games and special games).
In addition, the base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206 during the occurrence of the playable state. In addition, information about the game is displayed on the main display device 60.

The "setting change state" is a gaming machine state in which the set value stored in the set value area of the RAM 230 can be changed.
The setting change state is generated when the setting change condition is satisfied. In the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, the detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108 is input, the detection signal from the setting key switch 208 is input, and the detection signal is detected from the RAM clear switch 207. When the signal is input, the setting change condition is satisfied. That is, when the power is turned on, when the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, a setting change state occurs. Will be done.
While the setting change state is occurring, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is prohibited. As a result, the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Further, during the occurrence of the setting change state, the setting value stored in the setting value area is displayed on the performance display device 206. Further, all the lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Further, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
Further, while the setting change state is occurring, the setting value stored in the setting value area can be changed by pressing the RAM clear switch 207. Then, if the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting change state is occurring, the game-enabled state is generated instead of the setting change state. As a result, the set value stored in the set value area is fixed.

The "setting confirmation state" is a gaming machine state in which the setting value stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 can be confirmed.
The setting confirmation state is generated when the setting confirmation condition is satisfied. In the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, the detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108 is input, the detection signal from the setting key switch 208 is input, and the detection signal is detected from the RAM clear switch 207. When no signal is input, the setting confirmation condition is satisfied. That is, when the power is turned on, the setting confirmation state occurs when the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is not pressed. Will be done.
While the setting confirmation state is occurring, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is prohibited. As a result, the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Further, during the occurrence of the setting confirmation state, the setting value stored in the setting value area is displayed on the performance display device 206. This makes it possible to check the set value stored in the set value area. Further, all the lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Further, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
It should be noted that the set value stored in the set value area cannot be changed while the setting confirmation state is occurring.
Then, when the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting confirmation state is occurring, the game-enabled state is generated instead of the setting confirmation state.

The "setting abnormality state" is a gaming machine state in which a setting abnormality has occurred.
The setting abnormality state occurs when it is determined that the set value set in the set value area is not within the specified range during the occurrence of the game-enabled state.
During the occurrence of the setting abnormal state, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is prohibited. As a result, the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Further, during the occurrence of the setting abnormality state, an error code specifying the occurrence of the setting abnormality is displayed on the performance display device 206. Further, all the lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Further, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
In order to recover from the abnormal setting state, it is necessary to shut off the power and turn on the power to cause the setting change state.

The "RAM abnormality state" is a gaming machine state in which a RAM abnormality has occurred.
The RAM abnormality state occurs when the occurrence of a read / write abnormality of the RAM 230 is determined at the time of turning on the power.
During the occurrence of the RAM abnormal state, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is prohibited. As a result, the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Further, during the occurrence of the RAM abnormality state, an error code specifying the occurrence of the RAM abnormality is displayed on the performance display device 206. Further, all the lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Further, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
In order to recover from the RAM abnormal state, it is necessary to execute power cutoff and power on to cause a setting change state.

The "backup error state" is a gaming machine state in which a backup error has occurred.
The backup abnormality state occurs when it is determined that a backup abnormality (specifically, an abnormality of the backup flag or an abnormality of the checksum) of the RAM 230 is generated at the time of turning on the power.
During the occurrence of the backup abnormal state, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is prohibited. As a result, the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Further, during the occurrence of the backup error state, the performance display device 206 displays an error code specifying the occurrence of the backup error. Further, all the lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Further, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
In order to recover from the backup abnormal state, it is necessary to turn off the power and turn on the power to cause the setting change state.

(About the set value)
Next, the set value (setting information) set in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
The "set value" is information that specifies the winning probability (probability of winning the big hit game state) of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery and second special symbol lottery). In the present embodiment, the values of "0" to "5" are defined as the set values.
The RAM 230 of the main control board 200 is provided with a set value area. In the set value area, any one of "0" to "5" is stored (set) as the set value. Then, in the pachinko machine 1, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is set to the probability corresponding to the value set in the set value area.
In the present embodiment, the winning probabilities of the special symbol lottery corresponding to each set value are, in order from the one with the highest winning probability, the winning probability corresponding to the set value = "5" and the winning probability corresponding to the set value = "4". , Setting value = Winning probability corresponding to "3", Setting value = Winning probability corresponding to "2", Setting value = Winning probability corresponding to "1", Setting value = Winning probability corresponding to "0" (Winning) Probability "high" → winning probability "low").

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to change (select) the set value stored in the set value area while the setting change state is occurring. Here, the change of the set value is executed by the manager of the pachinko machine 1 (employee of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc.).
That is, as described above, when the power is turned on, the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed. A change state occurs.
During the occurrence of the setting change state, the setting value stored in the setting value area is displayed on the performance display device 206. Further, each time the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, the set value stored in the set value area is changed. At this time, when the set value set in the set value area is changed, the set value displayed on the performance display device 206 is also changed accordingly.
Then, if the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting change state is occurring, the game-enabled state is generated instead of the setting change state. As a result, the set value stored in the set value area is fixed.

(About the base ratio)
In the pachinko machine 1, the base ratio (base value) is calculated by the CPU 210 while the game is in a playable state. In the present embodiment, the base ratio is calculated only during the occurrence of a predetermined gaming state (specifically, during the occurrence of the special figure low probability state and during the stop of the time saving control).
Then, during the occurrence of the playable state, the calculated base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206.
The "base ratio" is the number of game balls fired in the game area 30 and a predetermined entry port (in this embodiment, the first start opening 51, the second start opening 52, and other winning openings 54 to 57). The information is calculated based on the number of prize balls paid out according to the entry of the game ball. Specifically, the base ratio is the ratio (percentage) of the number of payouts to the number of out balls.
In the present embodiment, the base ratio in the predetermined section (period) is calculated for each predetermined section (period). Then, as a predetermined section, a section in which a predetermined number of out balls (60,000 [balls] in the present embodiment) is detected (discharged) is defined. That is, each section starts according to the end of the previous section, and ends when the number of out balls detected during the current section reaches a predetermined number (60,000 [balls]). Then, the CPU 210 calculates the base ratio at any time (in real time) during each section.

A predetermined time may be specified as a predetermined section. That is, the CPU 210 may be configured to calculate the base ratio for each predetermined time.
"Number of out balls" means the number of out balls. The “out ball” refers to a game ball discharged from the game area 30. Specifically, the out ball is a game ball that has passed through the discharge path (a game ball detected by the out switch 109).
The game ball discharged from the out port 58 may be used as an out ball. Specifically, the out switch 109 may be configured to detect only the game ball discharged from the out port 58, and the game ball detected by the out switch 109 may be used as the out ball.
The “number of payouts” refers to the total number of prize balls paid out in response to the entry of game balls into the first starting port 51, the second starting port 52, and other winning openings 54 to 57.

(About various lottery)
Next, various lottery executed by the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, a normal symbol lottery is executed when the game ball passes through the starting gate 41. Then, when the normal symbol lottery is won, a game state is generated per normal symbol. In the normal game state, the normal electric accessory 52a is displaced (opened) from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball can enter the second starting port 52.
In the present embodiment, one type of "per game" is set as the type of the game state per game that occurs when the normal symbol lottery is won.

When the "normal symbol hit" is won (the normal symbol lottery is won), the normal symbol is controlled to be stopped and displayed at the "normal symbol per symbol" in the normal symbol display device.
On the other hand, when the normal symbol lottery is lost, the normal symbol display device is controlled so that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed by the "missing symbol".
In the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to execute a time saving control as an auxiliary control that is advantageous to the player.
During the execution of the time reduction control, the time for displaying the variation of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “variation time”) is shortened as compared with the time when the time reduction control is stopped. In the present embodiment, during the execution of the time saving control, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is improved and the time for displaying the variation of the normal symbol is shortened as compared with the time when the time saving control is stopped. Further, during the execution of the time reduction control, the number of times the normal electric accessory 52a is opened is increased and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 52a is increased in the game state per normal figure as compared with the time reduction control being stopped. Will be extended.

When the "per-figure" is won, the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 52a is opened is set to 1 [times] or 3 [times], and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 52a at each time is 0.5. It is set to [s] or 2.0 [s]. At this time, during the execution of the time reduction control, the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 52a is opened is set to 3 [times], and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 52a at each time is set to 2.0 [s]. Set. On the other hand, while the time reduction control is stopped, the number of times the normal electric accessory 52a is opened is set to 1 [times], and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 52a at each time is set to 0.5 [s]. Will be done.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the first special symbol lottery is executed when the game ball enters the first starting port 51, and the second special symbol lottery is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 52. A special symbol lottery is executed. Then, when the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery is won, a big hit game state occurs. In the big hit game state, a round game in which the special electric accessory 53a is displaced from the closed state to the open state is executed, and the game ball can enter the big winning opening 53.
In the present embodiment, "big hit 1" and "big hit 2" are set as the types of big hit game states that occur when the first special symbol lottery is won, and it is generated when the second special symbol lottery is won. As the type of the big hit game state, "big hit 3" to "big hit 6" are set.

When the "big hit 1" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "big hit 1 symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "probability variation symbol" is stopped and displayed.
Here, the "probability variation symbol" is, for example, the same as the first effect symbol z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, such as "7, 7, 7". The display mode is such that the second effect symbol z2, which is stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4, is aligned with "numerical symbols" indicating odd numbers, and shows a predetermined color.
When the "big hit 2" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "big hit 2 symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "normal symbol" is stopped and displayed.
Here, in the "normal symbol", for example, the first effect symbol z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 is the same, such as "2, 2, 2". The display mode is such that the second effect symbol z2, which is stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4, is aligned with "numerical symbols" indicating even numbers, and shows a predetermined color.
When the "big hit 3" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "big hit 3 symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "probability variation symbol" is stopped and displayed.

When the "big hit 4" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "big hit 4 symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "probability variation symbol" is stopped and displayed.
When the "big hit 5" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "big hit 5 symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "latent symbol" is stopped and displayed.
Here, the "hidden symbol" is, for example, a predetermined first effect symbol z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, such as "1, 2, 3". The combination has regularity, and the second effect symbol z2, which is stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4, is displayed in a predetermined color.
When the "big hit 6" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "big hit 6 symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "latent symbol" is stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, when the special symbol lottery is lost (in the case of "missing"), the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device or the special figure 2 display device. .. Further, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed.
Here, in the "missing symbol", for example, the first effect symbol z1 stopped and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 is stopped and displayed in at least one area such as "1, 6, 9". The number indicated by the displayed "number symbol" has a different combination from the number indicated by the "number symbol" stopped and displayed in another area, and the second effect symbol z2 stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4. Is a display mode showing a predetermined color.

When "Big hit 1" to "Big hit 6" are won, a predetermined number of round games are executed in the big hit game state.
In the present embodiment, when the "big hit 1", "big hit 2", "big hit 5" or "big hit 6" is won, the number of round games is set to 5 [times]. On the other hand, when the "big hit 3" is won, the number of round games is set to 15 [times]. On the other hand, when the "big hit 4" is won, the number of round games is set to 10 [times].
When "Big hit 1" to "Big hit 6" are won, the maximum opening time of the special electric accessory 53a in each round game is set to a predetermined time (29.0 [s] in this embodiment). To. Then, in each round game, the maximum opening time set after the special electric accessory 53a is opened and the number of game balls entering the large winning opening 53 in the round game are determined. It ends when one of the conditions of reaching the predetermined upper limit (10 [balls] in this embodiment) is satisfied.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the game states related to the winning probability of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery and second special symbol lottery) are "special symbol low probability state" and "special symbol high probability state". Is stipulated.
During the occurrence of the "special symbol low probability state", the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is regarded as the first probability (hereinafter referred to as "low probability").
During the occurrence of the "special symbol high probability state", the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is a second probability higher than the first probability (hereinafter referred to as "high probability").
The main control board 200 sets the winning probability of each lottery so that the winning probability of the first special symbol lottery and the winning probability of the second special symbol lottery are synchronized. Here, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery means the probability of winning a "hit"("big hit 1" to "big hit 6") in which a big hit gaming state occurs.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is the probability according to the combination of the set value set in the set value area and the game state (special figure low probability state or special figure high probability state). Will be.

Specifically, while the set value = "0" and the "special symbol low probability state" is occurring, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 319.69. On the other hand, while the set value = "0" and the "special symbol high probability state" is occurring, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 32.13.
On the other hand, while the set value = "1" and the "special symbol low probability state" is occurring, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 312.08. On the other hand, while the set value = "1" and the "special symbol high probability state" is occurring, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 31.36.
On the other hand, while the set value = "2" and the "special symbol low probability state" is occurring, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 304.82. On the other hand, while the set value = "2" and the "special symbol high probability state" is occurring, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 30.62.

On the other hand, while the set value = "3" and the "special symbol low probability state" is occurring, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 297.89. On the other hand, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery becomes 1 / 29.93 while the set value = "3" and the "special symbol high probability state" is occurring.
On the other hand, while the set value = "4" and the "special symbol low probability state" is occurring, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 21.27. On the other hand, while the set value = "4" and the "special symbol high probability state" is occurring, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 29.26.
On the other hand, while the set value = "5" and the "special symbol low probability state" is occurring, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 284.94. On the other hand, while the set value = "5" and the "special symbol high probability state" is occurring, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 28.62.

When the "big hit 2" or the "big hit 6" is won, the "special figure low probability state" occurs in the period from the end of the big hit gaming state to the occurrence of the next big hit gaming state.
On the other hand, when "Big hit 1" or "Big hit 3" to "Big hit 5" is won, a "special high probability state" is generated according to the end of the big hit gaming state. In the present embodiment, the "special figure high probability state" is started according to the end of the big hit gaming state, and is terminated according to the start of the next big hit gaming state (the end of the stop display of the "big hit symbol").
It should be noted that the "special figure high probability state" is started at the end of the big hit game state, and the number of special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the "special figure high probability state" is a predetermined number of times (for example, 10,000 [ It may be configured to be terminated when the number of times]) is reached (a "special figure low probability state" is generated).

Further, when the "big hit 1" to "big hit 6" are won, the time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state.
The time saving control is started according to the end of the big hit game state, and the special symbol lottery is won (the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed), and the notification display (variable display) of the special symbol of the predetermined number of time reductions is displayed. And stop display) is executed, and it is terminated when one of the conditions is satisfied.
When "Big hit 2" or "Big hit 6" is won, 100 [times] is set as a predetermined number of time reductions.
on the other hand. When "Big hit 1" or "Big hit 3" to "Big hit 5" is won, 10000 [times] is set as a predetermined number of time reductions.

(About control commands)
Next, control commands transmitted from the main control board 200 to the effect control board 300 and control commands transmitted and received between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 will be described.
The main control board 200 and the effect control board 300 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, the communication between the main control board 200 and the effect control board 300 is performed in only one direction from the main control board 200 to the effect control board 300, and the communication from the effect control board 300 to the main control board 200 is performed. Not done.
Each control command transmitted from the main control board 200 to the effect control board 300 is composed of 1 byte of upper data indicating the type of control command and 1 byte of lower data indicating the content of the control command. There is.
Then, the main control board 200 transmits a control command composed of upper data and lower data to the effect control board 300 by serial communication. When the effect control board 300 receives a control command from the main control board 200, a serial communication reception interrupt is generated, and the control command data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM by this interrupt processing.

In the pachinko machine 1, the control commands transmitted from the main control board 200 to the effect control board 300 include a symbol type specification command, a variation mode specification command, a variation pattern specification command, a stop specification command, a game state specification command, and a number of holds. Specified command, opening specified command, round start specified command, round end specified command, ending specified command, 1st look-ahead specification command, 2nd look-ahead specification command, 3rd look-ahead specification command, error specification command, demo specification command, setting value specification Commands, game status specification commands, etc. are set.
The symbol type specification command is a command for specifying the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number). Specifically, the symbol type designation command specifies one type from "missing symbol" and "big hit 1 symbol" to "big hit 6 symbol". The symbol type specification command is transmitted at the start of the variable display of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, the symbol type designation command is set to correspond to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.

The variable mode specification command is a command for specifying the variable mode type (variable mode number). The variable mode specification command specifies the variable time associated with the variable mode number by specifying the variable mode number. The variation mode specification command specifies the variation time of the first half period (the mode of the first half period of the variation effect) in the variation display (variation effect) of the special symbol.
In the present embodiment, as the type of the fluctuation mode, m (plural) types in which different fluctuation times are associated with each other are set. Then, the variable mode designation command specifies one of m types of variable modes (variable mode numbers) (“variable mode m”).

The variation pattern specification command is a command for specifying the variation pattern type (variation pattern number). The variation pattern specification command specifies the variation time associated with the variation pattern number by specifying the variation pattern number. The variation pattern specification command specifies the variation time of the latter half period (the mode of the latter half period of the variation effect) in the variation display (variation effect) of the special symbol.
In the present embodiment, as the types of fluctuation patterns, n (plural) types in which different fluctuation times are associated with each other are set. Then, the variation pattern designation command specifies one of n types of variation patterns (variation pattern number) (“variation pattern n”).
The variation mode specification command and the variation pattern specification command are transmitted at the start of the variation display of the special symbol.

The stop designation command is a command for designating a stop display of special symbols (effect symbols z1, z2). The stop specification command is sent at the start of the stop display of the special symbol.
The game state designation command is a command for designating a game state (game state offset value).
Here, the "game state offset value" is information that specifies the game state. In the present embodiment, as the game state offset value, each combination of the time saving control flag value, the special figure high probability state flag value, the previous big hit symbol flag value, and the big hit post-rotation speed counter value is used. The corresponding numerical value is set.
Then, the game state specification command specifies one game state offset value. The game state specification command is transmitted when the power is turned on, when the special game phase described later is changed, and the like.

The hold number specification command is a command for specifying the hold number. In the present embodiment, the hold number designation command specifies that the hold number (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number) has increased by "1", the hold number has decreased by "1", the hold number, and the like. ..
Here, the "special figure 1 hold number" means the number of hold of the notification display (variation display and stop display) of the first special symbol in the special figure 1 display device. Further, the “special figure 2 hold number” means the number of hold of the notification display (variation display and stop display) of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 display device.
The hold number designation command is transmitted at the time of turning on the power, storing the game information, starting the variable display of the special symbol, and the like. In the present embodiment, as the hold number designation command, a command corresponding to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is set.

The opening designation command is a command for designating the start of the opening period (start of the jackpot game state). The opening specification command specifies the type of jackpot game state (type of "big hit symbol"). Specifically, the opening designation command specifies one type from "big hit 1 symbol" to "big hit 6 symbols". The opening designation command is transmitted at the start of the opening period (at the start of the jackpot game state).
The round start designation command is a command for designating the start of a round game. The round start designation command is transmitted at the start of the round game.
The round end designation command is a command for designating the end of a round game. The round end designation command is transmitted at the end of the round game.
The ending specification command is a command that specifies the start of the ending period. The ending specification command is sent at the beginning of the ending period.

The first look-ahead designation command is a command for designating the type of the stop symbol (one of the "missing symbol" and the "big hit 1 symbol" to the "big hit 6 symbol"). In the present embodiment, the first look-ahead designation command is set to correspond to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.
The second look-ahead designation command is a command for designating the contents of the variable mode. Specifically, the second look-ahead designation command has an indefinite type of variable mode (“undefined value”), or one of m types of variable modes (variable mode number) (“variable mode m”). ) Is specified. The second look-ahead designation command is transmitted when the game information is stored.
The third look-ahead designation command is a command for designating the content of the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the third look-ahead designation command has an indefinite type of variation pattern (“undefined value”), or one of n types of variation patterns (variation pattern number) (“variation pattern n”). ) Is specified. The third look-ahead designation command is transmitted when the game information is stored.

The error specification command is a command that specifies the occurrence of various errors. In the present embodiment, the error designation command specifies the occurrence of a vibration error, the occurrence of a magnetic error, the occurrence of a radio wave error, or the occurrence of a right-handed error. The error specification command is sent when the occurrence of various errors is detected.
The demo specification command is a command that specifies the start of the customer waiting state. The demo specification command is sent at the start of the customer waiting state.
The setting value specification command is a command for designating a setting value stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230. The setting value specification command is transmitted when the RAM is cleared, when the power is restored after the power is turned on, when the setting change state ends, when the setting confirmation state ends, and so on.
The game status designation command is a command for designating the occurrence (start) or cancellation (end) of a fireable state. The game status specification command is transmitted when the game-enabled state occurs (at the start) and when the game-enabled state is canceled (at the end).

The main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, communication between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 is performed in both directions. Each control command transmitted / received between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 is composed of 1 byte of data.
Then, the main control board 200 transmits a control command to the payout control board 400 by serial communication. When the payout control board 400 receives a control command from the main control board 200, a serial communication reception interrupt is generated, and the control command data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM by this interrupt processing. Further, the payout control board 400 transmits a control command to the main control board 200 by serial communication. When the main control board 200 receives a control command from the payout control board 400, a serial communication reception interrupt is generated, and the control command data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 by this interrupt processing.

In the pachinko machine 1, a prize ball number designation command or the like is set as a control command transmitted from the main control board 200 to the payout control board 400.
The prize ball number designation command is a command for designating the number of prize balls to be paid out. In the present embodiment, the prize ball number designation command specifies the payout of n (n = 1 to 15) prize balls. The prize ball number designation command is transmitted when the prize ball payout operation is executed by the payout control board 400.
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, as control commands transmitted from the payout control board 400 to the main control board 200, the occurrence / cancellation of a payout error, the occurrence / cancellation of a full tank error, the occurrence / cancellation of a ball jam error, etc. Control commands that specify each are set. Each control command is sent when the occurrence / cancellation of various errors is detected.

(Processing executed on the main control board 200)
Next, the process executed by the main control board 200 will be described.
First, the functions of the hardware configured on the main control board 200 will be described.
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the random number generation circuit 203 starts the hard random number update process.
In the hard random number update process, the values of the first loop counter to the third loop counter are within a predetermined range every time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202 (every 0.083 [μs] in this embodiment). (In this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) is updated by "1".

Further, in the hard random number update process, the value of the fourth loop counter is within a predetermined range every time 32 clocks are input from the clock generation circuit 202 (every 2.666 [μs] in this embodiment). In the embodiment, it is updated by "1" in the range of 0 to 10066).
Then, the hard random number update process updates the winning random number of the normal symbol lottery, the jackpot random number of the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot random number of the second special symbol lottery, and the reach group random number, respectively. The hard random number update process is executed as a function of the random number generation circuit 203 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 described later based on the software.

Further, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the transmission shift registers of the command output ports 1 and 2 transmit the control commands stored in the FIFO buffer to the effect control board 300 or the payout control board 400. The control command transmission process is started. The control command transmission process is executed as a function of the command output ports 1 and 2 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 described later based on the software.

Next, the game control process executed by the CPU 210 of the main control board 200 based on the program (software) stored in the ROM 220 will be described.

(CPU initialization process)
First, the CPU initialization process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the CPU initialization process.
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the CPU 210 starts the CPU initialization process shown in FIG. 7. The CPU initialization process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the CPU initialization process is a process based on the program stored in the used area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the CPU initialization process is started, first, the process proceeds to step S1-1.
In step S1-1, the initial setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-2. In the initial setting process, the boot program is read from the ROM 220, and the settings necessary for executing various processes such as register settings are made.

Further, in the initial setting process, the RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 207, the detection signal from the setting key switch 208, and the detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108 are read.
Specifically, the value set in the receive storage area corresponding to the RAM clear switch 207 is read 2 [times], and the RAM clear switch 207 is turned on based on the read result of 2 [times]. Is determined whether or not is occurring. Then, the determination result is saved as the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207. At this time, when it is determined that the on state has occurred, a value indicating that the on state has occurred (“1” in this embodiment) is saved as the switch information, and the on state occurs. If it is determined that the switch information is not set, a value indicating that the on state has not occurred (“0” in the present embodiment) is stored as the switch information.

In addition, the value set in the receive storage area corresponding to the setting key switch 208 is read 2 [times], and the setting key switch 208 is turned on based on the reading result of 2 [times]. Judge whether or not it is done. Then, the determination result is saved as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. At this time, when it is determined that the on state has occurred, a value indicating that the on state has occurred (“1” in this embodiment) is saved as the switch information, and the on state occurs. If it is determined that the switch information is not set, a value indicating that the on state has not occurred (“0” in the present embodiment) is stored as the switch information.

Further, the reading of the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the inner frame opening sensor 108 is executed 2 [times], and the inner frame opening sensor 108 is turned on based on the reading result of 2 [times]. Is determined whether or not is occurring. Then, when it is determined that the on state has not occurred, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is rewritten to a value (“0” in this embodiment) indicating that the on state has not occurred. On the other hand, when it is determined that the on state has occurred, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is not rewritten.

In step S1-2, the wait processing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-3. In the wait processing time setting process, a predetermined wait processing time (3.1 [s] in this embodiment) is set in the timer counter. As a result, the measurement of the wait processing time set by the timer counter is started.
In step S1-3, it is determined whether or not the wait processing time set in step S1-2 has elapsed, and if it is determined that the wait processing time has elapsed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-4. If it is determined that the wait processing time has not elapsed (No), the processing of steps S1-3 is repeated.

In step S1-4, the RAM access permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-5. In the RAM access permission process, a process necessary for permitting access to the work area of the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access permission process, a value corresponding to the access permission is stored as the RAM protect value in the RAM access protect area of the RAM 230. As a result, access to the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is permitted.

In step S1-5, the gaming machine status flag acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-6. In the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, the gaming machine status flag is acquired.
Specifically, in the game machine state flag acquisition process, the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230 is stored (loaded) in the D register.
In step S1-6, it is determined whether or not the backup valid flag is normal, and if it is determined that the backup valid flag is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-7, and the backup valid flag is normal. If it is determined that this is not the case (No), the process proceeds to step S1-18.
Here, when the value stored in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230 (backup valid flag) is a predetermined valid value, it is determined that the backup valid flag is normal, and the value stored in the backup valid flag area. If is not a predetermined valid value, it is determined that the backup valid flag is not normal.

In step S1-7, the checksum calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-8. In the checksum calculation process, the checksum is calculated based on the backup information.
Specifically, in the checksum calculation process, first, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230 among the backup information.
Next, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the unused area M2 (F300H to F3FFH) of the RAM 230 among the backup information.
In step S1-8, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculated in step S1-7 is normal, and if it is determined that the checksum is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-9. If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (No), the process proceeds to step S1-18.
Here, "the checksum value of the used area M1 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of the used area M1 stored in the checksum area of the RAM 230" and "step S1". If both the conditions of "The checksum value of the unused area M2 calculated in -7 matches the checksum value of the unused area M2 stored in the checksum area" are satisfied. Determine that the checksum is normal.
On the other hand, "the checksum value of the used area M1 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of the used area M1 stored in the checksum area of the RAM 230" and "step S1-. The checksum value of the unused area M2 calculated in 7 matches the checksum value of the unused area M2 stored in the checksum area. ”, At least one of the conditions is satisfied. If not, it is determined that the checksum is not normal.

In step S1-9, the clear target area setting process at power-on is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-10. In the power-on clear target area setting process, as a range for clearing (initializing) the used area M1 of the RAM 230, other areas excluding the set value area and the gaming machine status flag area (specifically, the checksum area, The backup valid flag area, error-related area, normal game-related area 1, normal game-related area 2, and stack area) are set.
In step S1-10, it is determined whether or not the ON state has occurred for the RAM clear switch 207, and if it is determined that the ON state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S1-11. If it is determined that the ON state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-21.
Here, based on the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 saved in step S1-1, it is determined whether or not the ON state has occurred for the RAM clear switch 207. At this time, if the value indicating that the on state has occurred is saved as the switch information, it is determined that the on state has occurred, and the value indicating that the on state has not occurred is saved. If so, it is determined that the on state has not occurred.

In step S1-11, it is determined whether or not the game-enabled state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that the game-enabled state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-12 and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S1-14.
Here, it is determined whether or not a game-enabled state has occurred based on the game machine state flag stored in the D register. At this time, if the game machine state flag stored in the D register has a value corresponding to the game-enabled state, it is determined that the game-enabled state has occurred, and if the value does not correspond to the game-enabled state, the game is played. It is determined that the possible state has not occurred.

In step S1-12, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, and if it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-13, and the setting confirmation condition is set. If it is determined that the condition is not satisfied (No), the process proceeds to step S1-14.
The "setting confirmation condition" is that the playable state has occurred, the RAM clear switch 207 has not been turned on, and the setting key switch 208 has been turned on. This is established when the frame opening sensor 108 is in the ON state.
Here, in step S1-1, when the on state has not occurred for the inner frame opening sensor 108, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is rewritten to a value indicating that the on state has not occurred. As a result, when the on state has occurred for both the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame opening sensor 108, a value indicating that the on state has occurred is saved as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. .. On the other hand, when the on state has not occurred for at least one of the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame opening sensor 108, a value indicating that the on state has not occurred is saved as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. Will be done.
Therefore, in step 1-12, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation condition is satisfied based on the switch information of the setting key switch 208 saved in step S1-1. At this time, if the value indicating that the on state has occurred is saved as the switch information, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, and the value indicating that the on state has not occurred is saved. If it is, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is not satisfied.

In step S1-13, the setting confirmation state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-14. In the setting confirmation status setting process, a value corresponding to the set value confirmation status is set as the gaming machine status flag in the D register.
In step S1-14, the clear target area setting process when the power is restored is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-15. In the clear target area setting process when the power is restored, the set value area, the gaming machine state flag area, the normal game-related area 2, and other areas excluding the stack area are set as the range for clearing (initializing) the used area M1 of the RAM 230. Areas (specifically, a checksum area, a backup valid flag area, an error-related area, and a normal game-related area 1) are set.

In step S1-15, the initialization process when the power is restored is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-16. In the initialization process when the power is restored, the range set in step S1-14 in the used area M1 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized).
In step S1-16, the subcommand transmission process when the power is restored is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-17. In the power recovery subcommand transmission process, a subcommand (power recovery specification command) that specifies that the power has been restored from the power cutoff is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S1-17, the payout command transmission process when the power is restored is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-32. In the payout command transmission process when the power is restored, the payout command for specifying that the power has been restored from the power cutoff is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S1-18, the backup abnormal state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-19. In the backup abnormal state setting process, a value corresponding to the backup abnormal state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-19, the unused area read / write check process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-20. In the unused area read / write check process, the unused area M2 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized) and a read / write check is performed.
In step S1-20, the processing for setting the area to be cleared at the time of abnormality is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-21. In the abnormal clear target area setting process, all areas (specifically, the set value area, the gaming machine state flag area, the checksum area, and the backup valid flag) are set as the range for clearing (initializing) the used area M1 of the RAM 230. Area, error-related area, normal game-related area 1, normal game-related area 2, and stack area) are set.
In step S1-21, the used area read / write check process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-22. In the used area read / write check process, the range set in step S1-20 of the used area M1 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized) and a read / write check is performed.

In step S1-22, it is determined whether or not the result of the read / write check performed in steps S1-19 and S1-21 is normal, and when it is determined that the result of the read / write check is not normal (No). , Step S1-23, and if it is determined that the read / write check result is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-24.
In step S1-23, the RAM abnormality state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-28. In the RAM abnormal state setting process, a value corresponding to the RAM abnormal state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-24, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation state has occurred (setting), and if it is determined that the setting confirmation state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-25 and the setting is performed. If it is determined that the confirmation state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S1-26.
Here, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation state has occurred based on the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register. At this time, if the gaming machine status flag saved in the D register has a value corresponding to the setting confirmation status, it is determined that the setting confirmation status has occurred, and if the value does not correspond to the setting confirmation status, the setting is made. It is determined that the confirmation state has not occurred.
In step S1-25, the game-enabled state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-26. In the game-enabled state setting process, a value corresponding to the game-enabled state is set as the game machine state flag in the D register.

In step S1-26, it is determined whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied, and if it is determined that the setting change condition is satisfied (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-27, and the setting change condition is set. If it is determined that the condition is not satisfied (No), the process proceeds to step S1-28.
The "setting change condition" is that the RAM clear switch 207 is in the ON state, the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state, and the inner frame open sensor 108 is in the ON state. It holds in the case.
Here, as described above, when the on state is generated for both the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame opening sensor 108, it is shown that the on state is generated as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. The value is saved. On the other hand, when the on state has not occurred for at least one of the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame opening sensor 108, a value indicating that the on state has not occurred is saved as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. Will be done.
Therefore, in step 1-26, it is determined whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied based on the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208 saved in step S1-1. ..
At this time, if the value indicating that the ON state has occurred is saved for both the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208, the setting change condition is satisfied. Is determined. On the other hand, when at least one of the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208 has a value indicating that the on state has not occurred, the setting change condition is satisfied. Judge that it is not.

In step S1-27, the setting change state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-28. In the setting change state setting process, a value corresponding to the setting change state is set as the game machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-28, the gaming machine status flag saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-29. In the game machine state flag saving process, the game machine state flag set in the D register is saved (saved) in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S1-29, the RAM clearing subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-30. In the RAM clear subcommand transmission process, a subcommand (RAM clear specification command) that specifies that the RAM clear has been executed is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S1-30, the RAM clearing initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-31. In the RAM clearing initialization process, the range set in step S1-9 or step S1-20 in the used area M1 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized).
In step S1-31, the RAM clearing payout command transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-32. In the RAM clear payout command transmission process, the payout command specifying that the RAM clear has been executed is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S1-32, the subcommand setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-33. In the subcommand setting process, the power-on gaming machine state specification command for specifying the current gaming machine state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Specifically, in the subcommand setting process, a subcommand output request for the RAM 230 is used to issue a power-on gaming machine status specification command that specifies the gaming machine status flag (game machine status) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230. Store in the buffer.
In step S1-33, the subcommand group setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-34. In the subcommand group setting process, the subcommand group is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Here, in the subcommand group, a subcommand for specifying the power recovery phase, a subcommand for specifying the game state (game state offset value), a subcommand for specifying the firing position, and a stop symbol of the first special symbol are specified. Subcommand to specify, the subcommand to specify the stop symbol of the second special symbol, the subcommand to specify the special figure 1 hold number, the subcommand to specify the special figure 2 hold number, the subcommand to specify the time reduction counter value, RAM230 It includes a setting value specification command that specifies the setting value stored in the setting value area of.

In step S1-34, the initial display time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-35. In the initial display time setting process, the initial display time of the performance display device 206 is set in the initial display timer.
In step S1-35, the interrupt setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to the main loop process (step S2-1). In the interrupt setting process, the CTC (counter / timer circuit), which is a peripheral device, is initially set.
Specifically, in the interrupt setting process, the interrupt vector register is set, and the interrupt count value (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment) is set in the CTC.

(Main loop processing)
Next, the main loop process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the main loop processing.
When the CPU initialization process (step S1-35) shown in FIG. 7 is completed, the CPU 210 starts the main loop process shown in FIG. The main loop process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the main loop process is a process based on the program stored in the used area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the main loop process is started, first, the process proceeds to step S2-1.
In step S2-1, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-2. In interrupt prohibition processing, the interrupt prohibition state that prohibits interrupts of other processing is set. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set, the execution of the power cutoff save processing, the timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S2-2, the initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-3. In the initial value random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
Here, the "initial value random number" is a random number for determining the initial value and the end value of soft random numbers (hit symbol random numbers, reach mode random numbers, fluctuation pattern random numbers, etc.) that are random numbers generated on the program.
That is, the value of the loop counter that generates the soft random number is updated within the range from the preset initial value to the end value. Then, the initial value and the end value of the loop counter that generates the soft random number are changed every time the value of the loop counter reaches the end value. At this time, the initial value and the end value of the loop counter are determined based on the initial value random number.

In step S2-3, the main command analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-4. In the main command analysis process, the main command received from the payout control board 400 (control command transmitted from the payout control board 400 to the main control board 200) is analyzed, and the process according to the analysis result is executed.
In step S2-4, the subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-5. In the subcommand transmission process, the subcommand stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 is output to the transmission data register of the output port 205 (command output port 1).
As a result, the subcommand input to the transmission data register is stored (stored) in the FIFO buffer. Then, the subcommands stored in the FIFO buffer are transmitted to the effect control board 300 in a predetermined order by the transmission shift register.
In step S2-5, the interrupt enable process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-6. In the interrupt enable process, the interrupt disable state is canceled. As a result, during the period from the execution of the interrupt permission processing in step S2-5 to the execution of the interrupt prohibition processing in step S2-1, execution of the power cutoff save processing, timer interrupt processing, etc. is permitted. It is the interrupt permission period.
In step S2-6, other random number update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-1. In the other random number update process, the soft random numbers excluding the hit symbol random numbers (specifically, reach mode random numbers, fluctuation pattern random numbers, etc.) are updated.

(Evacuation processing when power is cut off)
Next, the evacuation process when the power is cut off, which is executed by the CPU 210, will be described.
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an evacuation process when the power is cut off.
The main control board 200 includes a power supply cutoff detection circuit (not shown). The power cutoff detection circuit monitors the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 600, and outputs a power supply cutoff warning signal to the input port 204 when the value of the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined reference value.
Upon receiving the power cutoff warning signal, the CPU 210 starts the power cutoff save process shown in FIG. 9 during the interrupt enable period of the main loop process. The evacuation process when the power is cut off is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the evacuation process when the power is cut off is a process based on the program stored in the used area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.

When the evacuation process when the power is cut off is started, first, the process proceeds to step S3-1.
In step S3-1, the register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-2. In the register save process, the value of the register used during the execution of the main loop process is saved in the save area of the RAM 230.
In step S3-2, the power cutoff warning signal reading process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-3. In the power cutoff warning signal reading process, the power cutoff notice signal is read from the power cutoff detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power cutoff notice signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal of the input port 204 is read.
In step S3-3, is the power cutoff notice signal input from the power cutoff detection circuit based on the value read in step S3-2 (the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal)? When it is determined whether or not the power cutoff warning signal is input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S3-4, and when it is determined that the power cutoff notice signal is not input (No). Goes to step S3-13.

In step S3-4, the output port stop processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-5. In the output port stop processing, the output of the control signal and the control command by the output port 205 (output port 0 to output port 4) is stopped.
Specifically, in the output port stop processing, the values of all the bits included in the port registers of the output port 205 (output port 0 to output port 4) are initialized. As a result, the output of the control signal and the control command by the output port 205 (output port 0 to output port 4) is stopped.
In step S3-5, the backup valid flag setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-6. In the backup valid flag setting process, a predetermined valid value is saved in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S3-6, the checksum saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-7. In the checksum save process, the checksum is calculated and saved.
Specifically, in the checksum saving process, first, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230. Then, the calculated checksum value is stored in the checksum area of the RAM 230.
Next, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the unused area M2 (F300H to F3FFH) of the RAM 230. Then, the calculated checksum value is saved in the checksum area.
In step S3-7, the RAM access prohibition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-8. In the RAM access prohibition process, a process for prohibiting access to the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access prohibition process, a value corresponding to the access prohibition is stored as the RAM protect value in the RAM access protect area of the RAM 230. As a result, access to the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is prohibited.

In step S3-8, the loop counter setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-9. In the loop counter setting process, a predetermined number of times of reading the power cutoff warning signal is set as the value of the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-9, the power cutoff warning signal reading process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-10. In the power cutoff warning signal reading process, the power cutoff notice signal is read from the power cutoff detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power cutoff notice signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal of the input port 204 is read.
In step S3-10, is the power cutoff notice signal input from the power cutoff detection circuit based on the value read in step S3-9 (the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal)? When it is determined whether or not the power cutoff warning signal is input (No), the process proceeds to step S3-11, and when it is determined that the power cutoff notice signal is input (Yes). Goes to step S3-8.

In step S3-11, the loop counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-12. In the loop counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value set in the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-12, it is determined whether or not the value of the return determination loop counter is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the return determination loop counter is "0" (Yes), the CPU When the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S1-1) and it is determined that the value of the return determination loop counter is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S3-9.
In step S3-13, the register return process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process returns to the original process. In the register return processing, the value of the register saved in step S3-1 is restored. Then, after the register return processing is completed, the process returns to the main loop processing (program address specified by the stack pointer).

(Timer interrupt processing)
Next, the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing.
The clock generation circuit 202 generates an interrupt request signal every predetermined interrupt cycle (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment).
The CPU 210 starts the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 10 during the interrupt enable period of the main loop processing in response to the generation of the interrupt request signal. The main loop process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the main loop process is a process based on the program stored in the used area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, the process proceeds to step S4-1.
In step S4-1, the register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-2. In the register save process, the values of all the registers used during the execution of the main loop process are saved in the save area of the RAM 230.
In step S4-2, interrupt enable processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-3. In the interrupt enable process, interrupts are allowed.
In step S4-3, the dynamic port output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-4. The dynamic port output processing will be described later.

In step S4-4, the port input process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-5. In the port input process, the status of each switch sensor (each signal) is acquired.
The RAM 230 has an input information storage area corresponding to each switch sensor (each signal input to the input port 204) connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3), and an input port 204 (input). An on-state storage area corresponding to each switch sensor (each signal input to the input port 204) connected to the port 0 to the input port 3) is provided.
In the port input process, first, for each switch sensor connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3), the information set in the reception storage area corresponding to the switch sensor is acquired. The acquired information is stored (stored) in the input information storage area corresponding to the switch sensor.
As a result, when the detection signal from the switch sensor is input (high level) for each switch sensor, "1" is stored in the input information storage area corresponding to the switch sensor, and the "1" is stored. If the detection signal from the switch sensor is not input (low level), "0" is stored in the input storage area corresponding to the switch sensor.

Next, it is determined whether or not an on state has occurred for each switch sensor connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3). At this time, for each switch sensor, the on state is set based on the value saved in the input information storage area in the previous port input process and the value saved in the input information storage area in the current port input process. Determine if it has occurred.
The "on state" means a state in which the detection signal is not input (low level) to a state in which the detection signal is input (high level).
Then, when it is determined that the on state has occurred for each switch sensor, "1" is set in the on state storage area corresponding to the switch sensor. On the other hand, when it is determined that the on state has not occurred for each switch sensor, "0" is set in the on state storage area corresponding to the switch sensor.
In the following description, the value stored in the on-state storage area corresponding to each switch sensor is referred to as “switch bit data” of the switch sensor.
In particular, the input port 1 is provided with a reception storage area corresponding to the handle detection signal input from the launchable condition detection unit 422. Then, in the port input process, the information set in the reception storage area corresponding to the handle detection signal of the input port 1 is acquired, and the acquired information is stored (stored) in the input information storage area corresponding to the handle detection signal. ).

In step S4-5, the gaming machine status flag acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-6. In the game machine state flag acquisition process, the game machine state flag stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
In step S4-6, it is determined whether or not the game-enabled state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that the game-enabled state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S4-7 and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S4-9.
Here, based on the gaming machine state flag acquired in step S4-5, it is determined whether or not a game-enabled state has occurred. At this time, if the acquired gaming machine status flag has a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has occurred, and if it is not a value corresponding to the playable state, the playable state is generated. Judge that it is not.

In step S4-7, it is determined whether or not an abnormal state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that no abnormal state has occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S4-8, and the abnormal state is changed. If it is determined that it has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S4-19.
Here, it is determined whether or not an abnormal state has occurred based on the gaming machine state flag acquired in step S4-5. At this time, if the acquired gaming machine status flag has a value corresponding to any one of the setting abnormal state, the RAM abnormal state, and the backup abnormal state, it is determined that the abnormal state has occurred. If the acquired gaming machine status flag is not a value corresponding to any of the setting abnormal status, the RAM abnormal status, and the backup abnormal status, it is determined that the abnormal status has not occurred.

In step S4-8, the setting-related process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19. The setting-related processing will be described later.
In step S4-9, the timer update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-10. In the timer update process, various timers are updated.
Specifically, in the timer update process, the values of various timer counters (special game timer, normal game timer, security timer, etc.) are updated.
In step S4-10, the initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-11. The initial value random number update process in step S4-10 is the same process as the initial value random number update process in step S2-2.
Specifically, in the initial value random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
In step S4-11, the winning symbol random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-12. In the hit symbol random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the hit symbol random number is updated among the soft random numbers.
In step S4-12, the switch management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-13. In the switch management process, processing (acquisition of various random numbers, etc.) according to the state (whether or not the on state is detected) of each switch 101, 102, 104 is executed. The switch management process will be described later.

In step S4-13, the special game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-14. In the special game management process, the operation of the special figure display device and the operation of the special electric accessory 53a are managed. The special game management process will be described later.
In step S4-14, the normal game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-15. In the normal game management process, the operation of the normal figure display device and the operation of the normal electric accessory 52a are managed. The normal game management process will be described later.

In step S4-15, the state management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-16. In the state management process, the occurrence / cancellation of various errors (abnormal states) is monitored. Then, when the occurrence / cancellation of various errors is detected, various settings (subcommand settings, etc.) are executed.
In the state management process, the value saved in the input information storage area corresponding to the handle detection signal (the value saved in the previous timer interrupt process and the value saved in the current timer interrupt process) is used. Then, it is determined whether or not the handle detection signal has changed from the non-input state to the input state. Then, when it is determined that the handle detection signal has changed from the non-input state to the input state, the game status specification command for designating the occurrence of the launchable state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Further, in the state management process, it is based on the value stored in the input information storage area corresponding to the handle detection signal (the value saved in the previous timer interrupt process and the value saved in the current timer interrupt process). Then, it is determined whether or not the handle detection signal has changed from the input state to the non-input state. Then, when it is determined that the handle detection signal has changed from the input state to the non-input state, the game status specification command for specifying the release of the fireable state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S4-16, the winning opening switch process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-17. In the winning opening switch processing, processing (update of various counters, etc.) according to the state (whether or not the on state is detected) of each switch 101 to 103, 105, 106 is executed.

In step S4-17, the payout control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-18. In the payout control management process, a payout command is generated based on the value of the prize ball control counter set in step S4-16, and the generated payout command is transmitted.
In the present embodiment, as the prize ball control counter, the prize ball control counter 1 in which the number of ball game balls entered in the large winning opening 53 is stored, and the number of ball game balls entered in the right other winning opening 54 is stored. The prize ball control counter 2, the upper left, middle left, lower left, etc., the prize ball control counter 3 that stores the number of ball game balls that have entered the winning openings 55 to 57, and the ball game ball that has entered the first starting port 51. A prize ball control counter 4 for storing the number of balls and a prize ball control counter 5 for storing the number of ball games that have entered the second starting port 52 are set.
Then, in the payout control management process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or more, a payout command for specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (15 [balls] in this embodiment) is generated. The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, when the payout control board 400 completes the payout of the prize ball by the game ball payout device 440, the payout control board 400 transmits a main command for designating the completion of the payout to the main control board 200. Then, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 1 in response to the reception of the main command that specifies the completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is "1" or more, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (10 [balls] in this embodiment) is generated. The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 2 in response to the reception of the main command specifying the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is "1" or more, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (10 [balls] in this embodiment) is generated. The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 3 in response to the reception of the main command specifying the completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is "1" or more, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (3 [balls] in this embodiment) is generated. The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 4 in response to the reception of the main command specifying the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is "1" or more, a payout command for specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (1 [ball] in this embodiment) is generated. The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 5 in response to the reception of the main command specifying the completion of the payout.

In step S4-18, the launch position designation management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19. In the launch position designation management process, the process related to the designation of the launch position is executed.
Specifically, in the launch position designation management process, when changing from the state of designating the launch of the game ball to the left route to the state of designating the launch of the game ball to the right route (at the start of the big hit game state, etc.). , "1" is set in the firing position designation flag area of the RAM 230, and the subcommand for designating the launch of the game ball to the right path is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a subcommand for designating the launch of the game ball to the right path is transmitted to the effect control board 300.
On the other hand, when changing from the state of specifying the launch of the game ball to the right route to the state of specifying the launch of the game ball to the left route (at the end of the time reduction control, etc.), the "launch position designation flag area" of the RAM 230 is set to ". Set "0".

In step S4-19, the external information management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-20. In the external information management process, external information (external signal) to be output to the hall computer (or data display device) is set.
In the present embodiment, as external information output from the pachinko machine 1 to an external device (electronic device such as a hall computer or a data display device), symbol confirmation count information, start port information, jackpot information, security information, and out port Information on the number of payouts, information on the occurrence of errors, etc. are specified.
The "design fixed number information" is external information regarding the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (variation display and stop display of the special symbol). The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the symbol confirmation count information to the hall computer (or data display device) every time the number of executions of the stop display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number.
The "starting port information" is external information regarding the entry of the game ball into the starting ports 51 and 52. Each time the ON state of the detection signal input from the start port switches 101 and 102 is detected, the CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the start port information to the hall computer (or data display device).
The "big hit information" is external information regarding the occurrence of the big hit gaming state. The main control board 200 outputs an external signal corresponding to the jackpot information to the hall computer (or data display device) each time a jackpot gaming state occurs.
The "out port payout information" is external information regarding the number of game balls discharged from the discharge channel (or the number of game balls discharged from the out port 58). The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the out-out slot payout number information to the hall computer every time the value of the out-ball number counter for external information reaches a predetermined value.
The "security information" is external information indicating that the setting change state is occurring, the setting confirmation state is occurring, or various errors (abnormalities) are occurring. When the value of the security timer is "1" or more, the CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the security information to the hall computer.

In the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the fixed number counter for external information has reached a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the fixed number counter for external information has reached a predetermined value, the symbol fixed number information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. After that, a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the fixed number counter for external information. As a result, the symbol confirmation count information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the start port entry count counter for external information has reached a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the start port entry count counter for external information has reached a predetermined value, the start port information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. After that, a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the start port entry count counter for external information. As a result, the starting port information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.

Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot count counter for external information has reached a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot count counter for external information has reached a predetermined value, the jackpot information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. After that, a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the jackpot count counter for external information. As a result, the jackpot information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the out-ball number counter for external information has reached a predetermined value (10 [balls] in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the out-ball count counter for external information has reached a predetermined value, the out-port payout information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. After that, a predetermined value (10 [balls] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the out-ball number counter for external information. As a result, the out-port payout information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.

Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230 is a value corresponding to the game-enabled state.
Then, it is determined that the value stored in the game machine state flag area is not a value corresponding to the game-enabled state (setting change state, setting confirmation state, setting abnormality state, RAM abnormality state, or backup abnormality state). If it is determined to be a value), the security information is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, security information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the security timer is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the security timer is "1" or more, the security information is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, security information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.

In step S4-20, the LED display setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-21. In the LED display setting process, display data to be output to the main display device 60 or the performance display device 206 is set.
The RAM 230 is provided with a common 0 output request buffer (8 bits), a common 1 output request buffer (8 bits), a common 2 output request buffer (8 bits), and a common 3 output request buffer (8 bits). Has been done.
In the LED display setting process, first, the common 2 output request buffer is cleared (initialized) and the common 3 output request buffer is cleared (initialized). Specifically, "0" is set for each bit value of the common 2 output request buffer, and "0" is set for each bit value of the common 3 output request buffer.

Next, the gaming machine status flag stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Then, when the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to the game-enabled state, the normal time display data setting process described later is executed. On the other hand, when the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to the setting change status, the display data setting process at the time of setting change, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, when the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to the setting confirmation status, the display data setting process at the time of setting confirmation, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine status flag has a value corresponding to an abnormal status (setting abnormal status, RAM abnormal status, or backup abnormal status), the abnormal time display data setting process described later is executed.

In the normal display data setting process, first, the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter is acquired, and the display data (8 bits) corresponding to the acquired value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter is stored in the common 0 output request buffer. Set.
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the main display device 60, the first special symbol is displayed by the LEDs 1 to 8.
Next, the value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter is acquired, and the display data (8 bits) corresponding to the acquired value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter is set in the common 1 output request buffer.
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the main display device 60, the second special symbol is displayed by the LEDs 9 to 16.
Next, the value of the normal figure display symbol counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value of the normal figure display symbol counter is set as the output data a.
Next, the values set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 are the "large winning opening opening state", the "large winning opening opening control state", the "large winning opening closing enabled state", and the "large winning opening opening". It is determined whether or not the value specifies one of the special game phases in the "end wait state".
Then, the values set in the special game phase flag area are the "large winning opening opening state", the "large winning opening opening control state", the "large winning opening closing valid state", and the "large winning opening opening end wait state". If it is determined that the value specifies one of the special game phases, the value set in the special symbol determination flag area of the RAM 230 (the value corresponding to the type of the jackpot symbol) is acquired and acquired. The display data corresponding to the set value is set as the output data b.
On the other hand, the values set in the special game phase flag area are the "large winning opening opening state", the "large winning opening opening control state", the "large winning opening closing valid state", and the "large winning opening opening end wait state". If it is determined that the value does not specify any of the special game phases, the output data b is not set.
Next, the value set in the firing position designation flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data c.
Next, the display data (8 bits) that is the logical sum of the output data a to the output data c is set in the common 2 output request buffer.
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the main display device 60, the ordinary symbols are displayed by the LEDs 17 and 18, and the number of round games executed during the big hit game state by the LEDs 19 to 23 (type of the big hit game state). Is displayed, and the LED 24 displays the route (left route or right route) at which the game ball should be launched.
Next, the value of the special figure 1 hold count counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data d.
Next, the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data e.
Next, the value of the normal figure hold number counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data f.
Next, it is determined whether or not the power is restored.
Then, when it is determined that the power is restored, the value set in the special figure high probability state flag area is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data g.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the power is not restored, the output data g is not set.
Next, the value set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data h.
Next, the display data (8 bits) that is the logical sum of the output data d to the output data h is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the main display device 60, the special figure 1 hold number is displayed by the LEDs 25 and 26, the special figure 2 hold number is displayed by the LEDs 27 and 28, and the special figure 2 hold number is displayed by the LEDs 29 and 30. The number of holds is displayed, the game state at the time of power recovery (during the occurrence of the special figure high probability state or the occurrence of the special figure low probability state) is displayed by the LED 31, and the current game state (execution of the time saving control) is displayed by the LED 32. Medium or stopped) is displayed.

In the setting change display data setting process, information indicating that the setting change state is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and is stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230. The information indicating the value is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "r" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "n." Is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and "-". The display data (8 bits) of the above is set in the common 2 output request buffer, and the display data corresponding to the set value stored in the set value area of the RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the characters "r" are displayed by the LEDs 33 to LED40, the characters "n." Are displayed by the LEDs 41 to LED48, and the characters "n." Are displayed by the LEDs 49 to LED56. The characters "-" are displayed, and the numbers indicating the set values are displayed by the LEDs 57 to 64.

In the setting confirmation display data setting process, information indicating that the setting confirmation state is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and is stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230. The information indicating the value is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "r" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "n." Is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and the RAM 230 is set. The display data corresponding to the set value stored in the value area is set in the common 3 output request buffer. No display data is set for the common 2 output request buffer (the clear value remains).
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the characters "r" are displayed by the LEDs 33 to LED40, the characters "n." Are displayed by the LEDs 41 to LED48, and the characters "n." Are displayed by the LEDs 57 to LED64. A number indicating the value is displayed. The LEDs 49 to 56 are turned off.

In the abnormal display data setting process, information indicating that an abnormal state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state) is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer. At the same time, the error code corresponding to the generated abnormality is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "E" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, and the display data (8 bits) of "r." Is set in the common 1 output request buffer. The display data (error code) corresponding to the status (setting abnormal status, RAM abnormal status, or backup abnormal status) is set in the common 3 output request buffer. No display data is set for the common 2 output request buffer (the clear value remains).
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the letters "E" are displayed by the LEDs 33 to LED40, the letters "r." Are displayed by the LEDs 41 to LED48, and the error is displayed by the LEDs 57 to LED64. A number indicating the code is displayed. The LEDs 49 to 56 are turned off.

In step S4-21, the solenoid data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-22. In the solenoid data setting process, the control data (drive data) to be output to each of the solenoids 64 and 65 is stored (set) in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S4-22, the port output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-23. In the port output process, various signals are output to the hall computer, each solenoid 64, 65, and the like.
Specifically, in the port output process, various information (external signal, control signal, etc.) set in the port output request buffer is output to the output port 205 (output port 2, output port 3). As a result, the external signal set in the port output request buffer is output to the hall computer. Further, the solenoids 64 and 65 are driven and controlled based on the drive signal set in the port output request buffer.
In step S4-23, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-24. In interrupt prohibition processing, the interrupt prohibition state that prohibits interrupts of other processing is set. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set, the execution of the power cutoff save processing, the timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.

In step S4-24, the test signal output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-25. In the test signal output process, test information (test signal) is set.
The test signal output process is a process based on a program for executing the process related to the test specified in the game machine rules. That is, the test signal output process is a process based on the program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The test signal tube is called during execution of timer interrupt processing.
Specifically, in the test signal output process, test information (test signal) indicating an internal state (big hit game state, time saving control execution state, special symbol lottery probability state, etc.) is sent to the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. Remember.
In step S4-25, the performance display device control process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-26. The performance display device control process will be described later.
In step S4-26, the register return process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process returns to the original process. In the register return processing, the value of the register saved in step S4-1 is restored. Then, after the register return processing is completed, the process returns to the main loop processing (program address specified by the stack pointer).

(Dynamic port output processing)
Next, the dynamic port output process in step S4-3 will be described.
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the dynamic port output process.
When the dynamic port output process is executed in step S4-3, as shown in FIG. 11, first, the process proceeds to step S29-1.
In step S29-1, the output data clearing process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-2. In the output data clearing process, the A register is cleared (initialized). Specifically, "0" is set as each bit value of the A register.
In step S29-2, the main display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-3. In the main display device data output process, the value of the A register (the value cleared in step S29-1) is output to the output port 0. As a result, the output port 0 is cleared (initialized), and each data signal (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60 becomes a low level.

In step S29-3, the performance display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-4. In the performance display device data output process, the value of the A register (the value cleared in step S29-1) is output to the output port 4. As a result, the output port 4 is cleared (initialized), and each data signal (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 206 becomes a low level.
In step S29-4, the common selection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-5. In the common selection process, the value of the common counter is updated.
Specifically, in the common selection process, it is determined whether or not the value of the common counter has reached the upper limit value (“3” in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the common counter has not reached the upper limit value, "1" is added to the value of the common counter. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the common counter has reached the upper limit value, a predetermined initial value (“0” in this embodiment) is set as the value of the common counter.

In step S29-5, the common output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-6.
In the common output process, the output data corresponding to the value of the common counter is output to the output port 1.
That is, when the value of the common counter = "0", the output data with "COM0" as the high level and "COM1", "COM2", and "COM3" as the low level is output to the output port 1. As a result, "COM0" is selected (output) from "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "1", the output data with "COM1" as the high level and "COM0", "COM2", and "COM3" as the low level is output to the output port 1. As a result, "COM1" is selected (output) from "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "2", the output data with "COM2" as the high level and "COM0", "COM1", and "COM3" as the low level is output to the output port 1. As a result, "COM2" is selected (output) from "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "3", the output data with "COM3" as the high level and "COM0", "COM1", and "COM2" as the low level is output to the output port 1. As a result, "COM3" is selected (output) from "COM0" to "COM3".

Further, in the common output process, the output data of the emission permission signal is output to the output port 1.
That is, first, it is determined whether or not the playable state has occurred (set).
Then, when it is determined that the playable state has occurred, the output data having the launch permission signal at a high level is output to the output port 1. As a result, a launch permission signal is output.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the playable state has not occurred, the output data having the launch permission signal at the low level is output to the output port 1. As a result, the output of the launch permission signal is stopped.
Here, it is determined whether or not a game-enabled state has occurred based on the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the game machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the game-enabled state, it is determined that the game-enabled state has occurred, and if the value is not the value corresponding to the game-enabled state, the game is played. It is determined that the possible state has not occurred.
In the present embodiment, the output of the launch permission signal is set only when it is determined that the playable state has occurred in the common output process. As a result, the launch permission signal is output only during the occurrence (setting) of the game-enabled state. However, in the common output process, the output of the launch permission signal may be set regardless of the state of the gaming machine. With such a configuration, the launch permission signal can be output at all times during the period when the power is turned on to the main control board 200.

In step S29-6, it is determined whether or not the playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that the playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S29-7 and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S29-11.
Here, it is determined whether or not a game-enabled state has occurred based on the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the game machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the game-enabled state, it is determined that the game-enabled state has occurred, and if the value is not the value corresponding to the game-enabled state, the game is played. It is determined that the possible state has not occurred.

In step S29-7, the main display device data acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-8. In the main display device data acquisition process, the display data for the main display device 60 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the main display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is confirmed. Then, among the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer of the RAM 230, the display data set in the output request buffer corresponding to the confirmed common counter value is acquired, and the acquired display data is stored in the A register. Set.
At this time, when the value of the common counter = "0", the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "1", the display data set in the common 1 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "2", the display data set in the common 2 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "3", the display data set in the common 3 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the main display device data acquisition process is common in the LED display setting process (specifically, the normal display data setting process) in step S4-20 included in the previous timer interrupt process. 0 Output request buffer to common 3 Display data set in the output request buffer.

In step S29-8, the main display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-9. In the main display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S29-7 is output to the output port 0.
As a result, the data signal (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one output request buffer out of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer) becomes the source driver. It is output for 250a.
That is, the display of the main display device 60 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one output request buffer out of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer).

In step S29-9, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-10. In interrupt prohibition processing, the interrupt prohibition state that prohibits interrupts of other processing is set. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set, the execution of the power cutoff save processing, the timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S29-10, the performance display device output process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4). The performance display device output processing will be described later.

In step S29-11, the performance display device data acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-12. In the performance display device data acquisition process, the display data for the performance display device 206 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the performance display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is confirmed. Then, among the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer of the RAM 230, the display data set in the output request buffer corresponding to the confirmed common counter value is acquired, and the acquired display data is stored in the A register. Set.
At this time, when the value of the common counter = "0", the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "1", the display data set in the common 1 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "2", the display data set in the common 2 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "3", the display data set in the common 3 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the performance display device data acquisition process is the LED display setting process (specifically, the display data setting process at the time of setting change, the setting confirmation) in step S4-20 included in the previous timer interrupt process. The display data is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer in the time display data setting process or the abnormal time display data setting process).

In step S29-12, the performance display device data output process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4). In the performance display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S29-11 is output to the output port 4.
As a result, the data signal ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one output request buffer out of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer) becomes the source driver. It is output for 250b.
That is, the display of the performance display device 206 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one output request buffer out of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer).

(Performance display device output processing)
Next, the performance display device output process in step S29-10 will be described.
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the performance display device output process.
The performance display device output process is a process based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206. That is, the performance display device output process is a process based on the program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The performance display device output process is called during execution of the dynamic port output process.
When the performance display device output process is called in step S29-10, first, as shown in FIG. 12, the process proceeds to step S30-1.
In step S30-1, the register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-2. In the register save process, the values of all the registers used during the execution of the process based on the program stored in the used area m1 are saved in the RAM save area. In addition, the values of all the stack pointers used during the execution of the processing based on the program stored in the used area m1 are saved in the RAM save area.

In step S30-2, the performance display device data acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-3. In the performance display device data acquisition process, the display data for the performance display device 206 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the performance display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is confirmed. Then, the display data set in the area corresponding to the confirmed common counter value among the identification segment output request buffer and the ratio segment output request buffer of the RAM 230 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register. ..
At this time, when the value of the common counter = "0", the display data set in the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "1", the display data set in the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "2", the display data set in the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "3", the display data set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the performance display device data acquisition process is set in the identification segment output request buffer or the ratio segment output request buffer in the performance display device control process in step S4-25 included in the previous timer interrupt process. It becomes the displayed data.

In step S30-3, the performance display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-4. In the performance display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S30-2 is output to the output port 4.
As a result, the data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) based on the display data set in the output request buffer (identification segment output request buffer or ratio segment output request buffer) are output to the source driver 250b.
That is, the display of the performance display device 206 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (identification segment output request buffer or ratio segment output request buffer).

In step S30-4, the register return process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-5. In the register return processing, the value of the register saved in step S30-1 (the value of the register used during execution of the processing based on the program stored in the used area m1) and the value of the register in step S30-1. The value of the saved stack pointer (the value of the stack pointer used during the execution of the process based on the program stored in the used area m1) and the value of the stack pointer are restored.
In step S30-5, the interrupt enable process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4). In the interrupt enable process, the interrupt disable state is canceled. As a result, execution of save processing when the power is cut off, timer interrupt processing, and the like is permitted.

(Setting-related processing)
Next, the setting-related processing in step S4-8 will be described.
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the setting-related processing.
When the setting-related process is executed in step S4-8, as shown in FIG. 13, first, the process proceeds to step S37-1.
In step S37-1, it is determined whether or not the setting change state has occurred (setting), and if it is determined that the setting change state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-2 and the setting is performed. If it is determined that the changed state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S37-8.
Here, it is determined whether or not the setting change state has occurred based on the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the gaming machine status flag area is a value corresponding to the setting change state, it is determined that the setting change state has occurred, and if it is not a value corresponding to the setting change state, the setting is made. It is determined that the change state has not occurred.

In step S37-2, the set value acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-3. In the set value acquisition process, the set value stored in the set value area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded), and the acquired set value is stored in the register.
In step S37-3, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed, and if it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-4 and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed. If it is determined that the 207 has not been pressed (No), the process proceeds to step S37-5.
Here, regarding the RAM clear switch 207, if the ON state has occurred, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed, and if the ON state has not occurred, the RAM clear switch 207 has not been pressed. judge.
In step S37-4, the set value update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-5. In the set value update process, "1" is added to the set value stored in the register.

In step S37-5, it is determined whether or not the set value stored in the register is less than a predetermined setting comparison value (“6” in this embodiment), and the set value stored in the register is predetermined. If it is determined that the value is not less than the setting comparison value of (No), the process proceeds to step S37-6, and the setting value stored in the register is the predetermined setting comparison. If it is determined that the value is less than the value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-7.
In step S37-6, the set value initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-7. In the set value initialization process, a predetermined initial value (“0” in this embodiment) is overwritten as the set value stored in the register.
In step S37-7, the set value saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-8. In the set value saving process, the set value stored in the register is saved in the set value area of the RAM 230.

In step S37-8, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state, and when it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is not in the ON state (is in the OFF state) (No). Moves to step S37-9, and when it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-19). ..
Here, regarding the setting key switch 208, if the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state, it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state, and if the setting key switch 208 is not in the ON state, the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state. It is determined that it has not been done.
In step S37-9, the subcommand setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-10. In the subcommand setting process, the setting-related end specification command (subcommand) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S37-10, the subcommand group setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-11. In the subcommand group setting process, the subcommand group is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Here, the subcommand group includes a subcommand for specifying the game state (game state offset value), a subcommand for specifying the firing position, a subcommand for specifying the stop symbol of the first special symbol, and a stop of the second special symbol. Subcommand to specify the symbol, special figure 1 subcommand to specify the number of holds, special figure 2 subcommand to specify the number of holds, subcommand to specify the value of the time reduction counter, setting stored in the setting value area of RAM230 A setting value specification command that specifies a value is included.
In step S37-11, the ram set process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-19). In the ram set process, a game-enabled state is set as the game machine state.
Specifically, the value corresponding to the playable state is saved (saved) as the value (game machine state flag) of the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230.

(Switch management process)
Next, the switch management process in step S4-12 will be described.
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the switch management process.
When the switch management process is executed in step S4-12, first, as shown in FIG. 14, the process proceeds to step S5-1.
In step S5-1, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the gate switch 104 is detected, and if it is determined that the ON state of the gate switch 104 is detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-2 and the gate is gated. If it is determined that the ON state of the switch 104 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-3.
In step S5-2, the normal drawing start ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-3. The normal figure starting ball detection process will be described later.
In addition, in the normal drawing start ball detection process, it is determined whether or not the right-handed period is in progress. Then, when it is determined that the right-handed hitting period is not in progress (the left-handed hitting period is in progress), "1" is added to the value of the right-handed hitting error counter.
In the present embodiment, the period in which one of the game states of the jackpot game state and the time reduction control is being executed is the right-handed period. On the other hand, the period during which the normal gaming state (the gaming state in which the jackpot gaming state is not occurring and the time reduction control is stopped) is generated is the left-handed period.

In step S5-3, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 is detected, and if it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 is detected (Yes), the step is taken. If it is determined in S5-4 that the ON state of the start port switch 101 in FIG. 1 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-5.
In step S5-4, the special figure 1 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-5. Special Figure 1 The starting ball detection process will be described later.
In step S5-5, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is detected, and if it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is detected (Yes), step S5-5. If it is determined in S5-6 that the ON state of the start port switch 102 in FIG. 2 has not been detected (No), a series of processes are terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). do.
In step S5-6, the special figure 2 starting ball detection process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). The special figure 2 starting ball detection process will be described later.

(Public figure start ball detection process)
Next, the normal drawing start ball detection process in step S5-2 will be described.
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a normal drawing start ball detection process.
When the normal figure start ball detection process is executed in step S5-2, as shown in FIG. 15, first, the process proceeds to step S6-1.
In step S6-1, the random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-2. In the normal figure random number acquisition process, a winning random number (random number value) is acquired (loaded) from a loop counter corresponding to a normal symbol lottery.
In step S6-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal figure hold number counter is the upper limit value (“4” in this embodiment), and it is determined that the value of the normal figure hold number counter is not the upper limit value. In (No), the process proceeds to step S6-3, and when it is determined that the value of the normal figure hold count counter is the upper limit value (Yes), a series of processes are terminated and the next process (step S5-). Move to 3).
In step S6-3, the normal figure hold number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-4. In the normal figure hold number counter update process, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the normal figure hold number counter is newly set in the normal figure hold number counter.

In step S6-4, the random number saving process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-3). In the normal figure random number storage process, the winning random number acquired in step S6-1 is stored in the normal figure game information storage area of the RAM 230 as the normal figure game information.
The RAM 230 includes a storage area 0 for storing the normal map game information during execution of the game, and a normal map game information storage area for storing the normal map game information for which the normal map winning determination is reserved. Has been done.
The fuzu game information storage area is configured to include a storage area 1 to a storage area 4 as a storage area capable of storing the fuzu game information.
The priority of each storage area is defined to be storage area 1, storage area 2, storage area 3, and storage area 4 (upper → lower) in order from the highest priority. Then, as for the Fuzu game information stored in the Fuzu game information storage area, the Fuzu winning determination is executed in order from the one stored in the storage area having the higher priority.
In the normal figure random number storage process, the winning random number acquired in step S6-1 is stored in the normal figure game information storage area as the normal figure game information. At this time, the fuzu game information is stored in the storage area having the highest priority among the vacant storage areas.
That is, when the value of the current number of reserved figures counter = "1", the winning random number acquired in step S6-1 is stored in the storage area 1. When the value of the current normal figure hold number counter = "2", the winning random number acquired in step S6-1 is stored in the storage area 2. When the value of the current number of reserved numbers counter is "3", the winning random number acquired in step S6-1 is stored in the storage area 3. When the value of the current normal figure hold number counter = "4", the winning random number acquired in step S6-1 is stored in the storage area 4.

(Special figure 1 starting ball detection process)
Next, the special figure 1 starting ball detection process of step S5-4 will be described.
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 starting ball detection process.
When the special figure 1 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-4, first, as shown in FIG. 16, the process proceeds to step S7-1.
In step S7-1, the special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, the special symbol identification value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230. In addition, "1" is added to the value of the start port entry count counter for external information.
Further, in the special symbol identification value setting process, it is determined whether or not the right-handed period is in progress. Then, when it is determined that the right-handed error counter is not in progress (the left-handed hitting period is in progress), the value of the right-handed error counter is reset (“0” is set as the value of the right-handed error counter).
In step S7-2, the hold number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-3. In the hold number counter address setting process, the address of the hold number counter is set in the hold number counter address setting area of the RAM 230.
In step S7-3, the special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

(Special figure 2 starting ball detection process)
Next, the special figure 2 starting ball detection process of step S5-6 will be described.
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 starting ball detection process.
When the special figure 2 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-6, first, as shown in FIG. 17, the process proceeds to step S8-1.
In step S8-1, the special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, the special symbol identification value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230. In addition, "1" is added to the value of the start port entry count counter for external information.
Further, in the special symbol identification value setting process, it is determined whether or not the right-handed period is in progress. Then, when it is determined that the right-handed hitting period is not in progress (the left-handed hitting period is in progress), "1" is added to the value of the right-handed hitting error counter.
In step S8-2, the hold number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-3. In the hold number counter address setting process, the address of the hold number counter in FIG. 2 is set in the hold number counter address area of the RAM 230.
In step S8-3, the special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

(Special symbol random number acquisition process)
Next, the special symbol random number acquisition process in steps S7-3 and S8-3 will be described.
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a special symbol random number acquisition process.
When the special symbol random number acquisition process is executed in steps S7-3 and S8-3, as shown in FIG. 18, first, the process proceeds to step S9-1.
In step S9-1, the special symbol identification value acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-2. In the special symbol identification value acquisition process, the special symbol identification value set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S9-2, the special figure pending number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-3. In the special figure hold number acquisition process, the value of the special figure hold number counter (special figure 1 hold number counter or special figure 2 hold number counter) specified by the address set in the hold number counter address area (special figure 1 hold). Acquire (load) the number or the number reserved in Special Figure 2.

In step S9-3, the special figure random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-4. In the special figure random number acquisition process, various random numbers (random number values) such as a big hit random number, a hit symbol random number, a reach group random number, a reach mode random number, and a fluctuation pattern random number are acquired (loaded) from a loop counter corresponding to each lottery. At this time, the corresponding loop counter is selected based on the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1.
In step S9-4, it is determined whether or not the special figure hold number (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number) acquired in step S9-2 is the upper limit value (“4” in this embodiment). If it is determined that the number of reserved special figures is not the upper limit (No), the process proceeds to step S9-5, and if it is determined that the number of reserved special figures is not the upper limit (Yes), a series of processes are performed. Is completed and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13 or S5-5).
In step S9-5, the special figure hold number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-6. In the special figure hold count counter update process, the value set in the special figure hold count counter (special figure 1 hold count counter or special figure 2 hold count counter) specified by the address set in the hold count counter address area. The value obtained by adding "1" to is newly set in the special figure hold count counter.

In step S9-6, the special figure random number storage process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-7. In the special figure random number storage process, various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are used as special figure game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) in the special figure game information storage area (special figure 1 game) of the RAM 230. It is stored in the information storage area or the special figure 2 game information storage area).
The RAM 230 has a storage area 0 in which special figure game information during game execution is stored, a special figure 1 game information storage area in which start determination is reserved, and a special figure 1 game information storage area in which start determination is reserved. It is configured to include the special figure 2 game information storage area.
The special figure 1 game information storage area is configured to include a storage area 1 to a storage area 4 as a storage area capable of storing the special figure 1 game information.
The priority of each storage area is defined to be storage area 1, storage area 2, storage area 3, and storage area 4 (upper → lower) in order from the highest priority. Then, the start determination of the special figure 1 game information stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area is executed in order from the one stored in the storage area having a higher priority.
The special figure 2 game information storage area is configured to include a storage area 1 to a storage area 4 as a storage area capable of storing the special figure 2 game information.
The priority of each storage area is defined to be storage area 1, storage area 2, storage area 3, and storage area 4 (upper → lower) in order from the highest priority. Then, the start determination of the special figure 2 game information stored in the special figure 2 game information storage area is executed in order from the one stored in the storage area having a higher priority.

In the special figure random number storage process, when the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are used as the special figure 1 game information. , Special figure 1 Store in the game information storage area. At this time, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area having the highest priority among the vacant storage areas.
That is, when the value of the current special figure 1 hold number counter = "1", various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 1. When the value of the current special figure 1 hold number counter = "2", various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 2. When the value of the current special figure 1 hold number counter = "3", various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 3. When the value of the current special figure 1 hold number counter = "4", various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 4.
On the other hand, when the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are used as the special diagram 2 game information as the special diagram 2 game. Store in the information storage area. At this time, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area having the highest priority among the vacant storage areas.
That is, when the value of the current special figure 2 hold number counter = "1", various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 1. When the value of the current special figure 2 hold count counter = "2", various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 2. When the value of the current special figure 2 hold number counter = "3", various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 3. When the value of the current special figure 2 hold number counter = "4", various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 4.

In step S9-7, the hold number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-8. In the hold number specification command setting process, the hold number specification command that specifies that the special figure hold number (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number) has increased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. do. At this time, if the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, a hold number designation command for designating that the number of reserved special figures 1 is increased by "1". Is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230, and when the value corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, the hold number specification command for specifying that the special figure 2 hold number has increased by "1" is given to the RAM 230. Stored in the subcommand output request buffer of.

In step S9-8, the pre-determination process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13 or S5-5). In the pre-determination process, the game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure) stored (stored) in the special figure game information storage area (special figure 1 game information storage area or special figure 2 game information storage area) in step S9-6. 2 Various lottery results are preliminarily determined based on the game information) (hereinafter referred to as "preliminary determination target game information").
In the present embodiment, various lottery results are preliminarily determined for all game information (special figure 1 game information and special figure 2 game information).
It should be noted that the game information acquired (stored) during the occurrence of the big hit game state may be configured so that the preliminary determination of various lottery results is not executed. Further, with respect to the special figure 2 game information acquired (stored) while the time reduction control is stopped, the preliminary determination of various lottery results is not executed, and the special figure 1 game information acquired (stored) during the execution of the time reduction control is executed. The above may be configured so that the preliminary determination of various lottery results is not executed.

In the pre-determination process, first, the pre-special figure hit determination process is executed.
In the pre-special symbol hit determination process, the result of the special symbol lottery (“big hit” or “missing”) is determined (preliminary special symbol hit determination).
The ROM 220 stores a special symbol winning lottery table in which the jackpot value of the special symbol lottery is registered. In addition, as a special figure winning lottery table, it corresponds to each combination of a set value ("1" to "6") and a game state ("special figure low probability state" or "special figure high probability state"). The special figure winning lottery table and is stored.
Specifically, as the special figure winning lottery table, "set value 1 low probability special figure winning lottery table", "set value 1 high probability special figure winning lottery table", and "set value 2 low probability special""Set value 2 high accuracy special figure winning lottery table", "Set value 3 low accuracy special figure winning lottery table", "Set value 3 high accuracy special figure winning lottery table" , "Set value 4 low probability special figure winning lottery table", "Set value 4 high probability special figure winning lottery table", "Set value 5 low probability special figure winning lottery table", "Set value 4 "5 high-accuracy special figure winning lottery table", "set value 6 low-accuracy special drawing winning lottery table", and "set value 6 high-accuracy special drawing winning lottery table" are stored.

In the "set value 0 low probability special figure winning lottery table", the set value = "0" and "0" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure low probability state"). If (in), it is selected. Then, in the "set value 0 low probability special figure winning lottery table", among the big hit random numbers "0" to "65535", "0" to "204" are registered as big hit values.
In the "set value 0 high probability special figure winning lottery table", the set value = "0" and "1" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure high probability state"). If (in), it is selected. Then, in the "set value 0 high probability special figure winning lottery table", among the big hit random numbers "0" to "65535", "0" to "2039" are registered as big hit values.
In the "set value 1 low probability special figure winning lottery table", the set value = "1" and "0" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure low probability state"). If (in), it is selected. Then, in the "set value 1 low probability special figure winning lottery table", among the big hit random numbers "0" to "65535", "0" to "209" are registered as big hit values.
In the "set value 1 high probability special figure winning lottery table", the set value = "1" and "1" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure high probability state"). If (in), it is selected. Then, in the "set value 1 high probability special figure winning lottery table", among the big hit random numbers "0" to "65535", "0" to "2089" are registered as big hit values.
In the "set value 2 low probability special figure winning lottery table", the set value = "2" and "0" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure low probability state"). If (in), it is selected. Then, in the "set value 2 low probability special figure winning lottery table", among the big hit random numbers "0" to "65535", "0" to "214" are registered as big hit values.
In the "set value 2 high probability special figure winning lottery table", the set value = "2" and "1" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure high probability state"). If (in), it is selected. Then, in the "set value 2 high probability special figure winning lottery table", among the big hit random numbers "0" to "65535", "0" to "2139" are registered as big hit values.

In the "set value 3 low probability special figure winning lottery table", the set value = "3" and "0" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure low probability state"). If (in), it is selected. Then, in the "set value 3 low probability special figure winning lottery table", among the big hit random numbers "0" to "65535", "0" to "219" are registered as big hit values.
In the "set value 3 high probability special figure winning lottery table", the set value = "3" and "1" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure high probability state"). If (in), it is selected. Then, in the "set value 3 high probability special figure winning lottery table", among the big hit random numbers "0" to "65535", "0" to "2189" are registered as big hit values.
In the "set value 4 low probability special figure winning lottery table", the set value = "4" and "0" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure low probability state"). If (in), it is selected. Then, in the "set value 4 low probability special figure winning lottery table", among the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535", "0" to "224" are registered as jackpot values.
In the "set value 4 high probability special figure winning lottery table", the set value = "4" and "1" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure high probability state"). If (in), it is selected. Then, in the "set value 4 high accuracy special figure winning lottery table", among the big hit random numbers "0" to "65535", "0" to "2239" are registered as big hit values.
In the "set value 5 low probability special figure winning lottery table", the set value = "5" and "0" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure low probability state"). If (in), it is selected. Then, in the "set value 5 low probability special figure winning lottery table", among the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535", "0" to "229" are registered as jackpot values.
In the "set value 5 high probability special figure winning lottery table", the set value = "5" and "1" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure high probability state"). If (in), it is selected. Then, in the "set value 5 high accuracy special figure winning lottery table", among the big hit random numbers "0" to "65535", "0" to "2289" are registered as big hit values.

In the pre-special figure hit determination process, the value (set value) set in the set value area and the current gaming state (“special figure high probability state” or “special figure low probability state”) are confirmed. , Read the special figure winning lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result.
Then, the result of the special symbol lottery (“big hit” or “missing”) is determined based on the big hit random number included in the pre-judgment target game information and the read special figure winning lottery table (preliminary special figure hit judgment). do.
Specifically, when the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information subject to pre-judgment matches the jackpot value registered in the read special figure winning lottery table, the result of the special symbol lottery is "big hit". "(Winning) is judged.
On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the pre-judgment target game information does not match the jackpot value registered in the read special figure winning lottery table (if it matches the outlier value), it is special. The result of the symbol lottery is judged to be "outlier" (lost).

In the pre-determination process, next, the pre-special symbol symbol determination process is executed. In the pre-special symbol determination process, the type of the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined (pre-special symbol determination).
In the pre-special symbol determination process, when the pre-special symbol hit determination determines "big hit" (winning), the type of "big hit symbol" is determined (pre-special symbol symbol determination).
The ROM 220 stores a jackpot symbol lottery table in which the correspondence between the winning symbol random number and the type of "big hit symbol" is registered. Further, as the jackpot symbol lottery table, a first jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the first special symbol lottery and a second jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the second special symbol lottery are stored.
Then, in the first big hit symbol lottery table, "big hit 1 symbol" and "big hit 2 symbol" are registered as the type of "big hit symbol". On the other hand, in the second big hit symbol lottery table, "big hit 3 symbols" to "big hit 6 symbols" are registered as the types of "big hit symbols".
Then, when the game information to be determined in advance is the special figure 1 game information, the first big hit symbol lottery table is read out. Then, the type of the jackpot symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read first jackpot symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, when the game information to be determined in advance is the special figure 2 game information, the second big hit symbol lottery table is read out. Then, the type of the jackpot symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read second jackpot symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, in the pre-special symbol determination process, if it is determined to be "missing" (lost) by the pre-special symbol hit determination, "missing symbol" is determined as the type of stop symbol (pre-special symbol determination). ..

In the pre-determination process, the first look-ahead designation command setting process is then executed.
In the first look-ahead designation command setting process, the first look-ahead designation command for specifying the type of the stop symbol determined by the prior special symbol symbol determination is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In the pre-determination process, next, the pre-special figure variation mode determination process is executed.
At this time, if it is determined to be "missing" (lost) by the pre-special map hit determination, the pre-special map variation state determination process at the time of defeat, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined as "big hit" (winning) by the pre-special map hit determination, the pre-winning pre-special map variation mode determination process described later is executed.

In the pre-selection change mode determination process at the time of defeat, first, the pre-random number type determination is executed.
In the pre-random number type determination, it is determined which of the "indefinite value" and the "fixed value" is the reach group random number included in the pre-determination target game information.
Here, when the reach group random number included in the pre-determination target game information is an "indefinite value", the variable mode number is acquired (stored) when the game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) is acquired. (Primary fluctuation mode number) and fluctuation pattern number are not determined.
On the other hand, when the reach group random number included in the pre-determination target game information is a "fixed value", the game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) is acquired (memorized) (step S9-8). The variation mode number (primary variation mode number) and the variation pattern number are determined at the time of execution.
In the present embodiment, the value of the reach group random number is updated in the range of "0" to "10006". Of "0" to "10006", "0" to "8499" are set as "indefinite values", and "8500" to "10006" are set as "fixed values".
Therefore, in the pre-random number type determination, if the value of the reach group random number included in the pre-determination target game information is less than "8500", it is determined as an "indefinite value" and the reach group included in the pre-determination target game information. When the value of the random number is "8500" or more, it is determined as "fixed value".

In the pre-selection variation mode determination process, when a "fixed value" is determined by the pre-random number type determination, the advance reach group determination, the pre-selection variation mode determination, and the defeated advance variation pattern determination are further performed. To execute.
In the pre-selection variation mode determination process, when the pre-random number type determination determines "indefinite value", the pre-reach group determination, the defeated pre-variation mode determination, and the defeated variation pattern determination are performed. Not executed.

In the pre-reach group determination, the reach group number (type of reach group) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a reach group determination table in which the correspondence between the reach group random number and the reach group number (type of reach group) is registered.
In addition, as the reach group determination table, the hold type (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), the number of holds ("0" to "3"), and the game state (during low probability state, during time saving state, etc.) The reach group determination table corresponding to each combination of the probabilistic state (during the probabilistic state or the latent state) is stored.
Here, in the present embodiment, the low probability state, the time saving state, the probability change state, and the latent probability state are defined as the gaming state.
The "low probability state" is a gaming state in which the special figure low probability state is occurring and the time saving control is stopped. The "time saving state" is a gaming state in which the special figure low probability state is occurring and the time saving control is being executed. The "probability change state" is a gaming state in which the special figure high probability state is occurring and the time saving control is being executed. The "latent state" is a gaming state in which a special high-probability state is occurring and the time saving control is stopped.
In the pre-reach group determination, first, the hold type (type of game information subject to pre-judgment (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), the number of holds, and the game state are confirmed, and this confirmation result is used. The corresponding reach group determination table is read. At this time, the number of holds is assumed to be "0".
Then, the reach group number is determined based on the reach group random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read reach group determination table.

In the pre-variable mode determination at the time of defeat, the variable mode number (type of variable mode) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a variation mode determination table in which the correspondence between the reach mode random number and the variation mode number (type of variation mode) is registered.
Further, as the variation mode determination table, a variation mode determination table at the time of defeat and a variation mode determination table at the time of winning are stored.
Further, as the defeated variation mode determination table, the defeated variation mode determination table corresponding to each reach group number (for each type of reach group) is stored.
In particular, in each variation mode determination table, the variation mode number (type of variation mode) and the variation pattern determination table (information for specifying the variation pattern determination table) are associated with each reach mode random number. .. As a result, the variation mode number (type of variation mode) and the variation pattern determination table are simultaneously selected based on each variation mode determination table.
In the pre-selection variation mode determination, first, the reach group number determined by the pre-reach group determination is confirmed, and the defeated variation mode determination table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out.
Then, the variation mode number (type of variation mode) and the variation pattern determination table are determined based on the reach mode random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read-out variable mode determination table at the time of defeat.

In the pre-selection variation pattern determination, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a variation pattern determination table in which the correspondence between the variation pattern random number and the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is registered.
Further, as the variation pattern determination table, a plurality of variation pattern determination tables having different contents are stored.
In the pre-decision pre-variation pattern determination, first, the variation pattern determination table determined by the defeat pre-variation mode determination is read out.
Then, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read variation pattern determination table.

On the other hand, in the pre-winning pre-special figure variation mode determination process, first, the pre-winning pre-variation mode determination is executed.
In the pre-winning variable mode determination, the variable mode number (type of variable mode) is determined.
In the winning pre-variation mode determination, first, the winning variation mode determination table is read.
Then, the variation mode number (type of variation mode) and the variation pattern determination table are determined based on the reach mode random number included in the game information to be determined in advance and the read out variation mode determination table at the time of winning.

In the pre-winning special figure variation mode determination process, next, the pre-winning pre-variation pattern determination is executed.
In the pre-winning variation pattern determination, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined.
In the winning pre-variation pattern determination, first, the variation pattern determination table determined by the winning pre-variation mode determination is read out.
Then, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read variation pattern determination table.

In the pre-determination process, next, the second and third look-ahead designation command setting processes are executed.
In the second and third look-ahead designation command setting processing, if it is determined to be "missing" (lost) by the pre-special figure hit judgment and "fixed value" is judged by the pre-random number type judgment, it is prior to the time of losing. A subcommand output request for the RAM 230 is a second look-ahead specification command that specifies the variation mode number determined by the variation mode determination, and a third look-ahead specification command that specifies the variation pattern number determined by the pre-selection variation pattern determination at the time of defeat. Store in the buffer.
On the other hand, if it is determined to be "missing" (lost) by the preliminary special figure hit determination and "indefinite value" is determined by the advance random number type determination, the second look-ahead specification command for specifying the "indefinite value" is used. , A third look-ahead specification command that specifies an "indefinite value" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
On the other hand, when it is determined as "big hit" (winning) by the pre-special figure hit judgment, the second look-ahead designation command for specifying the variation mode number determined by the pre-winning pre-variation mode determination and the pre-winning pre-variation pattern The third look-ahead designation command for designating the variation pattern number determined by the determination is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

As described above, when the value of the reach group random number included in the pre-determination target game information is a "fixed value", the variation mode number and the variation pattern number are determined, and the determined variation mode number and the variation pattern number are specified. The second and third look-ahead designation commands are transmitted to the effect control board 300.
On the other hand, when the value of the reach group random number included in the pre-determination target game information is an "indefinite value", the variation mode number and the variation pattern number are not determined, and the "indefinite value" is specified. The look-ahead designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 300.

(Special game management process)
Next, the special game management process of step S4-13 will be described.
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a special game management process.
In the present embodiment, as the phase / stage (hereinafter referred to as "special game phase") of the game (hereinafter referred to as "special game") executed based on the special symbol lottery, "special figure change waiting state", "Special figure changing state", "Special figure stop symbol display state", "Large winning opening opening state", "Large winning opening opening control state", "Large winning opening closing enabled state" and "Large winning opening opening end" Seven "wait states" are specified.
Then, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to one of the seven special game phases (special game phase flag) is set.
Further, the ROM 220 stores a special game control module corresponding to each special game phase as a special game control module (program) for controlling (executing) the special game.
Then, in the special game management process, the special game control module corresponding to the value set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and the process based on the selected special game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the special game management process is executed in step S4-13, first, as shown in FIG. 19, the process proceeds to step S10-1.
In step S10-1, the special game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-2. In the special game phase acquisition process, the value (special game phase) set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S10-2, the special game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-3. In the special game control module acquisition process, the special game control module corresponding to the value (special game phase) acquired in step S10-1 is read out.
In step S10-3, the special game control module execution process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game control module execution process, the process based on the special game control module read out in step S10-2 is started.
Specifically, when the value acquired in step S10-1 is a value corresponding to the "special figure change waiting state", the special figure change waiting process described later is started, and the "special figure changing state" is started. If the value corresponds to, the special figure change processing described later is started, and if the value corresponds to the "special figure stop symbol display state", the special figure stop processing described later is started. If it is a value corresponding to the "large winning opening opening state", the large winning opening pre-opening process described later is started, and if it is a value corresponding to the "large winning opening opening control state", it will be described later. When the large winning opening opening control process is started and the value corresponds to the "large winning opening closing valid state", the large winning opening closing valid processing described later is started and the "large winning opening opening end wait state" is set. If it is a corresponding value, the large winning opening opening end wait process, which will be described later, is started.

(Special figure change waiting process)
Next, the special figure change waiting process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a special figure change waiting process.
When the special figure change waiting process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 20, first, the process proceeds to step S11-1.
In step S11-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is "1" or more, and when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is not "1" or more (No). Goes to step S11-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is "1" or more (Yes), it goes to step S11-3.
In step S11-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 hold number counter is "1" or more, and it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 hold number counter is "1" or more (Yes). In, the process proceeds to step S11-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 hold number counter is not “1” or more (No), the process proceeds to step S11-16.

In step S11-3, the special figure hold number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-4. In the special figure hold number update process, the special figure hold number (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number) is updated.
Specifically, in the special figure hold number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is "1" or more.
When the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is "1" or more, a value for designating a game based on the special figure 2 game information ("1" in this embodiment) is set as the special symbol discrimination flag setting value. At the same time as setting, "1" is subtracted from the value of the special figure 2 hold count counter.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is not "1" or more (the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is "0"), the special figure 1 game information is set as the special symbol discrimination flag setting value. A value (“0” in this embodiment) for designating the game based on the above is set, and “1” is subtracted from the value of the special figure 1 hold number counter.
In step S11-4, the hold number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-5. In the hold number designation command setting process, the hold number designation command that specifies that the special figure hold number has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Specifically, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "1", the hold number specification command for specifying that the special figure 2 hold number has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
On the other hand, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "0", the hold number specification command for specifying that the special figure 1 hold number has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S11-5, the special symbol storage area shift process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-6. In the special symbol storage area shift process, the storage area in which the game information is stored is shifted.
Specifically, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "1", the storage content of the storage area 1 of the special figure 2 game information storage area is shifted (moved) to the storage area 0. Next, the storage content of the storage area 2 of the special figure 2 game information storage area is shifted to the storage area 1 of the special figure 2 game information storage area. Next, the storage content of the storage area 3 of the special figure 2 game information storage area is shifted to the storage area 2 of the special figure 2 game information storage area. Next, the storage content of the storage area 4 of the special figure 2 game information storage area is shifted to the storage area 3 of the special figure 2 game information storage area. Next, the stored contents of the storage area 4 of the special figure 2 game information storage area are cleared (initialized).
On the other hand, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "0", the stored contents of the storage area 1 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are shifted (moved) to the storage area 0. Next, the storage content of the storage area 2 of the special figure 1 game information storage area is shifted to the storage area 1 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Next, the storage content of the storage area 3 of the special figure 1 game information storage area is shifted to the storage area 2 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Next, the storage content of the storage area 4 of the special figure 1 game information storage area is shifted to the storage area 3 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Next, the stored contents of the storage area 4 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are cleared (initialized).

In step S11-6, the setting abnormality determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-7. In the setting abnormality judgment processing, the occurrence of the setting abnormality is monitored.
Specifically, in the setting abnormality determination process, first, the set value stored in the set value area of the RAM 230 is acquired. Next, it is determined whether or not the acquired set value is less than a predetermined setting comparison value (“6” in this embodiment).
Then, when it is determined that the acquired setting value is not less than the predetermined setting comparison value (or more than the predetermined setting comparison value), the value in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 (gaming machine status flag) is set to the setting abnormal state. Save the corresponding value. Also, the subcommand that specifies the occurrence of the setting error is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (step S11-7).
On the other hand, if it is determined that the acquired set value is less than the predetermined set comparison value, the process proceeds to the next process (step S11-7).

In step S11-7, the special figure hit determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-8. In the special symbol hit determination process, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined (special symbol hit determination).
In the special figure hit determination process, first, the set value stored in the set value area of the RAM 230 and the current gaming state (“special figure high probability state” or “special figure low probability state”) are confirmed. , Read the special figure winning lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result.
Then, based on the big hit random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read special figure winning lottery table, it is determined whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is "big hit" (special). Judgment of hitting the figure).
Specifically, when the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 matches the jackpot value registered in the read special figure winning lottery table, the special symbol lottery is performed. The result of is judged as "big hit" (winning).
On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 does not match the jackpot value registered in the read special figure winning lottery table (when it matches the outlier value). ), The result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be "outlier" (lost).

In step S11-8, the special symbol symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-9. In the special symbol determination process, the type of the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined (special symbol determination).
Specifically, in the special symbol symbol determination process, first, it is determined whether or not a "big hit" (winning) is determined by the special symbol hit determination.
Then, when it is determined as "big hit" (winning) by the special figure hit determination, the type of "big hit symbol" is determined.
For this, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "0", the first big hit symbol lottery table is read out. Then, the type of the jackpot symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read first jackpot symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "1", the second big hit symbol lottery table is read out. Then, the type of the jackpot symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the second jackpot symbol lottery table read out.
On the other hand, when it is determined to be "missing" (lost) by the special symbol hit determination, "missing symbol" is determined as the type of the stopped symbol.
Next, the value corresponding to the type of the determined stop symbol is set in the special symbol determination flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S11-9, the symbol type designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-10. In the symbol type specification command setting process, the symbol type specification command for specifying the type of the stopped symbol determined in step S11-8 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S11-10, the special figure stop symbol number determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-11. In the special symbol stop symbol number determination process, the stop symbol number of the special symbol is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a stop symbol number lottery table in which the correspondence between the value of the winning symbol random number and the stop symbol number (seg data) is registered.
In addition, as a stop symbol number lottery table, a stop symbol number lottery table corresponding to the case where a special symbol lottery (1st special symbol lottery or 2nd special symbol lottery) is won, and a special symbol lottery (1st special symbol lottery) Or, a symbol number lottery table that is stopped at the time of defeat, which corresponds to the case of losing the second special symbol lottery), is stored.
Further, as the winning symbol number lottery table, a winning stop symbol number lottery table corresponding to the first special symbol lottery and a winning stop symbol number lottery table corresponding to the second special symbol lottery are stored. ..
In the special figure stop symbol number determination process, first, the result of the special figure hit determination is confirmed.
Then, when it is determined as "big hit" (winning) by the special symbol hit determination, the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is confirmed, and the winning stop symbol number lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read-out stop symbol number lottery table at the time of winning.
On the other hand, if it is determined to be "missing" (lost) by the special figure hit judgment, the stop symbol number lottery table at the time of losing is read out. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read-out stop symbol number lottery table at the time of defeat.
Next, the determined stop symbol number is stored in the stop symbol number storage area of the RAM 230.

In step S11-11, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-12. In the special figure variation pattern determination process, the variation mode (type of variation mode and type of variation pattern) of the special symbol is determined.
Specifically, in the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process, first, the result of the special figure hit determination is confirmed. Then, when the result of the special figure hit determination is "missing" (lost), the special figure variation state determination process at the time of defeat, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, when the result of the special figure hit determination is "big hit" (winning), the special figure variation mode determination process at the time of winning, which will be described later, is executed.

In the special map change mode determination process at the time of defeat, first, the reach group determination is executed.
In the reach group determination, the reach group number (type of reach group) is determined.
In the reach group determination, first, the hold type (type of game information stored in the storage area 0 (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), the number of holds, and the game state are confirmed. Read the reach group judgment table corresponding to this confirmation result.
Then, the type of the reach group is determined based on the reach group random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read reach group determination table.
In the defeated special figure change mode determination process, next, the defeated variation mode determination is executed.
In the variable mode determination at the time of defeat, the variable mode number (type of variable mode) and the variable pattern determination table are determined.
In the defeated variation mode determination, first, the reach group number determined by the reach group determination is confirmed, and the defeated variation mode determination table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read-out variable mode determination table at the time of defeat, the variable mode number (type of variable mode) and the variable pattern determination table , Is determined.
In the special figure change mode determination process at the time of defeat, next, the variation pattern determination at the time of defeat is executed.
In the variation pattern determination at the time of defeat, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined.
In the defeated variation pattern determination, first, the variation pattern determination table determined by the defeated variation mode determination is read out.
Then, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read variation pattern determination table.

On the other hand, in the winning special figure variation mode determination process, first, the winning variation mode determination is executed.
In the winning variation mode determination, the variation mode number (variation mode type) and the variation pattern table are determined.
In the winning variation mode determination, first, the winning variation mode determination table is read out.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0, the read-out winning variation mode determination table, the variation mode number (type of variation mode), and the variation pattern determination table. , Is determined.
In the winning special figure variation mode determination process, next, the winning variation pattern determination is executed.
In the winning variation pattern determination, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined.
In the winning variation pattern determination, first, the variation pattern determination table determined by the winning variation mode determination is read out.
Then, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read variation pattern determination table.

In step S11-12, the variation pattern command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-13. In the variation pattern command setting process, the variation mode specification command for specifying the variation mode number (variation mode type) determined in step S11-11 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
Further, the variation pattern specification command for specifying the variation pattern number (variation pattern type) determined in step S11-11 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S11-13, the special figure fluctuation time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-14. In the special figure fluctuation time setting process, the time for displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol is set.
Specifically, in the special figure fluctuation time setting process, first, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation mode number determined in step S11-11 (hereinafter referred to as “variation time 1”) is acquired.
Further, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern number determined in step S11-11 (hereinafter referred to as “variation time 2”) is acquired.
Then, the total time of the acquired fluctuation time 1 and the fluctuation time 2 is calculated, and the calculated total time is set in the special game timer.

In step S11-14, the special figure variation display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-15. In the special figure variation display data setting process, data for controlling the variation display of the special figure display device is set.
Specifically, in the special figure variation display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the special figure display timer.
Next, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "0", a predetermined initial value is set in the special symbol 1 display symbol counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 1 display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter is controlled to be lit.
On the other hand, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "1", a predetermined initial value is set in the special symbol 2 display symbol counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 2 display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter is controlled to be lit.

In step S11-15, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special figure changing state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S11-16, the customer waiting setting process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the customer waiting setting process, the demo designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

(Processing during special figure change)
Next, the process during special figure change executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the processing during the change of the special figure.
When the special figure changing process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 21, first, the process proceeds to step S12-1.
In step S12-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S12-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S12-4.
In step S12-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure display timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special figure display timer is "0" (Yes), step S12-. When the process proceeds to 3 and it is determined that the value of the special figure display timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S12-3, the special figure variation display data update process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special figure variation display data update process, the data for controlling the variation display of the special figure display device is updated.
Specifically, in the special figure variation display data update process, when the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed, "1" is added to the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, "1" is added to the value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter.

In step S12-4, the special figure stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-5. In the special figure stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the special figure display device is set.
Specifically, in the special symbol stop display data setting process, the stop symbol number stored in the stop symbol number storage area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Next, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "0", the acquired stop symbol number (data corresponding to the stop symbol number) is set as the value of the special symbol 1 display symbol counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 1 display device, the segment corresponding to the set stop symbol number is controlled to be lit (stop display).
On the other hand, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "1", the acquired stop symbol number (data corresponding to the stop symbol number) is set as the value of the special symbol 2 display symbol counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 2 display device, the segment corresponding to the set stop symbol number is controlled to be lit (stop display).

In step S12-5, the special figure stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-6. In the special figure stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the special game timer.
In step S12-6, the stop designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-7. In the stop specification command setting process, the stop specification command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Further, a predetermined number (1 [times] in this embodiment) is added to the value of the fixed number counter for external information.
In step S12-7, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special figure stop symbol display state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Processing while the special figure is stopped)
Next, the special figure stopped processing executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the processing during the stop of the special figure.
When the special figure stop processing is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 22, first, the process proceeds to step S13-1.
In step S13-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), step S13-2 is performed. When the transition is made and it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S13-2, it is determined whether or not the type of the stop symbol is "big hit symbol", and if it is determined that the type of the stop symbol is not "big hit symbol" (No), the process proceeds to step S13-3. If it is determined that the type of the stop symbol is "big hit symbol" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-6.
In step S13-3, it is determined whether or not the time saving control is being executed, and if it is determined that the time saving control is being executed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-4 and the time saving control is being executed. If it is determined that this is not the case (No), the process proceeds to step S13-5.
Here, in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230, if "1" is set, it is determined that the time saving control is being executed, and if "0" is set, the time saving control is executed. Judge that it is not inside.

In step S13-4, the time saving control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-5. In the time saving control management process, it is determined whether or not the time saving control is terminated.
Specifically, in the time saving control management process, first, a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value of the time saving counter is newly set as the value of the time saving counter.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "0".
Then, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter is "0", "0" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 (the time saving control is stopped).
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter is not "0", the state in which "1" is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230 is maintained (the state in which the time reduction control is executed is maintained).
In step S13-5, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special figure change waiting state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S13-6, the game state update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-7. In the game state update process, the game state is updated.
Specifically, in the game state update process, "0" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area of the RAM 230. Further, "0" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S13-7, the special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-8. In the special electric accessory control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening / closing of the special electric accessory 53a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a special electric service control table corresponding to each type of "big hit symbol". Then, in each special electric service control table, the large winning opening closing effective time, the large winning opening closing time, the number of round games, the number of opening / closing switching corresponding to each round game, and the control data (solenoid) corresponding to each opening / closing switching are displayed. Control data, control time data), etc. are specified.
In the special electric service control data setting process, the special electric service control table corresponding to the type of the "big hit symbol" determined in step S11-8 is read, and the read special electric service control table is used as the special electric service control table of the RAM 230. Set in the area.
Next, "0" is set in the special electric service continuous operation count counter.

In step S13-8, the opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-9. In the opening time setting process, a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer with reference to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S13-9, the opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-10. In the opening designation command setting process, the opening designation command for specifying the type of the "big hit symbol" determined in step S11-8 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Further, a predetermined number (1 [times] in this embodiment) is added to the value of the jackpot count counter for external information.
In step S13-10, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the big winning opening" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Pre-processing for opening the big prize opening)
Next, the large winning opening pre-opening process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening.
When the large winning opening pre-opening process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 23, first, the process proceeds to step S14-1.
In step S14-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), step S14-2 is performed. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S14-2, the special electric service continuous operation number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-3. In the special electric service continuous operation number counter update process, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the special electric service continuous operation number counter is newly set in the special electric service continuous operation number counter.
In step S14-3, the round start designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-4. In the round start specification command setting process, the round start specification command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S14-4, the special electric service opening / closing switching number setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-5. In the special electric service open / close switching count setting process, the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the open / close switch count corresponding to the value of the special electric service continuous operation count counter is read out. .. Then, the read open / close switching count is set in the special electric service open / close switching counter.
Next, "0" is set as the value of the special electric service winning number counter.
In step S14-5, the special electric service opening / closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-6. The special electric service opening / closing switching process will be described later.
In step S14-6, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "large winning opening open control state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Special electric service opening / closing switching process)
Next, the special electric function opening / closing switching process in steps S14-5 and S16-3 will be described.
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a special electric service opening / closing switching process.
When the special electric service opening / closing switching process is executed in steps S14-5 and S16-3, as shown in FIG. 24, first, the process proceeds to step S15-1.
In step S15-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric combination opening / closing switching number counter is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special electric combination opening / closing switching number counter is not "0" (No). Moves to step S15-2, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric function open / close switching count counter is "0" (Yes), a series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S14-6) is completed. Or move to S16-4).

In step S15-2, the special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-3. In the special electric accessory control data setting process, control data for controlling the special electric accessory 53a to the open state or the closed state is set.
Specifically, in the special electric service control data setting process, the solenoid corresponding to the value of the special electric service open / close switching count counter is referred to by referring to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Read control data. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data for designating energization or energization stop) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the control of the special electric accessory solenoid 65 based on the set solenoid data is started, and the special electric accessory 53a is controlled to the open state or the closed state.

In step S15-3, the special electric service control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-4. In the special electric service control time setting process, the control time for continuing the control based on the solenoid control data set in step S15-2 is set.
Specifically, in the special electric service control time setting process, the control corresponding to the value of the special electric service open / close switching count counter is referred to by referring to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Read the time. Then, the read control time is set in the special game timer.
In step S15-4, the special electric service open / close switching count counter update process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S14-6 or S16-4). In the special electric service opening / closing switching counter update process, a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the special electric service opening / closing switching counter is newly set in the special electric service opening / closing switching counter.

(Large winning opening control process)
Next, the large winning opening opening control process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a large winning opening opening control process.
When the large winning opening opening control process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 25, first, the process proceeds to step S16-1.
In step S16-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), step S16-2 is performed. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S16-4.
In step S16-2, when it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric combination opening / closing switching number counter is "0" and it is determined that the value of the special electric combination opening / closing switching number counter is not "0" (No). Goes to step S16-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service open / close switching count counter is "0" (Yes), it goes to step S16-5.
In step S16-3, the special electric service opening / closing switching process (see FIG. 24) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-4.
In step S16-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (10 [balls] in this embodiment), and the value of the special electric service winning number counter is predetermined. When it is determined that the upper limit value of is reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-5, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service winning number counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No). Ends a series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).

In step S16-5, the large winning opening control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-6. In the large winning opening control end process, the solenoid control data that specifies the stop of energization is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the special electric accessory 53a is controlled to be in the closed state.
In step S16-6, the large winning opening closing valid time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-7. In the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230, the special electric power control table is referred to in the special electric power control table area of the RAM 230, and a predetermined special electric power control table is set to a predetermined special electric power control effective time (interval time) in the special game timer. Set to.
In step S16-7, the round end designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-8. In the round end specification command setting process, the round end specification command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S16-8, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "large winning opening closed valid state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Effective processing to close the winning opening)
Next, the large winning opening closing effective processing executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a large winning opening closing effective process.
When the large winning opening closure valid process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 26, first, the process proceeds to step S17-1.
In step S17-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), step S17-2 is performed. When the transition is made and it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).

In step S17-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service continuous operation count counter has reached the specified value, and it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has not reached the specified value (No). ), The process proceeds to step S17-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has reached the specified value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S17-5.
Here, with reference to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230, the number of round games specified in the special electric service control table is acquired as a specified value and a determination is made. ..
In step S17-3, the large winning opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-4. In the big winning opening closing time setting process, a predetermined big winning opening closing time is set in the special game timer with reference to the special electric combination control table set in the special electric combination control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S17-4, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the big winning opening" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S17-5, the ending time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-6. In the ending time setting process, a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer with reference to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S17-6, the ending designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-7. In the ending specification command setting process, the ending specification command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S17-7, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "large winning opening opening end wait state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Waiting for the end of opening the big prize opening)
Next, the large winning opening opening end wait process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the large winning opening opening end wait process.
When the large winning opening opening end wait process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 27, first, the process proceeds to step S18-1.
In step S18-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), step S18-2 is performed. When the transition is made and it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).

In step S18-2, the game state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S18-3. In the game state setting process, the game state is set.
Specifically, in the game state setting process, the value of the special figure high probability state flag of the RAM 230 is set according to the type of the stop symbol (big hit symbol).
At this time, when the type of the stop symbol is "big hit 1 symbol" or "big hit 3 symbol" to "big hit 5 symbol", "1" is set in the special symbol high probability state flag area of the RAM 230. On the other hand, when the type of the stop symbol is "big hit 2 symbols" or "big hit 6 symbols", "0" is set in the special symbol high probability state flag area of the RAM 230.
Next, the predetermined number of time reductions is set in the time reduction counter. At this time, when the type of the stop symbol is "big hit 2 symbols" or "big hit 6 symbols", 100 [times] is set as the predetermined number of time reductions. On the other hand, when the type of the stop symbol is "big hit 1 symbol" or "big hit 3 symbol" to "big hit 5 symbol", 10000 [times] is set as a predetermined number of time reductions. Further, "1" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230.
Next, a value corresponding to the type of the jackpot symbol is set in the previous jackpot symbol flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S18-3, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special figure change waiting state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Ordinary game management process)
Next, the normal game management process of step S4-14 will be described.
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a normal game management process.
Here, in the present embodiment, as the phase / stage (hereinafter referred to as "ordinary game phase") of the game (hereinafter referred to as "ordinary game") executed based on the ordinary symbol lottery, "waiting for fluctuation of the ordinary figure". "State", "Public figure changing state", "Public map stop symbol display state", "Public map electric accessory opening pre-opening state", "Public map electric accessory opening control state", "Public map electric accessory closing effective state" Seven states are specified: "state" and "wait state for opening end of electric accessory".
Then, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to one of the seven normal game phases (normal game phase flag) is set.
Further, the ROM 220 stores a normal game control module corresponding to each normal game phase as a normal game control module (program) for controlling (executing) the normal game.
Then, in the normal game management process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and the process based on the selected normal game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the normal game management process is executed in step S4-14, first, as shown in FIG. 28, the process proceeds to step S19-1.
In step S19-1, the normal game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-2. In the normal game phase acquisition process, the value (normal game phase) set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S19-2, the normal game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-3. In the normal game control module acquisition process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value (normal game phase) acquired in step S19-1 is read out.

In step S19-3, the normal game control module execution process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game control module execution process, the process based on the normal game control module read out in step S19-2 is started.
Specifically, when the value acquired in step S19-1 is a value corresponding to the "normal map fluctuation waiting state", the normal map fluctuation waiting process described later is started and corresponds to the "normal map changing state". If it is a value, the process during fluctuation of the normal map, which will be described later, is started, and if it is a value corresponding to the "display state of the stop symbol of the normal map", the process during stop of the normal map, which will be described later, is started, and "before opening the normal electric accessory". When the value corresponds to the "state", the pre-opening process for the ordinary electric accessory described later is started, and when the value corresponds to the "normal electric accessory opening control state", the ordinary electric accessory opening control process described later is performed. When it is started and the value corresponds to the "normal electric accessory closing effective state", when the value corresponds to the "ordinary electric accessory closing end wait state" when the ordinary electric accessory closing effective processing described later is started. , The normal electric accessory opening end wait process, which will be described later, is started.

(Waiting for fluctuations in the general map)
Next, the normal map fluctuation waiting process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the normal map fluctuation waiting process.
When the normal map fluctuation waiting process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 29, first, the process proceeds to step S20-1.
In step S20-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal figure hold number counter is "1" or more, and when it is determined that the value of the normal figure hold number counter is "1" or more (Yes). If it is determined in step S20-2 that the value of the normal figure hold count counter is not "1" or more (No), a series of processes are terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). do.

In step S20-2, the process of updating the number of reserved numbers is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-3. In the normal figure hold number update process, the normal figure hold number is updated.
Specifically, in the normal figure hold number update process, first, "1" is subtracted from the value of the normal figure hold number counter.
Next, the storage area where the Fuzu game information is stored is shifted. Specifically, the stored contents of the storage area 1 of the normal map game information storage area are shifted (moved) to the storage area 0. Next, the storage content of the storage area 2 of the Fuzu game information storage area is shifted to the storage area 1 of the Fuzu game information storage area. Next, the storage content of the storage area 3 of the Fuzu game information storage area is shifted to the storage area 2 of the Fuzu game information storage area. Next, the storage content of the storage area 4 of the Fuzu game information storage area is shifted to the storage area 3 of the Fuzu game information storage area. Next, the stored contents of the storage area 4 of the Fuzu game information storage area are cleared (initialized).

In step S20-3, the normal figure winning determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-4. In the normal figure winning judgment process, the result of the normal symbol lottery is judged (normal figure winning judgment).
In the ROM 220, a common figure winning lottery table in which the winning price of the ordinary symbol lottery is registered is stored. Further, as the normal figure winning lottery table, a normal drawing winning lottery table corresponding to the execution of the time saving control and a normal drawing winning lottery table corresponding to the time saving control being stopped are stored.
In the normal drawing winning lottery table corresponding to the time saving control being stopped, the winning value is registered so that the winning probability becomes the first probability (1/99 in this embodiment). On the other hand, in the normal drawing winning lottery table corresponding to the execution of the time saving control, the winning value is registered so that the winning probability becomes the second probability (1/1 in this embodiment) higher than the first probability. ing.
Then, in the normal figure winning determination process, the winning random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0, the normal drawing winning lottery table corresponding to the current execution status (execution or stop) of the time saving control, and the normal figure winning lottery table. Based on, the normal figure winning judgment is executed.
Specifically, when the value of the winning random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 matches the winning value, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined to be "winning" (winning).
On the other hand, when the value of the winning random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 does not match the winning value, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined to be "missing" (lost).

In step S20-4, the normal figure stop symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-5. In the normal symbol stop symbol determination process, the type (stop symbol number) of the normal symbol stop symbol is determined (normal symbol stop symbol determination).
Specifically, in the normal symbol stop symbol determination process, when it is determined as "hit" (winning) by the normal symbol winning judgment, "normal symbol hit symbol" is used as the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number). judge.
On the other hand, when it is determined to be "missing" (lost) by the normal symbol winning determination, "missing symbol" is determined as the type of stopped symbol (stop symbol number).
Next, the determined type of stop symbol (stop symbol number) is stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230.
In step S20-5, the normal map fluctuation pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-6. In the normal map fluctuation pattern determination process, the type (variation pattern number) of the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined (normal map fluctuation pattern determination).
Specifically, in the normal map fluctuation pattern determination process, when the time saving control is stopped, the first type (2.0 in this embodiment) is used as the normal map fluctuation pattern type (variation pattern number). The type corresponding to the fluctuation time of [s]) is determined.
On the other hand, when the time reduction control is being executed, the second type (in the present embodiment, the type corresponding to the fluctuation time of 0.5 [s]) is used as the type (variation pattern number) of the normal map fluctuation pattern. To judge.

In step S20-6, the normal map fluctuation time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-7. In the normal map fluctuation time setting process, the fluctuation time corresponding to the type (variation pattern number) of the normal map fluctuation pattern determined in step S20-6 is acquired. Then, the acquired fluctuation time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S20-7, the normal map variation display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-8. In the normal map fluctuation display data setting process, data for controlling the fluctuation display of the normal map display device is set.
Specifically, in the normal map variation display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the normal map display timer.
Next, a predetermined initial value is set in the normal figure display symbol counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the normal map display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the normal map display symbol counter is controlled to be lit.
Next, predetermined seg data is set as the seg data corresponding to the normal map display device. As a result, of the predetermined number of segments constituting the normal map display device, the segment corresponding to the set seg data is controlled to be lit.
In step S20-8, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal game phase changing state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Processing during fluctuation of normal map)
Next, the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map.
When the normal-figure changing process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 30, first, the process proceeds to step S21-1.
In step S21-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S21-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S21-4.
In step S21-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal map display timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal figure display timer is "0" (Yes), step S21-. When the process proceeds to 3 and it is determined that the value of the normal map display timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S21-3, the normal map variation display data update process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal map fluctuation display data update process, the data for controlling the fluctuation display of the normal map display device is updated.
Specifically, in the normal map fluctuation display data update process, "1" is added to the value of the normal map display symbol counter.

In step S21-4, the normal figure stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-5. In the normal map stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the normal map display device is set.
Specifically, in the normal symbol stop display data setting process, the stop symbol number stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Next, the acquired stop symbol number is set as the value of the normal symbol display symbol counter. As a result, of the predetermined number of segments constituting the normal map display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the normal map display symbol counter is controlled to be lit (stop display).
In step S21-5, the normal figure stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-6. In the normal figure stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S21-6, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal map stop symbol display state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Processing while the normal drawing is stopped)
Next, the process of stopping the normal drawing executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the process of stopping the normal drawing.
When the normal-figure stopped processing is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 31, first, the process proceeds to step S22-1.
In step S22-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), step S22-2 is performed. When the transition is made and it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S22-2, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol is a "normal symbol hit symbol", and if it is determined that the stop symbol is not a "normal symbol hit symbol" (No), the process proceeds to step S22-3. If it is determined that the stopped symbol is a "normal symbol" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S22-4.
In step S22-3, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal game phase fluctuation waiting state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S22-4, the normal electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-5. In the ordinary electric accessory control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening / closing of the ordinary electric accessory 52a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a normal electric service control table corresponding to the execution status (execution or stop) of the time saving control. Then, in each normal electric service control table, the time before the normal electric service is opened, the normal electric service closing effective time, the opening end wait time, the number of times of opening / closing switching, and the control data corresponding to each opening / closing switching (solenoid control data, control time). Data) etc. are specified.
In the normal electric service control data setting process, the normal electric service control table corresponding to the execution status (execution or stop) of the time saving control is read, and the read normal electric service control table is stored in the normal electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Set.
Next, the number of open / close switching is read with reference to the ordinary electric service control table set in the ordinary electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Then, the read open / close switching count is set in the normal electric service open / close switching counter. In addition, "0" is set as the value of the ordinary electric service winning number counter.

In step S22-5, the time setting process before opening the normal electric service is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-6. In the normal electric service opening time setting process, a predetermined normal electric service pre-opening time is set in the normal game timer with reference to the normal electric service control table set in the normal electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S22-6, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory before opening state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Ordinary electric accessory pre-opening treatment)
Next, the ordinary electric accessory opening pre-processing executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process of the ordinary electric accessory.
When the normal electric accessory opening pre-processing is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 32, first, the process proceeds to step S23-1.
In step S23-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), step S23-2 is performed. When the transition is made and it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S23-2, the normal electric service opening / closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S23-3. The normal electric service opening / closing switching process will be described later.
In step S23-3, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory release control state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Ordinary electric service opening / closing switching process)
Next, the normal electric function opening / closing switching process in steps S23-2 and S25-3 will be described.
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a normal electric service opening / closing switching process.
When the normal electric service opening / closing switching process is executed in steps S23-2 and S25-3, as shown in FIG. 33, first, the process proceeds to step S24-1.
In step S24-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal electric service open / close switching count counter is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal electric service open / close switch count counter is not "0" (No). Moves to step S24-2, and when it is determined that the value of the normal electric service open / close switching count counter is "0" (Yes), a series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S23-3) is completed. Or move to S25-4).
In step S24-2, the normal electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-3. In the ordinary electric accessory control data setting process, control data for controlling the ordinary electric accessory 52a to the open state or the closed state is set.
Specifically, in the normal electric service control data setting process, the solenoid corresponding to the value of the normal electric service open / close switching count counter is referred to by referring to the normal electric service control table set in the normal electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Read control data. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data for designating energization or energization stop) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the control of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 64 based on the set solenoid data is started, and the ordinary electric accessory 52a is controlled to the open state or the closed state.

In step S24-3, the normal electric service control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-4. In the normal electric service control time setting process, the control time for continuing the control based on the solenoid control data set in step S24-2 is set.
Specifically, in the normal electric service control time setting process, the control corresponding to the value of the normal electric service open / close switching count counter is referred to by referring to the normal electric service control table set in the normal electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Read the time. Then, the read control time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S24-4, the normal electric service open / close switching number counter update process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S23-3 or S25-4). In the normal electric service open / close switching count counter update process, a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the normal electric service open / close switch count counter is newly set in the normal electric service open / close switch count counter.

(Ordinary electric accessory release control processing)
Next, the ordinary electric accessory opening control process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory opening control process.
When the ordinary electric accessory opening control process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 34, first, the process proceeds to step S25-1.
In step S25-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), step S25-2 is performed. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal electric service open / close switching count counter is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal electric service open / close switch count counter is not "0" (No). Goes to step S25-3, and if it is determined that the value of the normal electric service open / close switching count counter is "0" (Yes), it goes to step S25-5.
In step S25-3, the normal electric service opening / closing switching process (see FIG. 33) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the ordinary electric winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (3 [balls] in this embodiment), and the value of the ordinary electric winning number counter is predetermined. When it is determined that the upper limit value of is reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-5, and when it is determined that the value of the ordinary electric service winning number counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No). Ends a series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).

In step S25-5, the normal electric service release control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-6. In the normal electric service release control end process, the solenoid control data that specifies the power stop is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the normally electric accessory 52a is controlled to be in the closed state.
In step S25-6, the normal electric service closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-7. In the normal electric service closing effective time setting process, a predetermined normal electric service closing effective time is set in the normal game timer with reference to the normal electric service control table set in the normal electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S25-7, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory closed effective state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Effective processing for closing ordinary electric accessories)
Next, the normal electric accessory closing effective process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an ordinary electric accessory closing effective process.
When the normal electric accessory closing effective process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 35, first, the process proceeds to step S26-1.
In step S26-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), step S26-2 is performed. When the transition is made and it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S26-2, the opening end wait time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S26-3. In the opening end wait time setting process, a predetermined opening end wait time is set in the normal game timer with reference to the normal electric service control table set in the normal electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S26-3, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory release end wait state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Normal electric accessory opening end weight processing)
Next, the ordinary electric accessory opening end wait process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory opening end wait process.
When the normal electric accessory opening end wait process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 36, first, the process proceeds to step S27-1.
In step S27-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), step S27-2 is performed. When the transition is made and it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S27-2, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal game phase fluctuation waiting state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Performance display device control processing)
Next, the performance display device control process in step S4-25 will be described.
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the performance display device control process.
The performance display device control process is a process based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206. That is, the performance display device control process is a process based on the program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The performance display device control process is called during execution of the timer interrupt process.
When the performance display device control process is called in step S4-25, the process proceeds to step S38-1 as shown in FIG. 37.
In step S38-1, the register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-2. In the register save process, the values of all the registers used during the execution of the process based on the program stored in the used area m1 are saved in the RAM save area. In addition, the values of all the stack pointers used during the execution of the processing based on the program stored in the used area m1 are saved in the RAM save area.

In step S38-2, it is determined whether or not the game-enabled state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that the game-enabled state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-3 and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S38-11.
Here, it is determined whether or not a game-enabled state has occurred based on the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the game machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the game-enabled state, it is determined that the game-enabled state has occurred, and if the value is not the value corresponding to the game-enabled state, the game is played. It is determined that the possible state has not occurred.
In step S38-3, the total outcounter addition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-4.
In the total count counter addition process, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the out switch 109 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the out switch 109 is detected, "1" is added to the value of the total out counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state of the out switch 109 has not been detected, the value of the total out counter is not added.

In step S38-4, it is determined whether or not it is in a predetermined gaming state, and if it is determined that it is in a predetermined gaming state (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-5 and it is determined that it is not in a predetermined gaming state. If (No), the process proceeds to step S38-7.
Here, the "predetermined game state" is a game state in which the "special figure low probability state" has occurred, the time reduction control is stopped, and the big hit game state has not occurred. ..
In step S38-5, the normal out-counter addition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-6.
In the normal out counter addition process, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the out switch 109 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the out switch 109 is detected, "1" is added to the value of the normal out counter. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the out switch 109 has not been detected, the value of the out counter is not normally added.

In step S38-6, the normal prize ball counter addition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-7.
In the normal prize ball counter addition process, first, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 is detected, the number of prize balls to be paid out to the value of the normal prize ball counter according to the entry of the game ball into the first start port 51. Add "3". On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 has not been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is detected, the number of prize balls to be paid out to the value of the normal prize ball counter according to the entry of the game ball into the second start port 52. Add "1". On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 has not been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the right winning opening switch 105 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the right winning opening switch 105 is detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the entry of the game ball into the right other winning opening 54. "Is added. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the right winning opening switch 105 has not been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the left winning opening switch 106 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the left winning opening switch 106 is detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is the number of winning balls to be paid out according to the entry of the game ball into the left other winning opening 55 to 57. Add "10". On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the left winning opening switch 106 has not been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not added.

In step S38-7, it is determined whether or not the value of the total out counter has reached the reference value, and if it is determined that the value of the total out counter has reached the reference value (Yes), step S38-8. If it is determined that the value of the total out counter has not reached the reference value (No), the process proceeds to step S38-9.
In this embodiment, the reference value = 60000 × n (n = integer). Note that "n" is a value indicating the current section, and "1" is set as an initial value.
In step S38-8, the section update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-9. In the section update process, the section is updated.
In the section update process, first, the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 of the RAM 230 is shifted (moved) to the base value buffer 2 of the RAM 230.
Next, a predetermined initial value (“0” in this embodiment) is set as the value of the normal out counter. Further, a predetermined initial value (“0” in the present embodiment) is set as the value of the normal prize ball counter.
Next, "1" is added to the value (n) indicating the current interval. As a result, the reference value is updated.
In step S38-9, the base ratio calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-10. In the base ratio calculation process, the base ratio is calculated.
Specifically, in the base ratio calculation process, the base ratio is calculated based on the value of the normal out counter and the value of the normal prize ball counter. Then, the calculated base ratio is stored in the base value buffer 1 of the RAM 230.
Here, the base ratio is the ratio of the value of the normal prize ball counter to the value of the normal out counter.

In step S38-10, the base ratio display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-11. In the base ratio display data setting process, the display data to be output to the performance display device 206 is set.
The RAM 230 is provided with an identification segment output request buffer (16 bits) and a ratio segment output request buffer (16 bits).
In the base ratio display data setting process, first, which of the base ratio of the current section and the base ratio of the previous section is to be displayed is selected.
Then, when the display of the base ratio of the current section is selected, the information indicating the base ratio of the current section is set in the identification segment output request buffer, and the information indicating the base ratio of the current section is set. Set in the ratio segment output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "b" is set in the upper 8 bits of the identification seg output request buffer, and the display data (8 bits) of "b" is set in the lower 8 bits of the identification seg output request buffer. The display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 is set in the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer, and the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 is set to. The display data corresponding to the ones digit is set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer.
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the character "b" is displayed by the LEDs 33 to LED40, the character "b" is displayed by the LEDs 41 to LED48, and the current characters "b" are displayed by the LEDs 49 to LED56. A number indicating the tens digit of the base ratio is displayed, and LEDs 57 to LED64 display a number indicating the ones digit of the current base ratio.

On the other hand, when the display of the base ratio of the previous section is selected, the information indicating the base ratio of the previous section is set in the identification segment output request buffer, and the information indicating the base ratio of the previous section is set. Set in the ratio segment output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "b" is set in the upper 8 bits of the identification seg output request buffer, and the display data (8 bits) of "c" is set in the lower 8 bits of the identification seg output request buffer. The display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 2 is set in the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer, and the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 2 is set to. The display data corresponding to the ones digit is set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer.
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the character "b" is displayed by the LEDs 33 to LED40, the character "c" is displayed by the LEDs 41 to LED48, and the current character "c" is displayed by the LEDs 49 to LED56. A number indicating the tens digit of the base ratio is displayed, and LEDs 57 to LED64 display a number indicating the ones digit of the current base ratio.

In step S38-11, the register return process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-12. In the register return processing, the value of the register saved in step S38-1 (the value of the register used during execution of the processing based on the program stored in the used area m1) and the value of the register in step S38-1. The value of the saved stack pointer (the value of the stack pointer used during the execution of the process based on the program stored in the used area m1) and the value of the stack pointer are restored.
In step S38-12, the interrupt enable process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-26). In the interrupt enable process, the interrupt disable state is canceled. As a result, execution of save processing when the power is cut off, timer interrupt processing, and the like is permitted.

(Various effects performed on pachinko machine 1)
Next, various effects executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.

(Hold display)
First, the hold display (hold effect) executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, each game information (special figure 1 game information / special figure 2 game information) stored in the game information storage area (special figure 1 game information storage area / special figure 2 game information storage area) is targeted. Hold display is executed.
The hold display is a display (effect) that suggests (notifies) that the derivation of the start determination result (completion of the stop display of the special symbol) is suspended for the game information that is the target of the hold display. ing. That is, the hold display indicates that the notification display (start determination) of the special symbol is suspended or the notification display of the special symbol is being executed for the game information that is the target of the hold display. It is a suggestive display.
In the present embodiment, as the hold display for the game information, the hold symbol h corresponding to the game information is displayed in the hold symbol display areas b1 and b2.

In the present embodiment, the hold display is executed for one of the game information of the special figure 1 game information and the special figure 2 game information, and the hold display is not executed for the other game information, depending on the game state.
Specifically, while the time reduction control is stopped, the hold display is executed for the special figure 1 game information, and the hold display is not executed for the special figure 2 game information. On the other hand, during the execution of the time reduction control, the hold display is executed for the special figure 2 game information, and the hold display is not executed for the special figure 1 game information.
That is, while the time reduction control is stopped, in the reserved symbol display area b1, the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 0 (special figure 1 game information during execution of the variable display / stop display of the special symbol) is displayed. The corresponding reserved symbol h is displayed, and in the reserved symbol display area b2, each special figure 1 game information stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area (variation display / stop display (start determination) of the special figure special symbol) is displayed. The reserved symbol h corresponding to each reserved special figure 1 game information) is displayed.
On the other hand, during the execution of the time reduction control, in the reserved symbol display area b1, the special figure 2 game information stored in the storage area 0 (the special figure 2 game information during execution of the variable display / stop display of the special symbol) is displayed. The corresponding reserved symbol h is displayed, and in the reserved symbol display area b2, each special figure 2 game information stored in the special figure 2 game information storage area (variation display / stop display (start determination) of the special figure special symbol) is displayed. The reserved symbol h corresponding to each reserved special figure 2 game information) is displayed.

In the pachinko machine 1, a background image / interface image according to the gaming state is displayed on the display screen 31a. At this time, the contents of the background image / interface image displayed while the time reduction control is stopped and the contents of the background image / interface image displayed while the time reduction control is being executed are different from each other.
The interface image is composed of five pedestal images. Each pedestal image is an image showing the pedestal of the reserved symbol h, and is an image that defines (specifies) the display position of the reserved symbol h. In the present embodiment, one reserved symbol h can be displayed above each pedestal image.
In the interface image, five pedestal images are displayed side by side at predetermined intervals along the left-right direction. Of the five pedestal images, the first pedestal image from the left is the pedestal image corresponding to the storage area 0, and the second pedestal image from the left is the pedestal image corresponding to the storage area 1, and the left. The third pedestal image from the left is the pedestal image corresponding to the storage area 2, the fourth pedestal image from the left is the pedestal image corresponding to the storage area 3, and the fifth pedestal image from the left is the storage area. It is a pedestal image corresponding to 4.

Then, at the position above the pedestal image corresponding to the storage area 0 (hereinafter referred to as “the reserved display position”), the game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) stored in the storage area 0 is used. ) Corresponds to the reserved symbol h. That is, the reserved symbol display area b1 is configured above the pedestal image corresponding to the storage area 0.
On the other hand, in the position above the pedestal image corresponding to the storage area 1 (hereinafter referred to as "holding 1 display position"), the game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) stored in the storage area 1 is used. ) Corresponds to the reserved symbol h. That is, above the pedestal image corresponding to the storage area 1, the display position of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the game information stored in the storage area 1 is configured in the reserved symbol display area b2.
On the other hand, in the position above the pedestal image corresponding to the storage area 2 (hereinafter referred to as "holding 2 display position"), the game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) stored in the storage area 2 is used. ) Corresponds to the reserved symbol h. That is, above the pedestal image corresponding to the storage area 2, the display position of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the game information stored in the storage area 2 is configured in the reserved symbol display area b2.
On the other hand, in the position above the pedestal image corresponding to the storage area 3 (hereinafter referred to as "holding 3 display position"), the game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) stored in the storage area 3 is used. ) Corresponds to the reserved symbol h. That is, above the pedestal image corresponding to the storage area 3, the display position of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the game information stored in the storage area 3 is configured in the reserved symbol display area b2.
On the other hand, in the position above the pedestal image corresponding to the storage area 4 (hereinafter referred to as "holding 4 display position"), the game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) stored in the storage area 4 is used. ) Corresponds to the reserved symbol h. That is, above the pedestal image corresponding to the storage area 4, the display position of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the game information stored in the storage area 4 is configured in the reserved symbol display area b2.
Then, while the time reduction control is stopped, the special figure 1 game information corresponds to each hold display position (the hold display position, the hold 1 display position, the hold 2 display position, the hold 3 display position, and the hold 4 display position). The hold symbol h is displayed, and during the execution of the time reduction control, the hold symbol h corresponding to the special figure 2 game information is displayed at each hold display position.

In the hold display for the special figure 1 game information, the hold symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 game information at the hold display position, the hold 1 display position, the hold 2 display position, the hold 3 display position, and the hold 4 display position. h is displayed.
That is, during the period in which the special figure 1 game information is stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the special figure 1 game information is displayed in the reserved symbol display area b2. At this time, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the special figure 1 game information is displayed at the reserved display position corresponding to the storage area (storage area 1 to the storage area 4) in which the special figure 1 game information is stored. On the other hand, during the period in which the special figure 1 game information is stored in the storage area 0, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the special figure 1 game information is displayed in the reserved symbol display area b1.
On the other hand, in the hold display for the special figure 2 game information, the special figure 2 game information corresponds to the hold display position, the hold 1 display position, the hold 2 display position, the hold 3 display position, and the hold 4 display position. The pending symbol h is displayed.
That is, during the period in which the special figure 2 game information is stored in the special figure 2 game information storage area, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the special figure 2 game information is displayed in the reserved symbol display area b2. At this time, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the special figure 2 game information is displayed at the reserved display position corresponding to the storage area (storage area 1 to the storage area 4) in which the special figure 2 game information is stored. On the other hand, during the period in which the special figure 2 game information is stored in the storage area 0, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the special figure 2 game information is displayed in the reserved symbol display area b1.

For example, various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 3 of the special figure 2 game information storage area as special figure 2 game information, and the hold display for the special figure 2 game information is executed. If so, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the special figure 2 game information is displayed at the reserved 3 display position corresponding to the storage area 3 of the reserved symbol display area b2 according to the start of the reserved display.
After that, in response to the shift of the storage area for storing the special figure 2 game information from the storage area 3 to the storage area 2, the display position of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the special figure 2 game information is stored. The hold 3 display position corresponding to the area 3 is shifted to the hold 2 display position corresponding to the storage area 2.
Further, in response to the shift of the storage area for storing the special figure 2 game information from the storage area 2 to the storage area 1, the display position of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the special figure 2 game information is stored. The hold 2 display position corresponding to the area 2 is shifted to the hold 1 display position corresponding to the storage area 1.
Further, in response to the shift of the storage area for storing the special figure 2 game information from the storage area 1 to the storage area 0, the display position of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the special figure 2 game information is stored. The hold 1 display position corresponding to the area 1 is shifted to the hold display position.
Then, in response to the end of the stop display of the special symbol based on the special figure 2 game information, the display of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the special figure 2 game information at the reserved display position is terminated, whereby the reserved display is displayed. finish.

(Synchronization of multiple pending displays)
Next, synchronization of a plurality of hold displays (hold symbol h) will be described.
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing the relationship between the frame image constituting the stay animation and the timing at which the synchronization flag is turned ON.
Here, "the synchronization flag is turned ON" means that the value stored in the synchronization flag area changes from "0" to "1".
Further, FIG. 54 shows the progress (control) of the hold display executed during the time reduction control. Even when the time reduction control is stopped, the hold display is advanced (controlled) by the same method as when the time reduction control is being executed as shown in FIG. 54.
In the pachinko machine 1, various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the special figure 2 game information storage area as the special figure 2 game information, and the special figure 2 game information is targeted. The hold display is started, and the hold display for the special figure 2 game information is terminated in accordance with the end of the notification display of the second special symbol based on the special figure 2 game information.
Each special figure 2 hold display for game information is configured by sequentially executing winning animation display, stay animation display, standby animation display, subtraction animation display, and the like.

The "winning animation display" is a display of contents that suggest (notify) the appearance of the reserved symbol h. The winning animation display is configured by playing the winning animation 1 [time].
The "winning animation" is a moving image of the content in which the reserved symbol h appears. The winning animation is composed of images (image data) for 10 frames.
As a result, when the winning animation display is executed at the hold 1 display position, the hold symbol h appears at the hold 1 display position.
On the other hand, when the winning animation display is executed at the hold 2 display position, the hold symbol h appears at the hold 2 display position.
On the other hand, when the winning animation display is executed at the hold 3 display position, the hold symbol h appears at the hold 3 display position.
On the other hand, when the winning animation display is executed at the hold 4 display position, the hold symbol h appears at the hold 4 display position.
In this embodiment, the winning animation display is not executed at the hold display position.

The "stay animation display" is a display of contents that suggest (notify) the stay (existence) of the reserved symbol h. The stay animation display is configured by loop playback (loop display) of the stay animation. The stay animation is a moving image of the content in which the reserved symbol h executes a predetermined action (hereinafter referred to as “during stay motion”).
That is, the stay animation display is configured by repeating the reproduction (display) of the stay animation at a predetermined cycle (periodically). As a result, in the stay animation display, the operation during the stay of the reserved symbol h is repeated (periodically) at a predetermined cycle.
As shown in FIG. 54 (a), the stay animation is composed of images (image data) for 30 frames. Specifically, the stay animation (operation during stay) is configured (reproduced) by sequentially displaying images (image data) corresponding to each frame for frames 1 to 30.
As a result, when the stay animation display is executed at the hold display position, the hold symbol h repeatedly executes the staying operation at the hold display position.
On the other hand, when the stay animation display is executed at the hold 1 display position, the hold symbol h repeatedly executes the stay operation at the hold 1 display position.
On the other hand, when the stay animation display is executed at the hold 2 display position, the hold symbol h repeatedly executes the stay operation at the hold 2 display position.
On the other hand, when the stay animation display is executed at the hold 3 display position, the hold symbol h repeatedly executes the stay operation at the hold 3 display position.
On the other hand, when the stay animation display is executed at the hold 4 display position, the hold symbol h repeatedly executes the stay operation at the hold 4 display position.

The "standby animation display" is a display executed during the standby state, which will be described later. The standby animation display is configured by displaying a standby image (still image). In particular, the standby image has the same content as the image of the first frame (first frame / frame 1) (hereinafter referred to as “first image”) among the images (image data) for 30 frames constituting the stay animation. It is an image. That is, in the standby animation display, the standby image (still image) is continuously displayed.
As a result, when the standby animation display is executed at the hold 1 display position, the hold symbol h is displayed in a stationary (stopped) state at the hold 1 display position.
On the other hand, when the standby animation display is executed at the hold 2 display position, the hold symbol h is displayed in a stationary (stopped) state at the hold 2 display position.
On the other hand, when the standby animation display is executed at the hold 3 display position, the hold symbol h is displayed in a stationary (stopped) state at the hold 3 display position.
On the other hand, when the standby animation display is executed at the hold 4 display position, the hold symbol h is displayed in a stationary (stopped) state at the hold 4 display position.
In this embodiment, the standby animation display is not executed at the hold display position.

The "subtraction animation display" is a display of the content that the reserved symbol h shifts (moves the reserved display position). The subtraction animation display is configured by playing the subtraction animation 1 [time]. The "subtraction animation" is a moving image of the content in which the hold symbol h moves from one hold display position to another hold display position (one higher hold display position than one hold display position). The subtraction animation is composed of images (image data) for 10 frames.
Specifically, when the subtraction animation display corresponding to the hold 4 display position is executed, the hold symbol h displayed at the hold 4 display position moves to the hold 3 display position.
On the other hand, when the subtraction animation display corresponding to the hold 3 display position is executed, the hold symbol h displayed at the hold 3 display position moves to the hold 2 display position.
On the other hand, when the subtraction animation display corresponding to the hold 2 display position is executed, the hold symbol h displayed at the hold 2 display position moves to the hold 1 display position.
On the other hand, when the subtraction animation display corresponding to the hold 1 display position is executed, the hold symbol h displayed at the hold 1 display position moves to the hold display position.

In the hold display for each special figure 2 game information, the winning animation display is always executed according to the start of the hold display. Then, after the winning animation display is completed, the process shifts to the standby animation display, the stay animation display, or the subtraction animation display depending on the situation.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, two or more of the hold display positions, the hold 1 display position, the hold 2 display position, the hold 3 display position, and the hold 4 display position are in parallel in time. , When the hold display is executed, the contents of the display (animation) are synchronized with respect to the hold display (specifically, the stay animation) executed at the two or more hold display positions.
Here, "synchronizing the contents of the display (animation)" means that the timing at which the frames are updated is the same, and the contents of the images (image data) displayed at the same time are the same. say.
As a result, when the hold display (specifically, the stay animation display) is executed in parallel in time at the two or more hold display positions, the hold symbol displayed at the two or more hold display positions is displayed. The movements during the stay of h will be synchronized with each other.
Therefore, when a plurality of hold displays are executed in parallel in a timely manner, the appearance of the plurality of hold displays can be improved, and the effect of the effect can be improved.
Hereinafter, synchronization of a plurality of pending displays will be described in detail.

In the pachinko machine 1, a new special drawing is made when the hold display is executed at at least the hold display position among the hold display position, the hold 1 display position, the hold 2 display position, and the hold 3 display position. When 2 game information is acquired, the newly acquired special figure 2 hold display for the game information is configured to be synchronized with the hold display being executed at the hold display position through the standby state. ing.
The "standby state" is a state of waiting for synchronization with respect to the hold display being executed at the hold display position (or hold 1 display position). That is, the newly acquired hold display for the special figure 2 game information is not synchronized with the hold display being executed at the hold display position (or hold 1 display position) during the standby state. ..

As described above, the stay animation is composed of images (image data) for 30 frames (frames 1 to 30). Then, in the stay animation display, the stay animation is played back in a loop. That is, in the stay animation display, the images of frames 1 to 30 constituting the stay animation are repeatedly displayed.
Further, the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300 is provided with a synchronization flag area. Then, in the synchronization flag area, of the information specifying the permission of synchronization (“1” in the present embodiment) and the information specifying the prohibition (standby) of synchronization (“0” in the present embodiment). , Any information (value) is stored (set).
Then, in the present embodiment, when the stay animation display is executed (the stay animation is loop-played) at the hold display position, during the playback of each stay animation, only one frame is used in the synchronization flag area. "1" is memorized.
That is, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), during the loop reproduction of the stay animation at the hold display position, the first image (the image of the first frame / frame 1) out of the images for 30 frames constituting the stay animation. Every time an imming to draw (display) an image) occurs, "1" is stored in the synchronization flag area, and the timing to draw (display) the image of the next frame (second frame / frame 2) of the first image. Is generated, "0" is stored in the synchronization flag area.
As a result, each time the play of the stay animation (playback from the first frame / frame 1) is started during the loop playback of the stay animation at the hold display position, only one frame is set to "1" in the synchronization flag area. Is memorized.

Further, in the present embodiment, similarly to the hold position, the first image (the image of the first frame) among the images for 30 frames constituting the stay animation during the loop reproduction of the stay animation at the hold 1 display position. Every time an imming to draw an image of frame 1 occurs, "1" is stored in the synchronization flag area, and every time a timing to draw an image of the next frame (second frame / frame 2) of the first image occurs. , "0" is stored in the synchronization flag area.
With such a configuration, even if the stay frame display is not executed at the hold display position, the newly acquired special figure 2 game information is obtained based on the stay frame display executed at the hold 1 display position. It is possible to synchronize the corresponding hold display with the hold display being executed at the hold 1 display position.
Even in such a configuration, during the execution of the stay animation display at the hold 1 display position, the stay animation display already being executed at the hold 1 display position is being executed at the hold display position. Since it is synchronized with the animation display, the timing at which the first image is drawn (displayed) for the stay animation that is loop-played at the hold display position and the lead image for the stay animation that is loop-played at the hold 1 display position It coincides with the timing of drawing (displaying). In addition, the timing at which the image of the frame next to the first image of the stay animation loop-played at the hold display position is drawn (displayed), and the stay animation loop-played at the hold 1 display position next to the first image. It coincides with the timing when the image of the frame of is drawn (displayed).
As a result, based on the timing (frame) in which "1" is stored in the synchronization flag area based on the stay animation loop-played at the hold display position, and the stay animation loop-played at the hold 1 display position. It coincides with the timing (frame) in which "1" is stored in the synchronization flag area. Further, synchronization is performed based on the timing (frame) in which "0" is stored in the synchronization flag area based on the stay animation loop-played at the hold display position and the stay animation loop-played at the hold 1 display position. It coincides with the timing (frame) in which "0" is stored in the flag area.
Therefore, there are cases where the value stored in the synchronization flag area is changed based only on the stay animation that is loop-played at the hold display position, and the stay animation and hold 1 display position that is loop-played at the hold display position. The period in which "1" is stored in the synchronization flag area does not change depending on whether the value stored in the synchronization flag area is changed based on both of the stay animations being loop-played in.
It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the value of the synchronization flag area is set (stored) based only on the stay animation that is loop-played at the hold display position.

Then, the hold display (hereinafter referred to as "advance hold display") is executed at at least the hold display position among the hold display position, the hold 1 display position, the hold 2 display position, and the hold 3 display position. When the new special figure 2 game information is acquired, the hold display (hereinafter referred to as “subsequent hold display”) for the newly acquired special figure 2 game information is started. At this time, the winning animation display is first started as the subsequent hold display.
Further, in the subsequent hold display, the standby animation display (standby state) is started according to the end of the winning animation display. Then, after the start of the standby animation display (standby state), the standby animation display (standby state) ends in response to the change in the value stored in the synchronization flag area from "0" to "1". The stay animation display starts.
As a result, when the timing at which the first image is drawn (displayed) occurs among the images for 30 frames constituting the stay animation for the advance hold display, the reproduction of the stay animation is started for the subsequent hold display. That is, for the preceding hold display, among the images for 30 frames constituting the stay animation, when the timing at which the first image is drawn (displayed) occurs, for the subsequent hold display, the images for 30 frames constituting the stay animation Of these, drawing (display) of the first image is started.
As a result, the preceding hold display (stay animation display) and the subsequent hold display (stay animation display) are synchronized with each other.

For example, as shown in FIG. 54 (c), if the winning animation display of the succeeding hold display ends during the period in which "0" is stored in the synchronization flag area, the winning animation of the succeeding hold display is performed. The standby animation display (standby state) is started according to the end of the display, and the stay animation display is started (synchronization with the preceding hold display) until the value of the synchronization flag area changes from "0" to "1". Be waiting. Then, in response to the change in the value of the synchronization flag area from "0" to "1", the waiting animation display is terminated and the stay animation display is started for the subsequent hold display (synchronized with the preceding hold display). Will be done.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 54 (d), when the timing at which the winning animation display of the subsequent hold display ends and the timing at which the value of the synchronization flag area changes from "0" to "1" coincide. , The stay animation display is started (synchronized with the preceding hold display) according to the end of the winning animation display for the subsequent hold display. In this case, the standby animation display (standby state) is not executed for the subsequent hold display.
As shown in FIG. 54 (e), when new special figure 2 game information is acquired during the period in which "1" is stored in the synchronization flag area (newly acquired special figure 2 game). Even when the winning animation display of the subsequent hold display for information is started), the timing at which the winning animation display of the subsequent hold display ends is the period during which "0" is stored in the synchronization flag area. As long as it is in the middle, the standby animation display (standby state) is started according to the end of the winning animation display for the subsequent hold display, and until the timing when the value of the synchronization flag area changes from "0" to "1". The start of the stay animation display (synchronization with the advance hold display) will be waited for.

(Control of hold display)
Next, the control of the hold display will be described.
As described above, the animation table is stored in the control ROM 302 of the effect control board 300. In particular, the animation table stored in the control ROM 302 includes a winning animation table that regulates the progress of the winning animation display, a stay animation table that regulates the progress of the stay animation display, and a standby animation that regulates the progress of the standby animation display. It contains a table and a subtraction animation table that defines the progress of the subtraction animation display.

Further, as the winning animation table, the winning animation table 1 corresponding to the hold 1 display position, the winning animation table 2 corresponding to the hold 2 display position, the winning animation table 3 corresponding to the hold 3 display position, and the hold 4 display position The winning animation table 4 corresponding to the above is included.
Frame information for 10 frames is registered in each of the winning animation tables 1 to 4 in chronological order. Then, for the frame information for 10 frames registered in each winning animation table 1 to 4, the images based on each frame information are sequentially displayed according to the registered order, thereby displaying the winning animation. Progresses.
Here, in each frame information registered in the winning animation table 1, coordinate information for designating the coordinates of the hold 1 display position is defined as the coordinate information. On the other hand, in each frame information registered in the winning animation table 2, coordinate information for designating the coordinates of the hold 2 display position is defined as the coordinate information. On the other hand, in each frame information registered in the winning animation table 3, coordinate information for designating the coordinates of the hold 3 display position is defined as the coordinate information. On the other hand, in each frame information registered in the winning animation table 4, coordinate information for designating the coordinates of the hold 4 display position is defined as the coordinate information.
As a result, when the winning animation table 1 is set in the animation table setting area described later, the winning animation display is executed at the hold 1 display position. Further, when the winning animation table 2 is set in the animation table setting area, the winning animation display is executed at the hold 2 display position. Further, when the winning animation table 3 is set in the animation table setting area, the winning animation display is executed at the hold 3 display position. Further, when the winning animation table 4 is set in the animation table setting area, the winning animation display is executed at the hold 4 display position.
Here, in all the winning animation tables 1 to 4, the image address information included in each frame information is defined so that the animation (winning animation) having the same content is executed.

Further, as the stay animation table, the stay animation table 0 corresponding to the hold display position, the stay animation table 1 corresponding to the hold 1 display position, the stay animation table 2 corresponding to the hold 2 display position, and the hold 3 display position A stay animation table 3 corresponding to the above and a stay animation table 4 corresponding to the hold 4 display position are included.
Frame information for 30 frames is registered in each stay animation table 0 to 4 in chronological order. Then, for the frame information for 30 frames registered in each stay animation table 0 to 4, the stay animation display is performed by sequentially displaying the images based on each frame information according to the registered order. Progresses.
Here, in each frame information registered in the stay animation table 0, the coordinate information for designating the coordinates of the hold display position is defined as the coordinate information. On the other hand, in each frame information registered in the stay animation table 1, coordinate information for designating the coordinates of the hold 1 display position is defined as the coordinate information. On the other hand, in each frame information registered in the stay animation table 2, coordinate information for designating the coordinates of the hold 2 display position is defined as the coordinate information. On the other hand, in each frame information registered in the stay animation table 3, coordinate information for designating the coordinates of the hold 3 display position is defined as the coordinate information. On the other hand, in each frame information registered in the stay animation table 4, coordinate information for designating the coordinates of the hold 4 display position is defined as the coordinate information.
As a result, when the stay animation table 0 is set in the animation table setting area described later, the stay animation display is executed at the hold display position. Further, when the stay animation table 1 is set in the animation table setting area described later, the stay animation display is executed at the hold 1 display position. Further, when the stay animation table 2 is set in the animation table setting area, the stay animation display is executed at the hold 2 display position. Further, when the stay animation table 3 is set in the animation table setting area, the stay animation display is executed at the hold 3 display position. Further, when the stay animation table 4 is set in the animation table setting area, the stay animation display is executed at the hold 4 display position.
Here, in all the stay animation tables 0 to 4, the image address information included in each frame information is defined so that the animation (stay animation) having the same content is executed.

In particular, among the frame information for 30 frames registered in the stay animation tables 0 and 1, the frame information corresponding to the first frame (1st frame / frame 1) is subjected to the execution of the synchronization flag setting process described later. Information to be specified (hereinafter referred to as "synchronization flag setting information") is included. Then, when the frame information includes the synchronization flag setting information, the synchronization flag setting process is called.
As will be described later, in the synchronization flag setting process, "1" is stored in the synchronization flag area.
Here, when each stay animation table 0 to 4 is set in the animation table setting area, loop reproduction (repetition of processing based on the animation table) is set for the stay animation table. As a result, in the animation table setting area, during the period in which each stay animation table 0 to 4 is set, the process based on the frame information for 30 frames registered in the stay animation table is repeatedly executed.
As a result, during the period in which the stay animation tables 0 and 1 are set in the animation table setting area, the first frame of the 30 frames of frame information registered in the stay animation tables 0 and 1 ( Every time the process based on the frame information corresponding to the first frame / frame 1) is executed, the synchronization flag setting process described later is called (executed).
Therefore, in the animation table setting area, the value stored in the synchronization flag area changes from "0" to "1" every 30 frames during the period when the stay animation tables 0 and 1 are set. become.

Further, as the standby animation table, the standby animation table 1 corresponding to the hold 1 display position, the wait animation table 2 corresponding to the hold 2 display position, the wait animation table 3 corresponding to the hold 3 display position, and the hold 4 display position The standby animation table 4 corresponding to the above is included.
Frame information for one frame is registered in each of the standby animation tables 1 to 4. At this time, the frame information registered in each of the standby animation tables 1 to 4 corresponds to the first frame (first frame / frame 1) of the frame information for 30 frames registered in the stay animation table. Image address information is specified so that an image with the same content as the frame information is displayed. Then, by executing the frame information registered in each of the standby animation tables 1 to 4, the standby animation display proceeds.
Here, in each frame information registered in the standby animation table 1, coordinate information for designating the coordinates of the hold 1 display position is defined as the coordinate information. On the other hand, in each frame information registered in the standby animation table 2, coordinate information for designating the coordinates of the hold 2 display position is defined as the coordinate information. On the other hand, in each frame information registered in the standby animation table 3, coordinate information for designating the coordinates of the hold 3 display position is defined as the coordinate information. On the other hand, in each frame information registered in the standby animation table 4, coordinate information for designating the coordinates of the hold 4 display position is defined as the coordinate information.
As a result, when the standby animation table 1 is set in the animation table setting area described later, the standby animation display is executed at the hold 1 display position. Further, when the standby animation table 2 is set in the animation table setting area, the standby animation display is executed at the hold 2 display position. Further, when the standby animation table 3 is set in the animation table setting area, the standby animation display is executed at the hold 3 display position. Further, when the standby animation table 4 is set in the animation table setting area, the standby animation display is executed at the hold 4 display position.
Here, in all the standby animation tables 1 to 4, the image address information included in the frame information is defined so that the animation (standby animation) having the same content is executed.

In particular, the frame information registered in each of the standby animation tables 1 to 4 includes information (hereinafter referred to as "synchronous monitoring information") for designating the execution of the synchronous monitoring process described later. Then, when the frame information includes the synchronization monitoring information, the synchronization monitoring process is called.
As will be described later, in the synchronization monitoring process called based on the standby animation tables 1 to 4, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the synchronization flag area is "1". Then, when it is determined that the value stored in the synchronization flag area is "1", the stay animation table is set instead of the wait animation table for the hold display corresponding to the wait animation table. As a result, the hold display corresponding to the wait animation table is synchronized with the hold display being executed at the hold display position (or the hold 1 display position). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value stored in the synchronization flag area is not "1", the setting of the standby animation table is continued for the hold display corresponding to the standby animation table.
Here, when each of the standby animation tables 1 to 4 is set in the animation table setting area, loop reproduction (repetition of processing based on the animation table) is set for the standby animation table. As a result, during the period in which one or more standby animation tables 1 to 4 are set in the animation table setting area, processing based on the frame information registered in the standby animation table is performed for each standby animation table. It is executed repeatedly.
As a result, during the period in which one or more waiting animation tables 1 to 4 are set in the animation table setting area, processing based on the frame information registered in the waiting animation table is performed for each waiting animation table. The synchronization monitoring process is called (executed) each time it is executed. That is, the synchronization monitoring process is executed for each frame of each standby animation table.

Further, as the subtraction animation table, the subtraction animation table 1 corresponding to the hold 1 display position, the subtraction animation table 2 corresponding to the hold 2 display position, the subtraction animation table 3 corresponding to the hold 3 display position, and the hold 4 display position The subtraction animation table 4 corresponding to is included.
Frame information for 10 frames is registered in each of the subtraction animation tables 1 to 4.
Frame information for 10 frames is registered in each of the subtraction animation tables 1 to 4 in chronological order. Then, for the frame information for 10 frames registered in each subtraction animation table 1 to 4, the images based on each frame information are sequentially displayed according to the registered order, thereby displaying the subtraction animation. Progresses.
Here, in the frame information for 10 frames registered in the subtraction animation table 1, the coordinate information is defined so that the reserved symbol h moves from the reserved 1 display position to the reserved display position. On the other hand, in the frame information for 10 frames registered in the subtraction animation table 2, the coordinate information is defined so that the reserved symbol h moves from the reserved 2 display position to the reserved 1 display position. On the other hand, in the frame information for 10 frames registered in the subtraction animation table 3, the coordinate information is defined so that the reserved symbol h moves from the reserved 3 display position to the reserved 2 display position. On the other hand, in the frame information for 10 frames registered in the subtraction animation table 4, the coordinate information is defined so that the reserved symbol h moves from the reserved 4 display position to the reserved 3 display position.
As a result, when the winning animation table 1 is set in the animation table setting area, the subtraction animation display of the content that the reserved symbol h shifts from the reserved 1 display position to the reserved display position is executed. Further, when the winning animation table 2 is set in the animation table setting area, the subtraction animation display of the content that the reserved symbol h shifts from the reserved 2 display position to the reserved 1 display position is executed. Further, when the winning animation table 3 is set in the animation table setting area, the subtraction animation display of the content that the reserved symbol h shifts from the reserved 3 display position to the reserved 2 display position is executed. Further, when the winning animation table 4 is set in the animation table setting area, the subtraction animation display of the content that the reserved symbol h shifts from the reserved 4 display position to the reserved 3 display position is executed.
Here, in all the subtraction animation tables 1 to 4, the image address information included in each frame information is defined so that the animation (subtraction animation) having the same content is executed.

The CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 corresponds to the newly acquired special figure 2 game information in the animation table setting area in response to the reception of the hold number designation command for specifying the increase (addition) of the special figure 2 hold number. A winning animation table and a waiting animation table are set as the animation table for the hold display.
At this time, the winning animation table and the waiting animation table are combined (concatenated) so that the processing based on the waiting animation table is started after the processing based on the winning animation table is completed. For the standby animation, loop playback is set.
Specifically, when the number of special figure 2 hold after addition = "1", the winning animation table 1 and the standby animation table are used as the hold display animation tables corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 2 game information. Set to 1.
On the other hand, when the number of holdings of special figure 2 after plastering = "2", the winning animation table 2 and the waiting animation table 2 are used as the animation tables of the holding display corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 2 game information. Set.
On the other hand, when the number of reserved special figures 2 after addition = "3", the winning animation table 3 and the standby animation table 3 are used as the animation tables for the reserved display corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 2 game information. Set.
On the other hand, when the number of special figure 2 hold after addition = "4", the winning animation table 4 and the standby animation table 4 are used as the hold display animation tables corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 2 game information. Set.
As a result, as a hold display corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 2 game information, the standby animation display is started after the winning animation display is completed, and the value of the synchronization flag area changes from "0" to "1". It will wait for synchronization with the advance hold display until the timing occurs.
Then, in response to the change in the value of the synchronization flag area from "0" to "1", the waiting animation table is discarded and the stay animation table is discarded for the hold display corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 2 game information. Is set. At this time, loop playback is set for the stay animation table.

On the other hand, the CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 sets an animation table for the hold display corresponding to all the special figure 2 game information in response to the reception of the hold number designation command for specifying the reduction (subtraction) of the special figure 2 hold number. In the area, the animation table set for each hold display is discarded (deleted), and the subtraction animation table and the stay animation table are newly set.
At this time, the subtraction animation table and the stay animation table are combined (concatenated) so that the process based on the stay animation table is started after the processing based on the subtraction animation table is completed. For the stay animation table, loop playback is set.
Specifically, when the special figure 2 hold number after subtraction = "0", the animation table (stay animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold display position is discarded. Further, the animation table (stay animation table or wait animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 1 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 1 and the stay animation table are used as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set to 0.
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 hold number after subtraction = "1", the animation table (stay animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold display position is discarded. Further, the animation table (stay animation table or wait animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 1 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 1 and the stay animation table are used as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set to 0. Further, the animation table (stay animation table or wait animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 2 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 2 and the stay animation table are used as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set to 1.
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 hold number after subtraction = "2", the animation table (stay animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold display position is discarded. Further, the animation table (stay animation table or wait animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 1 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 1 and the stay animation table are used as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set to 0. Further, the animation table (stay animation table or wait animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 2 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 2 and the stay animation table are used as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set to 1. Further, the animation table (stay animation table or wait animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 3 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 3 and the stay animation table are used as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set 2.
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 hold number after subtraction = "3", the animation table (stay animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold display position is discarded. Further, the animation table (stay animation table or wait animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 1 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 1 and the stay animation table are used as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set to 0. Further, the animation table (stay animation table or wait animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 2 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 2 and the stay animation table are used as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set to 1. Further, the animation table (stay animation table or wait animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 3 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 3 and the stay animation table are used as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set 2. Further, the animation table (stay animation table or wait animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 4 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 4 and the stay animation table are used as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set 3
As a result, when the hold number specification command for specifying the reduction of the special figure 2 hold number is received during the period when the wait animation display is being executed as the hold display corresponding to one or more special figure 2 game information. Is to start the stay animation display at the same time after the subtraction animation display is executed for the hold display corresponding to all the special figure 2 game information, and the contents of the hold display are synchronized.

(Regarding a specific example of the progress of the hold display)
Next, a specific example of the progress of the hold display will be described.
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the progress of the hold display according to the first example. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing the progress of the hold display according to the second example. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing the progress of the hold display according to the third example. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing the progress of the hold display according to the fourth example. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing the progress of the hold display according to the fifth example. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing the progress of the hold display according to the sixth example.
Here, FIGS. 55 to 60 show the progress (control) of the hold display executed during the time reduction control. Even when the time saving control is stopped, the hold display is advanced (controlled) by the same method as when the time saving control shown in FIGS. 55 to 60 is being executed.

(1st example)
FIG. 55 shows the case where the special game (notification display of special symbol / big hit game state) is not being executed and the number of special figure 2 hold increases by “1” from the state where the number of special figure 2 hold = “0” ( It shows the progress of the hold display in (when one special figure 2 game information is acquired).
As shown in FIG. 55, new special figure 2 game information (hereinafter referred to as “subsequent game information”) is acquired while the special game is not being executed and the special figure 2 hold number = “0”. Then, in response to this, the hold display (display of the hold symbol h) targeting the subsequent game information is started.
At this time, as the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information, first, the winning animation display is started at the hold 1 display position.
Further, according to the end of the winning animation display at the hold 1 display position, the hold display position for executing the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information moves (shifts) from the hold 1 display position to the hold display position. That is, the subtraction animation display corresponding to the hold 1 display position is executed as the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information. As a result, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the succeeding game information moves (shifts) from the reserved 1 display position to the reserved display position.
Further, in response to the end of the subtraction animation display corresponding to the hold 1 display position, the stay animation display is started at the hold display position as the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information.
Then, in response to the end of the stop display of the special symbol corresponding to the succeeding game information, the hold display corresponding to the succeeding game information (the stay animation display at the hold display position) is ended.

(2nd example)
FIG. 56 shows a case where the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed and the number of reserved special figures 2 is increased by “1” from the state where the number of reserved special figures 2 is “0” (one special figure 2 game information). Indicates the progress of the hold display in (when is acquired).
As shown in FIG. 56, the change display of the second special symbol based on the preceding game information is in progress, and the special figure 2 hold number = "0" (the hold display position, the hold 1 display position, the hold 2 display position, Of the hold 3 display position and the hold 4 display position, the new special figure 2 game information is executed in the hold display (stay animation display) corresponding to the preceding game information only at the hold display position. When (hereinafter referred to as "subsequent game information") is acquired, the number of reserved special figures 2 is increased to "1" accordingly, and the pending display (display of the reserved symbol h) for the succeeding game information is obtained. ) Is started.
At this time, as the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information, the winning animation display is first started at the hold 1 display position. In addition, the standby animation display is started according to the end of the winning animation display. Further, after waiting for the value of the synchronization flag area to change from "0" to "1", the standby animation display is terminated and the stay animation display is started. As a result, the hold display corresponding to the succeeding game information is synchronized with the stay animation display corresponding to the preceding game information.

(Third example)
FIG. 57 shows a start determination based on the special figure 2 game information is executed when the special figure 2 hold number decreases from the state where the special figure 2 hold number = “1” (the stop display of the second special symbol ends and the special figure 2 game information is executed. In case of), it shows the progress of the hold display.
As shown in FIG. 57, when the stop display of the second special symbol based on the preceding game information is terminated and the special figure 2 hold number is reduced to "0" in the state where the special figure 2 hold number = "1", this The hold display corresponding to the preceding game information at the hold display position is terminated, and the hold display position for executing the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information is moved from the hold 1 display position to the hold display position. (shift.
That is, the subtraction animation display corresponding to the hold 1 display position is executed as the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information. As a result, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the succeeding game information moves (shifts) from the reserved 1 display position to the reserved display position.
Further, in response to the end of the subtraction animation display corresponding to the hold 1 display position, the stay animation display is started at the hold display position as the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information.
Then, in response to the end of the stop display of the special symbol corresponding to the succeeding game information, the hold display corresponding to the succeeding game information (the stay animation display at the hold display position) is ended.

(4th example)
FIG. 58 shows a case where the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed and the number of reserved special figures 2 is increased by “3” from the state of the number of reserved special figures 2 = “1” (three special figures 2 game information). Indicates the progress of the hold display in (when sequentially acquired).
As shown in FIG. 58, the change display of the second special symbol based on the preceding game information 1 and the state of the special figure 2 hold number = "1" (the hold display position, the hold 1 display position, the hold 2 display position). Of the hold 3 display position and the hold 4 display position, the hold display (stay animation display) corresponding to the preceding game information 1 is executed at the hold display position, and the hold 1 display position is preceded. When new special figure 2 game information (hereinafter referred to as "subsequent game information 1") is acquired in the hold display (stay animation display) corresponding to the game information 2), the corresponding Then, the number of reserved symbols 2 is increased to "2", and the pending display (display of the reserved symbol h) targeting the succeeding game information 1 is started.
At this time, as the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information 1, the winning animation display is first started at the hold 2 display position. In addition, the standby animation display is started according to the end of the winning animation display. Further, after waiting for the value of the synchronization flag area to change from "0" to "1", the standby animation display is terminated and the stay animation display is started. As a result, the hold display corresponding to the succeeding game information 1 is synchronized with the hold display corresponding to the preceding game information 1 and 2.
In addition, while the second special symbol is variablely displayed based on the preceding game information 1, and the special figure 2 hold number = "2" (the hold display position, hold 1 display position, hold 2 display position, hold 3 display position). , And, of the hold 4 display positions, the hold display (stay animation display) corresponding to the preceding game information 1 is executed at the hold display position, and the hold display corresponds to the preceding game information 2 at the hold 1 display position. A new special figure 2 is executed in the hold display (stay animation display) to be performed and the hold display (winning animation display) corresponding to the subsequent game information 1 is executed at the hold 2 display position. When the game information (hereinafter referred to as "subsequent game information 2") is acquired, the number of special figure 2 hold increases to "3" accordingly, and the hold display (hold) for the succeeding game information 2 is performed. Display of symbol h) is started.
At this time, as the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information 2, the winning animation display is first started at the hold 3 display position. In addition, the standby animation display is started according to the end of the winning animation display. Further, after waiting for the value of the synchronization flag area to change from "0" to "1", the standby animation display is terminated and the stay animation display is started. As a result, the hold display corresponding to the succeeding game information 2 is synchronized with the hold display corresponding to the preceding game information 1 and 2 and the hold display corresponding to the succeeding game information 1.
Further, the change display of the second special symbol based on the preceding game information, and the state of the special figure 2 hold number = "3" (the hold display position, the hold 1 display position, the hold 2 display position, the hold 3 display position, The hold display (stay animation display) corresponding to the preceding game information 1 is executed at the hold display position among the hold 4 display positions, and the hold display corresponds to the preceding game information 2 at the hold 1 display position. The hold display (stay animation display) is executed, and the hold display (winning animation display) corresponding to the succeeding game information 1 is executed at the hold 2 display position, and the successor is executed at the hold 3 display position. When new special figure 2 game information (hereinafter referred to as "subsequent game information 3") is acquired in the hold display (winning animation display) corresponding to the game information 2), the corresponding Then, the number of reserved symbols 2 is increased to "4", and the pending display (display of the reserved symbol h) targeting the succeeding game information 3 is started.
At this time, as the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information 3, the winning animation display is first started at the hold 4 display position. In addition, the standby animation display is started according to the end of the winning animation display. Further, after waiting for the value of the synchronization flag area to change from "0" to "1", the standby animation display is terminated and the stay animation display is started. As a result, the hold display corresponding to the succeeding game information 3 is synchronized with the hold display corresponding to the preceding game information 1 and 2 and the hold display corresponding to the succeeding game information 1 and 2.

(5th example)
FIG. 59 shows a start determination based on the special figure 2 game information is executed when the special figure 2 hold number decreases from the state where the special figure 2 hold number = “4” (the stop display of the second special symbol ends and the special figure 2 game information is executed. In case of), it shows the progress of the hold display.
As shown in FIG. 57, when the stop display of the second special symbol based on the preceding game information 1 is terminated and the special figure 2 hold number is reduced to "3" in the state of the special figure 2 hold number = "4". In response to this, the hold display corresponding to the preceding game information 1 at the hold display position is terminated, and the hold display position for executing the hold display corresponding to the preceding game information 2 is changed from the hold 1 display position to the hold display. The hold display position that moves (shifts) to a position and executes the hold display corresponding to the succeeding game information 1 moves (shifts) from the hold 2 display position to the hold 1 display position, and the hold display corresponding to the succeeding game information 2. The hold display position for executing the hold 3 display position moves (shifts) from the hold 3 display position to the hold 2 display position, and the hold display position for executing the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information 3 is changed from the hold 4 display position to the hold 3 display position. Move (shift) to.
That is, as the hold display corresponding to the preceding game information 2, the subtraction animation display corresponding to the hold 1 display position is executed. As a result, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the preceding game information 1 moves (shifts) from the reserved 1 display position to the reserved display position. Further, as the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information 1, the subtraction animation display corresponding to the hold 2 display position is executed. As a result, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the succeeding game information 1 moves (shifts) from the reserved 2 display position to the reserved 1 display position. Further, as the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information 2, the subtraction animation display corresponding to the hold 3 display position is executed. As a result, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the succeeding game information 2 moves (shifts) from the reserved 3 display position to the reserved 2 display position. Further, as the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information 3, the subtraction animation display corresponding to the hold 4 display position is executed. As a result, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the succeeding game information 3 moves (shifts) from the reserved 4 display position to the reserved 3 display position.
Further, in response to the end of the subtraction animation display corresponding to the hold 1 display position, the stay animation display is started at the hold display position as the hold display corresponding to the preceding game information 1. Further, in response to the end of the subtraction animation display corresponding to the hold 2 display position, the stay animation display is started at the hold 1 display position as the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information 1. Further, in response to the end of the subtraction animation display corresponding to the hold 3 display position, the stay animation display is started at the hold 2 display position as the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information 2. Further, in response to the end of the subtraction animation display corresponding to the hold 4 display position, the stay animation display is started at the hold 3 display position as the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information 3.
After that, when the stop display of the second special symbol based on the preceding game information 2 is terminated and the number of holdings of the special drawing 2 is reduced to "2", the holding corresponding to the preceding game information 2 at the holding display position corresponds to this. When the display is terminated, the hold display position for executing the hold display corresponding to the succeeding game information 1 moves (shifts) from the hold 1 display position to the hold display position, and the hold display corresponding to the succeeding game information 2 is displayed. The hold display position to be executed moves (shifts) from the hold 2 display position to the hold 1 display position, and the hold display position for executing the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information 3 changes from the hold 3 display position to the hold 2 display position. Move (shift).
Further, when the stop display of the second special symbol based on the succeeding game information 1 is terminated and the number of reserved special figures 2 is reduced to "1", the holding corresponding to the succeeding game information 1 at the holding display position corresponds to this. When the display is finished, the hold display position where the hold display corresponding to the succeeding game information 2 is executed moves (shifts) from the hold 1 display position to the hold display position, and the hold display corresponding to the successor game information 3 is executed. The hold display position in which is executed moves (shifts) from the hold 2 display position to the hold 1 display position.
Further, when the stop display of the second special symbol based on the succeeding game information 2 is terminated and the number of reserved special figures 2 is reduced to "0", the holding corresponding to the succeeding game information 2 at the holding display position corresponds to this. At the same time as the display is terminated, the hold display position for executing the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information 3 moves (shifts) from the hold 1 display position to the hold display position.
Then, in response to the end of the stop display of the special symbol corresponding to the succeeding game information 3, the hold display corresponding to the succeeding game information 3 (the stay animation display at the hold display position) is ended.

(6th example)
In FIG. 60, the number of special figures 2 held increases by “2” from the state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed and the number of special figures 2 held = “2” (two special figures 2 game information are displayed). , Sequentially acquired), and then when the number of special figure 2 holds decreases before the timing when the value of the synchronization flag area changes from "0" to "1" occurs (the stop display of the second special symbol is displayed). It shows the progress of the hold display in the case where the start determination is executed based on the special figure 2 game information after the end.
As shown in FIG. 60, the change display of the second special symbol based on the preceding game information 1 and the state of the special figure 2 hold number = "1" (the hold display position, the hold 1 display position, the hold 2 display position). Of the hold 3 display position and the hold 4 display position, the hold display (stay animation display) corresponding to the preceding game information 1 is executed at the hold display position, and the hold 1 display position is preceded. When new special figure 2 game information (hereinafter referred to as "subsequent game information 1") is acquired in the hold display (stay animation display) corresponding to the game information 2), the corresponding Then, the number of reserved symbols 2 is increased to "2", and the pending display (display of the reserved symbol h) targeting the succeeding game information 1 is started.
At this time, as the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information 1, the winning animation display is first started at the hold 2 display position. In addition, the standby animation display is started according to the end of the winning animation display.
In addition, while the second special symbol is variablely displayed based on the preceding game information 1, and the special figure 2 hold number = "2" (the hold display position, hold 1 display position, hold 2 display position, hold 3 display position). , And, of the hold 4 display positions, the hold display (stay animation display) corresponding to the preceding game information 1 is executed at the hold display position, and the hold display corresponds to the preceding game information 2 at the hold 1 display position. A new special figure 2 is executed in the hold display (stay animation display) to be performed and the hold display (winning animation display) corresponding to the subsequent game information 1 is executed at the hold 2 display position. When the game information (hereinafter referred to as "subsequent game information 2") is acquired, the number of special figure 2 hold increases to "3" accordingly, and the hold display (hold) for the succeeding game information 2 is performed. Display of symbol h) is started.
At this time, as the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information 2, the winning animation display is first started at the hold 3 display position. In addition, the standby animation display is started according to the end of the winning animation display.
After the start of the standby animation corresponding to the succeeding game information 1 and the standby animation corresponding to the succeeding game information 2, before the timing when the value of the synchronization flag area changes from "0" to "1" arrives, the preceding game information 1 When the stop display of the second special symbol based on the above is terminated and the number of reserved special figures 2 is reduced to "2", the reserved display corresponding to the preceding game information 1 at the reserved display position is terminated accordingly. , The hold display position that executes the hold display corresponding to the preceding game information 2 moves (shifts) from the hold 1 display position to the hold display position, and the hold display position that executes the hold display corresponding to the succeeding game information 1 is , The hold 2 display position is moved (shifted) from the hold 1 display position, and the hold display position for executing the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information 2 is moved (shifted) from the hold 3 display position to the hold 2 display position.
That is, as the hold display corresponding to the preceding game information 2, the subtraction animation display corresponding to the hold 1 display position is executed. As a result, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the preceding game information 1 moves (shifts) from the reserved 1 display position to the reserved display position. Further, as the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information 1, the subtraction animation display corresponding to the hold 2 display position is executed. As a result, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the succeeding game information 1 moves (shifts) from the reserved 2 display position to the reserved 1 display position. Further, as the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information 2, the subtraction animation display corresponding to the hold 3 display position is executed. As a result, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the succeeding game information 2 moves (shifts) from the reserved 3 display position to the reserved 2 display position.
Then, in response to the end of the subtraction animation display corresponding to the hold 1 display position, the stay animation display is started at the hold display position as the hold display corresponding to the preceding game information 1. Further, in response to the end of the subtraction animation display corresponding to the hold 2 display position, the stay animation display is started at the hold 1 display position as the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information 1. Further, in response to the end of the subtraction animation display corresponding to the hold 3 display position, the stay animation display is started at the hold 2 display position as the hold display corresponding to the subsequent game information 2.
As described above, in this case, the subtraction animation is terminated without triggering the change of the value of the synchronization flag area from "0" to "1" for the hold display corresponding to the succeeding game information 1 and 2. As an opportunity, it is synchronized with the hold display corresponding to the preceding game information 1 and 2.

(Type of hold display)
Next, the types of hold display will be described.
In the present embodiment, as the types of the hold display, the normal time hold display and the time saving time hold display are defined.
The normal hold display is a type of hold display that is executed while the time reduction control is stopped.
The time saving time hold display is a type of hold display executed while the time saving control is being executed.
The cycle (one cycle) of the operation during stay (stay animation display) is different between the normal time hold display and the short time hold display. In the present embodiment, the cycle of the operation during the stay is shorter in the time saving time holding display than in the normal time holding display. Specifically, the operation during the stay of the normal hold display is composed of 40 frames. On the other hand, the operation during the stay of the time saving hold display is composed of 30 frames. It should be noted that the short-time hold display may have a longer cycle of operation during the stay than the normal hold display.
Further, the mode of the reserved symbol h is different between the normal time hold display and the time saving hold display. That is, in the normal hold display, the hold symbol h (hereinafter referred to as “sphere hold symbol”) composed of a predetermined sphere is displayed. On the other hand, in the time saving hold display, the hold symbol h (hereinafter referred to as “character hold symbol”) composed of a predetermined character is displayed.
Further, the operation mode of the operation during the stay is different between the normal time hold display and the short time hold display. That is, in the normal hold display, the sphere hold symbol swings in a predetermined mode as the staying action. On the other hand, in the time saving hold display, the action of rotating the character hold symbol in a predetermined mode is executed as the action during the stay.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to execute a hold notice as a look-ahead notice effect.
"Hold notice" is a kind of look-ahead notice effect. That is, in the hold notice, the result of the preliminary determination (step S9-8) based on the predetermined game information is displayed in a hold display (specifically, the hold symbol h) corresponding to the game information (specifically, the hold symbol h). The effect is suggested by the color).
In the present embodiment, the hold notice is an effect suggesting the result of the advance special symbol determination based on the predetermined game information (specifically, the possibility of being a "big hit symbol"). It should be noted that the hold notice may be configured to suggest the result of the advance special map fluctuation pattern determination based on the predetermined game information (specifically, the possibility of "super reach fluctuation").

In the present embodiment, the normal time default hold display and the normal time special hold display are defined as the types of the normal time hold display.
The normal default hold display is a type of hold display that is not subject to the hold notice. That is, the normal default hold display is a type of hold display that does not suggest the result of the preliminary determination (step S9-8).
The normal special hold display is a type of hold display that is the target of the hold notice. That is, the normal special hold display is a type of hold display that suggests the result of the preliminary determination (step S9-8).
In the present embodiment, the color of the reserved symbol h is different between the normal time default hold display and the normal time special hold display. Specifically, in the normal default hold display, a "white" sphere hold symbol is displayed. On the other hand, in the normal special hold display, a sphere hold symbol having a color other than "white" is displayed.
In the normal time default hold display and the normal time special hold display, the configuration excluding the color of the hold symbol h (specifically, the mode of the hold symbol h, the operation mode of the staying operation, the cycle of the staying operation, etc.). Is the same.

Further, as the type of the normal special hold display, a plurality of types of normal special hold display having different colors of the hold symbol h are defined. Then, in the hold notice executed while the time reduction control is stopped, the color of the sphere hold symbol suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit. Specifically, as the types of the normal time special hold display, the first normal time special hold display in which the "blue" sphere hold symbol is displayed and the second normal time special hold display in which the "red" sphere hold symbol is displayed. A display and a third normal special hold display in which a "golden" sphere hold symbol is displayed are specified.
In the first normal time special hold display, the second normal time special hold display, and the third normal time special hold display, the configuration excluding the color of the hold symbol h (specifically, the mode of the hold symbol h, during stay). The operation mode of the operation, the cycle of the operation during the stay, etc.) are the same.
The jackpot expectations for each type of normal special hold display are, in order from the one with the highest jackpot expectation, "third normal time special hold display", "second normal time special hold display", and "first normal time special hold display". It is stipulated to be "special hold display" (high expectation of big hit → low expectation of big hit).
The "big hit expectation degree" means the possibility (degree) that a big hit gaming state occurs when the type is selected.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the types of the time saving time holding display, the time saving time default holding display and the time saving time special holding display are defined.
The default hold display for a short time is a type of hold display that is not subject to the hold notice. That is, the time saving default hold display is a type of hold display that does not suggest the result of the preliminary determination (step S9-8).
The time-saving special hold display is a type of hold display that is the target of the hold notice. That is, the time-saving special hold display is a type of hold display that suggests the result of the preliminary determination (step S9-8).
In the present embodiment, the color of the reserved symbol h is different between the time-saving default hold display and the time-saving special hold display. Specifically, in the time saving default hold display, a "white" character hold symbol is displayed. On the other hand, in the time saving special hold display, a character hold symbol of a color other than "white" is displayed.
In addition, in the time saving default hold display and the time saving special holding display, the configuration excluding the color of the holding symbol h (specifically, the mode of the holding symbol h, the operation mode of the staying operation, the cycle of the staying operation, etc.). Is the same.

Further, as the type of the special hold display for the time saving time, a plurality of types of the special hold display for the time saving time with different colors of the reserved symbol h are defined. Then, in the hold notice executed during the execution of the time reduction control, the jackpot expectation degree is suggested by the color of the character hold symbol. Specifically, as the types of time-saving special hold display, the first time-saving special hold display in which the "blue" character hold symbol is displayed and the second time-time special hold display in which the "red" character hold symbol is displayed. The display and the third time-saving special hold display in which the "golden" character hold symbol is displayed are stipulated.
In addition, in the 1st time reduction special hold display, the 2nd time reduction special hold display, and the 3rd time reduction special hold display, the configuration excluding the color of the hold symbol h (specifically, the mode of the hold symbol h, during stay). The operation mode of the operation, the cycle of the operation during the stay, etc.) are the same.
The jackpot expectations for each type of time-saving special hold display are, in order from the one with the highest jackpot expectation, "third time-saving special hold display", "second time-saving special hold display", and "first time-saving special hold display". It is stipulated to be "special hold display" (high expectation of big hit → low expectation of big hit).

In particular, the pachinko machine 1 has a configuration in which the staying operations are synchronized with respect to a plurality of hold displays in which the staying operations are executed in the same cycle.
That is, if the normal special hold display (hold notice) is started while the normal default hold display is being executed, the staying operation of the normal special hold display is synchronized with the staying operation of the normal default hold display. To.
Also, if the normal default hold display is started while the normal special hold display (hold notice) is being executed, the staying operation of the normal default hold display is synchronized with the staying operation of the normal special hold display. To.
Similarly, if the time-saving special hold display (hold notice) is started while the time-saving default hold display is being executed, the staying operation of the time-saving special hold display is synchronized with the staying operation of the time-saving default hold display. Will be done.
In addition, when the short-time special hold display (hold notice) is being executed and the short-time default hold display is started, the staying operation of the short-time default hold display is synchronized with the staying operation of the short-time special hold display. To.

On the other hand, for a plurality of hold displays in which the staying operation is executed at different cycles, the staying operation is not synchronized. In particular, in the present embodiment, a plurality of hold displays in which the operation during the stay is executed at different cycles are not executed at the same time.
That is, the default hold display for a short time is not started during the execution of the default hold display for normal time. In addition, the default hold display for a short time is not started during the execution of the special hold display for normal time. In addition, the special hold display for a short time is not started while the default hold display for normal time is being executed. In addition, the special hold display for a short time is not started during the execution of the special hold display for normal time. In these cases, all the normal time hold display is terminated and switched to the time reduction hold display according to the start of the time reduction control.
Similarly, the normal time default hold display is not started while the time saving default hold display is being executed. In addition, the default hold display for normal time is not started during the execution of the special hold display for time saving. In addition, the special hold display for normal time is not started while the default hold display for time saving is being executed. In addition, the special hold display for normal time is not started while the special hold display for time saving is being executed. In these cases, the normal time hold display is started after the end of the time reduction control and the digestion (end) of all the time reduction hold displays.
As described above, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a plurality of types of hold displays having different operation cycles during the stay are executed at the same time, and it is possible to prevent the contents of the hold display from becoming complicated. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the hold display.

(Variable production)
Next, the variable effect executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the following description, the first effect symbol z1 displayed in the first effect symbol display area a1 is referred to as a “left symbol”, and the first effect symbol z1 displayed in the first effect symbol display area a2 is referred to as a “middle symbol”. , The first effect symbol z1 displayed in the first effect symbol display area a3 is referred to as a “right symbol”.
In the present embodiment, the second effect symbol z2 is variably displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4 at all times during the execution of the variation effect (first half variation effect and second half variation effect).

First, each aspect of the first half variation effect will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, the variation mode numbers are the variation mode number corresponding to "pseudo-reamless variation", the variation mode number corresponding to "pseudo-ream 2 variation", and the variation mode number corresponding to "pseudo-ream 3 variation". And are stipulated.
Further, as the category (type) of the first half variable effect, "pseudo-reamless variable effect", "pseudo-ream 2 variable effect", and "pseudo-ream 3 variable effect" are defined.
Further, as a pattern (aspect) belonging to each category of the first half variable effect, one pattern or a plurality of patterns having different effect contents are defined.
Then, when the variation mode number corresponding to the "pseudo-continuous variation" is specified by the variation mode designation command, "pseudo-continuous variation effect" is selected as the category of the first half variation effect. On the other hand, when the variation mode number corresponding to the "pseudo-ream 2 variation" is specified by the variation mode designation command, the "pseudo-ream 2 variation effect" is selected as the category of the first half variation effect. On the other hand, when the variation mode number corresponding to the "pseudo-ream 3 variation" is specified by the variation mode designation command, the "pseudo-ream 3 variation effect" is selected as the category of the first half variation effect.

The "pseudo-continuous variation effect" is configured to include a display effect of the content in which the normal variation display of the first special symbol z1 is executed in each of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3.
The "normal variation display" is a display in which the types of the first effect symbols z1 displayed in the lottery result display positions of the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 are sequentially replaced at a constant tempo.
The "lottery result display position" is a position where the first effect symbol z1 is stopped and displayed in the stop effect.
Specifically, in the "pseudo-reamless variation effect", the normal variation display of each symbol is started in the order of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol.

In the "pseudo-continuous variation effect"("pseudo-ream 2 variation effect" / "pseudo-ream 3 variation effect"), the variation display of the first effect symbol z1 is pseudo during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol. In addition, it is a production of contents that are executed multiple times. Specifically, the pseudo-continuous variation effect is configured to include a plurality of pseudo-variation effects.
Here, the "pseudo-ream two-variation effect" is configured to include two pseudo-variation effects. On the other hand, the "pseudo-ream three-variation effect" is configured to include three pseudo-variation effects.
In each pseudo variation effect, the temporary stop display of the first effect symbol z1 is executed after the normal variation display of the first special symbol z1 is executed in each of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3. It is composed including the display effect of the contents.
The "temporary stop display" is a pseudo stop display. Specifically, the temporary stop display is a display in which one type of first effect symbol z1 stays in a state of moving in a predetermined mode (swing, rotation, etc.) at the lottery result display position.
The "stop display" is a display of the content that one type of first effect symbol z1 stays in a stopped state at the lottery result display position.
Specifically, in each pseudo-variation effect, the normal variation display of each symbol is started in the order of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, and then the temporary stop of each symbol is performed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. The display is executed.
In particular, in each pseudo-variation effect, the combination of the first effect symbol z1 temporarily stopped and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 is the "missing eye", "reach eye", and "chance eye". Of these, either combination will be used. Here, in the final pseudo-variation effect, the combination of the first effect symbols z1 temporarily stopped and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 becomes the "reach eye", and the reach state is established.
The "missing stitch" is a combination that is not included in the "big hit symbol" (specifically, a combination in which the types of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are not aligned) (excluding the specific combination described later).
The "reach eyes" are combinations included in the "big hit symbol" (specifically, a combination in which the types of the left symbol and the right symbol are aligned).
The "chance eye" is a specific combination (for example, "1, 2, 2," among the combinations not included in the "big hit symbol" (specifically, the combinations in which the types of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are not aligned). It is a combination with regularity such as "3").
In the "reach state", the first effect symbol z1 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the two first effect symbol display areas of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3. The combination of the effect symbols z1 is in a state of being included in the "big hit symbol".

Next, each aspect of the latter half variation effect will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, as fluctuation pattern numbers, a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "no reach fluctuation", a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "normal reach fluctuation", and a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "super reach fluctuation" are defined. Has been done.
Further, as the category (type) of the latter half fluctuation effect, "variation effect without reach", "normal reach variation effect", and "super reach variation effect" are defined.
Further, as a pattern (aspect) belonging to each category of the latter half variable effect, one pattern or a plurality of patterns having different effect contents are defined.
Then, when the variation pattern number corresponding to "variation without reach" is specified by the variation pattern specification command, "variation without reach" is selected as the category of the latter half variation effect. On the other hand, when the variation pattern number corresponding to the "normal reach variation" is specified by the variation pattern specification command, the "normal reach variation effect" is selected as the category of the latter half variation effect. On the other hand, when the variation pattern number corresponding to "super reach variation" is specified by the variation pattern specification command, "super reach variation effect" is selected as the category of the latter half variation effect.

The "variable effect without reach" is an effect that is executed following the "variable effect without pseudo-ream".
In the present embodiment, as the "variation effect without reach", the "variation effect without reach (missing)" executed when the result of the special figure hit determination is "missing" and the result of the special figure hit determination are "big hits". It is stipulated that "variable effect without reach (big hit)" to be executed in the case of "".
The "variable effect without reach"("variable effect without reach (missing)" and "variable effect without reach (big hit)") is the first special symbol z1 in each of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3. It is configured to include a display effect of the content that is normally executed for variable display.
Specifically, in the "variation effect without reach", after the normal variation display of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol is executed, each symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol.
At this time, in the "variable effect without reach (missing)", the combination of the first effect symbol z1 temporarily stopped and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 becomes the "missing symbol".
On the other hand, in the "variable effect without reach (big hit)", the combination of the first effect symbol z1 temporarily stopped and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 becomes the "big hit symbol".

The "normal reach variation effect" is an effect that is executed following the "pseudo continuous variation effect"("pseudo-ream 2 variation effect" and "pseudo-ream 3 variation effect").
In the present embodiment, as the "normal reach variation effect", the "normal reach variation effect (missing)" executed when the result of the special figure hit determination is "missing" and the result of the special figure hit determination are "big hit". "Normal reach fluctuation effect (big hit)" to be executed in a certain case is stipulated.
The "normal reach fluctuation effect"("normal reach variation effect (off)" and "normal reach variation effect (big hit)") is an effect executed during the formation of the reach state, and whether or not the "big hit symbol" is established. It is configured to include a display effect of the content that the "big hit symbol" is not established or the "big hit symbol" is established after the fanning.
Specifically, in the "normal reach variation effect", the middle symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed after the reach effect image is displayed during the period when the left symbol and the right symbol form the reach state.
At this time, in the "normal reach fluctuation effect (off)", a medium symbol of a type different from the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (the "big hit symbol" is not established).
On the other hand, in the "normal reach fluctuation effect (big hit)", the middle symbol of the same type as the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (the "big hit symbol" is established).
The "reach effect image" is an effect image having a content that encourages the temporary stop display of the same type of medium symbol as the left symbol and the right symbol (the "big hit symbol" is established). In the present embodiment, as the reach effect image, an image in which the character included in the middle symbol performs a predetermined action and an image in which a predetermined effect is applied to the middle symbol are displayed.

The "super reach variation effect" is an effect that is executed following the "pseudo continuous variation effect"("pseudo-ream 2 variation effect" and "pseudo-ream 3 variation effect").
In the present embodiment, as the "super reach fluctuation effect", the "super reach variation effect (missing)" executed when the result of the special figure hit determination is "missing" and the result of the special figure hit determination are "big hits". "Super reach fluctuation effect (big hit)" to be executed when "" is specified.
"Super reach fluctuation effect"("Super reach variation effect (off)", "Super reach variation effect (big hit)") is an effect executed during the formation of the reach state, and the "big hit symbol" is established. After inciting whether or not, the display of the content that avoids the establishment of the "big hit symbol" is executed, then the variable display of the medium symbol is restarted, and then the display of the content that develops from the reach state to the development reach state. Is executed, and after inciting whether or not the "big hit symbol" is established again, the display effect of the content that the "big hit symbol" is not established or the "big hit symbol" is established is included.
The "development reach state" is a state in which the two first special symbols z1 forming the reach state are reduced and displayed. In the present embodiment, the left symbol and the right symbol forming the reach state are reduced and displayed on the upper end portion of the display screen 31a, whereby the development reach state is formed. During the period when the development reach state is formed, the middle symbols will be hidden.
Specifically, in the "super reach variation effect", after the above reach effect image is displayed during the period when the left symbol and the right symbol form the reach state, among the types different from the left symbol and the right symbol. The symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, then the variable display of the middle symbol is resumed, and then the development reach state is formed, and during the period when the development reach state is formed, after the development reach effect image is displayed, the middle symbol is displayed. The symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed.
At this time, in the "super reach fluctuation effect (missing)", a medium symbol of a type different from the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (the "big hit symbol" is not established).
On the other hand, in the "super reach fluctuation effect (big hit)", the middle symbol of the same type as the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (the "big hit symbol" is established).
The "development reach effect image" is an effect image with contents that encourage the temporary stop display of the same type of medium symbols as the left symbol and the right symbol (the "big hit symbol" is established). In the present embodiment, a predetermined background image is displayed as the development reach effect image.

(Main notice production)
Next, the main notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
The "main notice effect" is an effect executed during the variation effect, and is an effect that suggests the result of the start determination (special figure hit determination, special symbol symbol determination, special figure variation pattern determination, etc.) related to the variation effect. It has become.
In the present embodiment, the main notice effect suggests the result of the special symbol determination (specifically, the possibility of being a "big hit symbol").
In the present embodiment, as the type of the main notice effect, a plurality of types having different effect contents are defined.

(Stop production)
Next, the stop effect executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
The "stop effect" is an effect executed while the special symbol is stopped and displayed.
In the stop effect, the first effect symbol z1 is stopped and displayed in each of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, and the second effect symbol z2 is stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4. ..

(Big hit production)
Next, the jackpot effect executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
The jackpot effect is an effect that is executed during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state.
In the pachinko machine 1, "big hit effect 1" to "big hit effect 6" are defined as the category (type) of the big hit effect.
Further, as a pattern (aspect) belonging to each category of the jackpot effect, one pattern or a plurality of patterns having different effect contents are defined.
Then, when the stop symbol number corresponding to the "big hit 1 symbol" is specified by the opening designation command, "big hit effect 1" is selected as the category of the big hit effect. On the other hand, when the stop symbol number corresponding to the "big hit 2 symbol" is specified by the opening designation command, "big hit effect 2" is selected as the category of the big hit effect. When the stop symbol number corresponding to the "big hit 3 symbols" is specified by the opening designation command, "big hit effect 3" is selected as the category of the big hit effect. When the stop symbol number corresponding to the "big hit 4 symbols" is specified by the opening designation command, "big hit effect 4" is selected as the category of the big hit effect. When the stop symbol number corresponding to the "big hit 5 symbols" is specified by the opening designation command, "big hit effect 5" is selected as the category of the big hit effect. When the stop symbol number corresponding to the "big hit 6 symbols" is specified by the opening designation command, "big hit effect 6" is selected as the category of the big hit effect.

The jackpot effect is composed of an opening effect executed during the opening period, an interval effect executed during the interval period, a round effect executed during the round game, an ending effect executed during the ending period, and the like. There is.
The "opening period" is the period from the start of the big hit game state to the elapse of the opening time.
The "interval period" is the period from the end of the opening period to the start of the first round game, or the period from the end of each round game to the start of the next round game.
The ending period is the period from the end of the interval period after the end of the final round game to the elapse of the ending time.

(Processing executed by the effect control board 300)
Next, the process executed by the CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 will be described.
In the present embodiment, the command reception interrupt processing, the subtimer interrupt processing, and the movable body interrupt processing, which will be described later, are interrupt processing executed by the interrupt handler. On the other hand, the Vsync interrupt processing, the sound interrupt processing, and the ramp interrupt processing, which will be described later, are interrupt processing (tasks) that can be executed in parallel at the same time by multitasking.
Here, Vsync interrupt processing, sound interrupt processing, and ramp interrupt processing may also be configured as interrupt processing executed by the interrupt handler.

(Sub CPU initialization process)
First, the sub CPU initialization process executed by the CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the sub CPU initialization process.
A reset circuit (not shown) is provided on the effect control board 300. The reset circuit generates a reset signal when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1.
The CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 starts the sub CPU initialization process shown in FIG. 38 in response to the generation of the reset signal by the reset circuit.
When the sub CPU initialization process is started, first, the process proceeds to step S28-1.
In step S28-1, the initial setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-2. In the initial setting process, various initial settings required to start the effect control are executed.
Specifically, in the initialization process, various registers, various timers, and the like used by the CPU 310 are initialized to initialize the CPU 310.
Further, in the initialization process, various internal devices (CPU work memory 311, CPU interface 312, host interface 313, CG bus interface 314, DRAM interface 315, VRAM 316, serial communication controller 317, transfer circuit 318, preloader circuit 319, The display circuit 320, the graphics decoder circuit 321 and the drawing circuit 322, the sound controller 323, etc.) are initialized.
Further, in the initialization process, various external devices (control ROM 302, CGROM 303, DRAM 304, etc.) are initialized. At this time, a value (“0” in this embodiment) that specifies a state in which the initial transfer, which will be described later, has not been completed, is set in the initial transfer completion flag area of the DRAM 304.

In step S28-2, the initial transfer data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-3. In the initial transfer data setting process, information that specifies the data to be the initial transfer is set.
Specifically, in the initial transfer data setting process, the initial transfer data list is set in a predetermined area of the DRAM 304, and a predetermined initial value (“0” in the present embodiment) is set as the value of the data transfer counter. ..
The "initial transfer data list" is a list of data to be transferred (preloaded) from the CGROM 303 to the preload area of the DRAM 304 when the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, in the initial transfer data list, all the compressed audio data among the data stored in the CGROM 303 is defined as the data to be transferred.
Specifically, in the initial transfer data list, for all the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303, information for designating the address of the storage area (storage area of the CGROM 303) for reading each compressed audio data (hereinafter, “read address””. , And information that specifies the address of the storage area (storage area of DRAM 304) for writing the compressed audio data (hereinafter referred to as "write address"), and information that specifies the order in which the compressed audio data is transferred. (Specifically, the value of the data transfer counter) and the correspondence are registered.

In step S28-3, the interrupt enable process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-4. In the interrupt enable process, the interrupt disable state is canceled. This makes it possible (permitted) to execute various interrupt processes.
In step S28-4, the random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-5. In the random number update process, various random numbers for production are updated.
In step S28-5, the initial transfer process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-4. The initial transfer process will be described later.

(Initial transfer processing)
Next, the initial transfer process in step S28-5 will be described.
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the initial transfer process.
When the initial transfer process is executed in step S28-5, the process proceeds to step S44-1 as shown in FIG. 39.
In step S44-1, it is determined whether or not the value set in the initial transfer completion flag area is "1", and the value set in the initial transfer completion flag area is not "1"("0"). If it is determined (No), the process proceeds to step S44-2, and if it is determined that the value set in the initial transfer completion flag area is "1" (Yes), a series of series is performed. The process is completed and the process proceeds to the next process (step S28-4).

In step S44-2, the SATA transfer process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S44-3. In the SATA transfer process, the data stored in the CGROM 303 is transferred (preloaded) to the preload area of the DRAM 304 according to the initial transfer data list set in step S28-1.
Specifically, in the SATA transfer process, first, the value of the data transfer counter is confirmed. Next, the read address and the write address corresponding to the confirmed data transfer counter values are acquired by referring to the initial transfer data list. Then, the data (compressed audio data) stored in the storage area designated by the acquired read data address is read, and the read data (compressed image data) is stored in the storage area designated by the acquired write address. Remember.
In the SATA transfer process, next, "1" is added to the value of the data transfer counter.

In step S44-3, it is determined whether or not the initial transfer is completed, and if it is determined that the initial transfer is completed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S44-4 and it is determined that the initial transfer is not completed. If (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S28-4).
Here, in step S44-3, it is determined whether or not the transfer of all the data registered in the initial transfer data list is completed based on the value of the data transfer counter. Then, when it is determined that the transfer of all the data registered in the initial transfer data list is completed, it is determined that the initial transfer is completed, and the transfer of all the data registered in the initial transfer data list is completed. If it is determined that the initial transfer has not been completed, it is determined that the initial transfer has not been completed.
In step S44-4, the initial transfer completion flag setting process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S28-3). In the initial transfer completion flag setting process, a value (“1” in the present embodiment) that specifies the state in which the initial transfer is completed is set in the initial transfer completion flag area.

As described above, during the period from the execution of the initial setting process to the completion of the transfer (initial transfer) of all the data (all the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303) registered in the initial transfer data list, the initial period. "0" is set in the transfer completion flag area. Then, during the period in which "0" is set in the initial transfer completion flag area, the SATA transfer process of step S44-2 is repeatedly executed.
After that, according to the completion of the transfer (initial transfer) of all the data (all the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303) registered in the initial transfer data list, "1" is set in the initial transfer completion flag area. Is set.
In particular, in the present embodiment, control of audio output by various speakers 22 (audio output processing by sound controller 323) and various image display devices 31 according to the setting of “1” in the initial transfer completion flag area. , 32 to control the display of the effect image (drawing process by VDP), and a state in which it is possible to execute occurs.
That is, when "0" is set in the initial transfer completion flag area, the audio output control by the various speakers 22 (audio output processing by the sound controller 323) and the display of the effect images by the various image display devices 31 and 32. It becomes impossible to execute the control (drawing process by VDP).
On the other hand, when "1" is set in the initial transfer completion flag area, the audio output control by the various speakers 22 (audio output processing by the sound controller 323) and the display of the effect images by the various image display devices 31 and 32. (Drawing process by VDP) and can be executed.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, "1" is set in the initial transfer completion flag area before the transfer of all the data (all the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303) registered in the initial transfer data list is completed. (Before setting), control of drive (light emission) of various lamps 20 and 21 (lamp drive process by lamp controller 317a) and control of drive of various motors 23 (various movable bodies) (motor drive process by motor controller 317b). ), And a state where it is possible to execute occurs.
That is, after the initial setting process is executed, the drive (light emission) control of the various lamps 20 and 21 (lamp drive process by the lamp controller 317a) and various types are performed according to the permission to execute various interrupt processes. A state is generated in which it is possible to control the drive of the motor 23 (various movable bodies) (motor drive process by the motor controller 317b).

(Command reception interrupt processing)
Next, the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 will be described.
The CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 executes a command reception interrupt process (not shown) in response to receiving a control command from the main control board 200.
In the command reception interrupt process, the control command received from the main control board 200 is stored (stored) in the reception buffer area of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300.

(Subtimer interrupt processing)
Next, the subtimer interrupt process executed by the CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing subtimer interrupt processing.
The effect control board 300 is configured to include a clock generation circuit. The clock generation circuit generates a clock pulse signal at predetermined intervals.
The CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 starts the sub-timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 40 at predetermined cycles based on the generation of the clock pulse by the clock generation circuit. When the subtimer interrupt processing is started, first, the process proceeds to step S31-1.
In step S31-1, the register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-2. In the register save process, the register value is saved in the save area of the DRAM 304.

In step S31-2, the timer update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-3. In the timer update process, the values of various timers (effect scenario timer, etc.) included in the effect control board 300 are updated. Specifically, a predetermined value (value corresponding to a predetermined cycle) is added or subtracted from the values of various timers.
In step S31-3, the command analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-4. In the command analysis process, the control command stored in the receive buffer of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300 is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the received control command is executed. The command analysis process will be described later.

In step S31-4, the time schedule management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-5. In the time schedule management process, the progress of the effect is managed based on the effect scenario data set in the effect scenario setting area and the value of the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data.
Specifically, in the time schedule management process, it is determined whether or not there is process data whose start time has arrived for each effect scenario data set in the effect scenario setting area. Then, when it is determined that the process data whose start time has arrived exists, each command information (message) included in the process data is stored (stored) in the corresponding buffer area.
At this time, command information related to the display effect (effect start command for designating the start of the display effect, effect end command for specifying the end of the display effect, etc.) is stored in the display command buffer area.
On the other hand, command information related to the sound effect (such as an effect start command for designating the start of the sound effect) is stored in the sound command buffer area.
On the other hand, command information related to the lamp effect (effect start command for designating the start of the lamp effect, etc.) is stored in the lamp command buffer area.
On the other hand, command information regarding the movable body effect (effect start command for designating the start of the movable body effect, etc.) is stored in the movable body command buffer area.

In step S31-5, the register return processing is executed and the subtimer interrupt processing is terminated. In the register return processing, the value of the register saved in step S31-1 is restored.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the command analysis process in step S31-3 will be described.
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the command analysis process.
When the command analysis process is executed in step S31-3, the process proceeds to step S32-1 as shown in FIG. 41.
In step S32-1, the set value command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-2.
In the set value command reception process, it is determined whether or not the set value specification command has been received. Then, when it is determined that the set value designation command has been received, the value corresponding to the set value designated by the set value designation command is stored (set) in the set value storage area of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300.

In step S32-2, the game state command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-3.
In the game state command reception process, it is determined whether or not the game state specification command has been received. Then, when it is determined that the game state designation command has been received, various effect flags are set.
In step S32-3, the hold command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-4. The hold command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-4, the look-ahead command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-5. The look-ahead command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-5, the variable command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-6. The variable command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-6, the stop command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-7. The stop command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-7, the opening command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-8. The opening command reception process will be described later.

In step S32-8, the game status command reception process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S31-4).
In the game status command reception process, first, it is determined whether or not the game status specification command has been received. Then, when it is determined that the game status designation command has been received, the game status setting process described later is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game status designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to the next process (step S31-4) without executing the game status setting process.
In the game status setting process, the game status specification command is analyzed.
Then, when the generation of the fireable state is specified by the game status designation command, a value for designating that the fireable state is being generated in the game status flag area of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300 (for example, "1". ") Is set. In addition, the effect of suggesting (notifying) that the launchable state is being generated is started.
On the other hand, when the release of the launchable state is specified by the game status specification command, a value (for example, "0") is specified in the game status flag area of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300 to specify that the launchable state is being released. ") Is set. In addition, the effect of suggesting (notifying) that the launchable state is being generated ends.

(Pending command reception processing)
Next, the hold command reception process in step S32-3 will be described.
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the hold command reception process.
When the hold command reception process is executed in step S32-3, the process proceeds to step S36-1 as shown in FIG. 42.
In step S36-1, it is determined whether or not the hold number specification command has been received, and if it is determined that the hold number specification command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-2 and the hold number specification command is executed. If it is determined that the command has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In step S36-2, it is determined whether or not the hold number specification command specifies an increase in the hold number (the hold number has increased by "1"), and the hold number specification command specifies an increase in the hold number. If it is determined that there is (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-3, and the hold number specification command does not specify an increase in the hold number (specifies that the hold number has decreased by "1"). If it is determined (No), the process proceeds to step S36-4.

In step S36-3, the pending number addition process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In the hold number addition process, when it is determined that the hold number designation command specifies an increase in the hold number of special figure 1, "1" is added to the value set in the special figure 1 hold number counter. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold number designation command specifies an increase in the hold number of special figure 2, "1" is added to the value set in the hold number counter of special figure 2.
Then, when the hold number designation command for specifying the increase in the special figure 1 hold number is received while the time reduction control is stopped, the hold display corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 1 game information is started. On the other hand, when the hold number designation command for specifying the increase in the hold number of the special figure 2 is received during the execution of the time saving control, the hold display corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 2 game information is started.
That is, in the animation table setting area, the winning animation table and the standby animation table are set as the animation table of the hold display corresponding to the newly acquired game information.
At this time, the winning animation table and the waiting animation table are combined (concatenated) so that the processing based on the waiting animation table is started after the processing based on the winning animation table is completed. For the standby animation, loop playback is set.

Specifically, when an increase in the number of special figure 1 hold is specified and the number of special figure 1 hold after addition = "1", the animation of the hold display corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 1 game information. As a table, a winning animation table 1 and a waiting animation table 1 are set.
On the other hand, when an increase in the number of special figure 1 hold is specified and the number of special figure 1 hold after plastering = "2", the animation table of the hold display corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 1 game information is used. , The winning animation table 2 and the standby animation table 2 are set.
On the other hand, when an increase in the number of special figure 1 hold is specified and the number of special figure 1 hold after addition = "3", the animation table of the hold display corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 1 game information is used. , The winning animation table 3 and the standby animation table 3 are set.
On the other hand, when an increase in the number of special figure 1 hold is specified and the number of special figure 1 hold after addition = "4", the animation table of the hold display corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 1 game information is used. , The winning animation table 4 and the standby animation table 4 are set.
As a result, as a hold display corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 1 game information, the standby animation display is started after the winning animation display is completed, and the value of the synchronization flag area changes from "0" to "1". It will wait for synchronization with the advance hold display until the timing occurs.
On the other hand, when an increase in the number of special figure 2 hold is specified and the number of special figure 2 hold after addition = "1", the animation table of the hold display corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 2 game information is used. , Winning animation table 1 and standby animation table 1 are set.
On the other hand, when an increase in the number of special figure 2 hold is specified and the number of special figure 2 hold after plastering = "2", the animation table of the hold display corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 2 game information is used. , The winning animation table 2 and the standby animation table 2 are set.
On the other hand, when an increase in the number of special figure 2 hold is specified and the number of special figure 2 hold after addition = "3", the animation table of the hold display corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 2 game information is used. , The winning animation table 3 and the standby animation table 3 are set.
On the other hand, when an increase in the number of special figure 2 hold is specified and the number of special figure 2 hold after addition = "4", the animation table of the hold display corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 2 game information is used. , The winning animation table 4 and the standby animation table 4 are set.
As a result, as a hold display corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 2 game information, the standby animation display is started after the winning animation display is completed, and the value of the synchronization flag area changes from "0" to "1". It will wait for synchronization with the advance hold display until the timing occurs.

In step S36-4, the hold number subtraction process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In the hold number subtraction process, when it is determined that the hold number designation command specifies the subtraction of the hold number in the special figure 1, "1" is subtracted from the value set in the hold number counter in the special figure 1. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reserved number designation command specifies the subtraction of the special figure 2 hold number, "1" is subtracted from the value set in the special figure 2 hold number counter.
Then, the hold display executed at the hold display position is terminated, and the hold display executed at the hold 1 display position to the hold 4 display position is shifted.
That is, in the animation table setting area, the animation table is discarded for the hold display executed at the hold display position, and the hold display executed at the hold 1 display position to the hold 4 display position is concerned with the hold display. The animation table set for is discarded (deleted), and the subtraction animation table and the stay animation table are newly set.
At this time, the subtraction animation table and the stay animation table are combined (concatenated) so that the process based on the stay animation table is started after the processing based on the subtraction animation table is completed. For the stay animation table, loop playback is set.

Specifically, a decrease in the number of special figure reservations (the number of special figure 1 hold or the number of special figure 2 hold) is specified, and the number of special figure hold after subtraction (the number of special figure 1 hold or the number of special figure 2 hold) = "0". , The animation table (stay animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold display position is discarded. Further, the animation table (stay animation table or wait animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 1 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 1 and the stay animation table are used as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set to 0.
On the other hand, a decrease in the number of special figure reservations (number of special figure 1 hold or special figure 2 hold) is specified, and the number of special figure hold after subtraction (number of special figure 1 hold or special figure 2 hold) = "1". If there is, the animation table (stay animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold display position is discarded. Further, the animation table (stay animation table or wait animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 1 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 1 and the stay animation table are used as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set to 0. Further, the animation table (stay animation table or wait animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 2 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 2 and the stay animation table are used as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set to 1.
On the other hand, a decrease in the number of special figure reservations (number of special figure 1 hold or special figure 2 hold) is specified, and the number of special figure hold after subtraction (number of special figure 1 hold or special figure 2 hold) = "2". If there is, the animation table (stay animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold display position is discarded. Further, the animation table (stay animation table or wait animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 1 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 1 and the stay animation table are used as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set to 0. Further, the animation table (stay animation table or wait animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 2 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 2 and the stay animation table are used as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set to 1. Further, the animation table (stay animation table or wait animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 3 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 3 and the stay animation table are used as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set 2.
On the other hand, a decrease in the number of special figure reservations (number of special figure 1 hold or special figure 2 hold) is specified, and the number of special figure hold after subtraction (number of special figure 1 hold or special figure 2 hold) = "3". If there is, the animation table (stay animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold display position is discarded. Further, the animation table (stay animation table or wait animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 1 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 1 and the stay animation table are used as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set to 0. Further, the animation table (stay animation table or wait animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 2 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 2 and the stay animation table are used as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set to 1. Further, the animation table (stay animation table or wait animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 3 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 3 and the stay animation table are used as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set 2. Further, the animation table (stay animation table or wait animation table) corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold 4 display position is discarded, and the subtraction animation table 4 and the stay animation table are used as the animation tables corresponding to the hold display. Set 3
As a result, when a hold number specification command for specifying a decrease in the number of special figure 2 holds is received during execution of the hold display corresponding to one or more game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information). For the hold display corresponding to all the special figure 2 game information, the stay animation display is started at the same time after the subtraction animation display is executed, and the contents of the hold display are synchronized.

(Read-ahead command reception processing)
Next, the look-ahead command reception process in step S32-4 will be described.
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the look-ahead command reception process.
When the look-ahead command reception process is executed in step S32-4, the process proceeds to step S33-1 as shown in FIG. 43.
In step S33-1, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead designation command (first look-ahead designation command, second look-ahead designation command, and third look-ahead designation command) has been received, and it is determined that the look-ahead designation command has been received (Yes). ), The process proceeds to step S33-2, and when it is determined that the look-ahead designation command has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).

In step S33-2, the look-ahead information analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-3. In the look-ahead information analysis process, the information specified by the look-ahead designation command is stored in a predetermined area of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300 as hold information.
The DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300 is set with a hold information storage area capable of storing hold information. Further, as the reserved information storage area, the first reserved information storage area corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 game information storage area of RAM 230) and the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 game information storage area of RAM 230). ) Corresponds to the second reserved information storage area.
The first reserved information storage area is configured to include a storage area 1 to a storage area 4 as a storage area in which the reserved information can be stored. Then, in the first reserved information storage area, the reserved information corresponding to the special figure 1 game information stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area is stored. That is, the hold information stored in the storage area 1 of the first hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 1 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the storage area 2 of the first hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 2 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the storage area 3 of the first hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 3 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the storage area 4 of the first hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 4 of the special figure 1 game information storage area.
The second reserved information storage area is configured to include a storage area 1 to a storage area 4 as a storage area in which the reserved information can be stored. Then, in the second reserved information storage area, the reserved information corresponding to the special figure 2 game information stored in the special figure 2 game information storage area is stored. That is, the hold information stored in the storage area 1 of the second hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 2 game information stored in the storage area 1 of the special figure 2 game information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the storage area 2 of the second hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 2 game information stored in the storage area 2 of the special figure 2 game information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the storage area 3 of the second hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 2 game information stored in the storage area 3 of the special figure 2 game information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the storage area 4 of the second hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 2 game information stored in the storage area 4 of the special figure 2 game information storage area.
Each hold information includes symbol information indicating the type of stopped symbol, first fluctuation information indicating the content of the fluctuation mode (“variation mode number” or “indefinite value”), and the content of the fluctuation pattern (“variation pattern number” or “variation pattern number”). It includes a second variation information indicating "indefinite value").

In the look-ahead information analysis process, first, it is determined whether or not the received first look-ahead designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery.
Then, when it is determined that the received first look-ahead designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery, the type of the stop symbol designated by the first look-ahead designation command (“missing symbol” or “big hit p symbol”). ”), The content of the variation mode specified by the second look-ahead specification command (“variation mode m” or “indefinite value”), and the content of the variation pattern specified by the third look-ahead specification command (“variation pattern n” or “variation pattern n” or “. Indefinite value ”), the symbol information corresponding to the type of stopped symbol analyzed, the first variation information corresponding to the content of the analyzed variation mode, and the second variation corresponding to the content of the analyzed variation pattern. Generates variability information and pending information including. Then, the generated hold information is stored (stored) in the first hold information storage area.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the received first look-ahead designation command corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, the type of the stop symbol designated by the first look-ahead designation command (“missing symbol” or “big hit p symbol”). ”), The content of the variation mode specified by the second look-ahead specification command (“variation mode m” or “indefinite value”), and the content of the variation pattern specified by the third look-ahead specification command (“variation pattern n” or “variation pattern n” or “. Indefinite value ”), the symbol information corresponding to the type of stopped symbol analyzed, the first variation information corresponding to the content of the analyzed variation mode, and the second variation corresponding to the content of the analyzed variation pattern. Generates variability information and pending information including. Then, the generated hold information is stored (stored) in the second hold information storage area.
In the following description, the hold information stored in the hold information storage area in step S33-2 is referred to as “look-ahead target hold information”. Further, among the hold information stored in the first hold information storage area, the hold information for which the notification display (variation display and stop display) is executed before the look-ahead target hold information is referred to as "advance hold information".

In step S33-3, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead notice effect is being executed, and if it is determined that the look-ahead notice effect is not being executed (No), the process proceeds to step S33-4 and the look-ahead notice effect is performed. If it is determined that the execution is in progress (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
In the present embodiment, “1” is set in the pre-reading advance notice effect flag area of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300 while the pre-reading advance notice effect is being executed. Therefore, in step S33-3, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead notice effect is being executed based on whether or not "1" is set in the pre-reading notice effect during flag area.
In step S33-4, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is satisfied, and if it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is satisfied (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-5, and the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the above conditions are not satisfied (No), a series of processes are terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
In the present embodiment, (1) the pre-reading target hold information is the hold information corresponding to the special figure 1 game information, and (2) the advance hold information of a predetermined number (“2” in this embodiment) or more is stored. (3) There is no advance hold information indicating the type (variation pattern number) belonging to "normal reach fluctuation" or "super reach fluctuation" as the type of fluctuation pattern, and (4) the time saving control is stopped. When all the conditions of (5) that the big hit game state is not occurring are satisfied, it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is satisfied.
The content of the pre-reading notice effect execution condition can be changed as appropriate. That is, as a configuration in which it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is satisfied when one or more of the above (1) to (5) conditions are satisfied instead of all the conditions (1) to (5). It doesn't matter. Further, the pre-reading notice effect execution condition may include other conditions different from the above-mentioned conditions (1) to (5).

In step S33-5, the look-ahead notice effect lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-6. In the look-ahead notice effect lottery process, a look-ahead notice effect lottery for deciding whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect is executed.
The control ROM 302 of the effect control board 300 stores a pre-reading notice effect lottery table in which the winning value of the pre-reading advance notice effect lottery is registered.
In the look-ahead notice effect lottery, first, the look-ahead notice effect lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Then, based on the acquired look-ahead notice effect lottery random number and the look-ahead notice effect lottery table, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect.
In step S33-6, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice effect lottery executed in step S33-5 has been won, and if it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect lottery has been won (Yes), step S33-7 is performed. If it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect lottery has been lost (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).

In step 33-7, the look-ahead notice effect setting process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5). In the look-ahead notice effect setting process, the content of the look-ahead notice effect is set.
The "look-ahead notice effect" is an effect that suggests the result of the preliminary determination (step S9-8) based on the predetermined game information.
Next, in the look-ahead notice effect setting process, the content of the look-ahead notice effect is determined, and the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is set according to the determined content. At this time, "1" is set in the pre-reading advance notice effect flag area of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300. By a process (not shown), "0" is set in the pre-reading notice effect during flag area according to the end of the pre-reading notice effect.

(Variable command reception processing)
Next, the variable command reception process in step S32-5 will be described.
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a variable command reception process.
When the variable command reception process is executed in step S32-5, the process proceeds to step S34-1 as shown in FIG. 44.
In step S34-1, it is determined whether or not a predetermined control command has been received, and if it is determined that a predetermined control command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S34-2 and the predetermined control command is executed. If it is determined that the command has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6).
Here, the predetermined control command refers to a symbol type specification command, a variation mode specification command, and a variation pattern specification command.
In step S34-2, the stop effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-3. In the stop effect determination process, the stop effect number (mode of the stop effect) is determined.
Specifically, in the stop effect determination process, the stop effect number (mode of the stop effect) is determined based on the type of the stop symbol designated by the symbol type designation command. Then, the determined stop effect number is stored in the stop effect number storage area of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300.

In step S34-3, the variation effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-4. In the variation effect determination process, the variation effect number (mode of variation effect) is determined.
Specifically, in the variation effect determination process, first, the first half variation effect determination process for determining the first half variation effect number (mode of the first half variation effect) is executed.
The control ROM 302 of the effect control board 300 stores a first half variation effect lottery table in which correspondence between the variation mode number (type of variation mode) and the first half variation effect number (mode of the first half variation effect) is registered. ..
In the first half variation effect determination process, first, the first half variation effect lottery table is read out. Then, among the first half variable effect numbers registered in the first half variable effect lottery table, the first half variable effect number corresponding to the variable mode number designated by the variable mode designation command is determined (selected).

In the variation effect determination process, next, the second half variation effect determination process for determining the second half variation effect number (mode of the second half variation effect) is executed.
The control ROM 302 of the effect control board 300 stores a second half variation effect lottery table in which correspondence between the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) and the second half variation effect number (mode of the second half variation effect) is registered. ..
In the second half variation effect determination process, first, the second half variation effect lottery table is read out. Then, among the latter half variable effect numbers registered in the latter half variable effect lottery table, the latter half variable effect number corresponding to the variable pattern number designated by the variable pattern designation command is determined (selected).

In step S34-4, the advance notice effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-5. In the advance notice effect determination process, the main advance notice effect number (mode of the main advance notice effect) is selected.
The control ROM 302 of the effect control board 300 stores a advance notice effect lottery table in which the correspondence between the advance notice effect lottery random number and the main advance notice effect number (mode of the main advance notice effect) is registered.
Further, as a notice effect lottery table, a notice effect lottery table corresponding to each stop symbol number (for each type of stop symbol) is stored.
In order to determine the mode of the main advance notice effect, first, the advance notice effect lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the stop symbol number designated by the stop symbol designation command is confirmed, and the advance notice effect lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out. Then, the main advance notice effect number is determined (determined) based on the acquired advance notice effect lottery random number and the read advance notice effect lottery table.

In step S34-5, the variation effect setting process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6). In the variable effect setting process, the effect scenario data of the variable effect is set.
Specifically, in the variable effect setting process, the effect scenario data corresponding to the first half variable effect number determined in step S34-3 and the effect scenario data corresponding to the latter half variable effect number determined in step S34-3 are provided. read out.
Next, the read effect scenario data is combined to generate the effect scenario data related to the variable effect. Then, the generated effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data are set in the effect scenario setting area.
Further, the effect scenario data corresponding to the main notice effect number determined in step S34-4 is read out. Then, the read effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data are set in the effect scenario setting area. As a result, the main advance notice effect is started at a predetermined timing during the execution of the variable effect.

(Stop command reception processing)
Next, the stop command reception process in step S32-6 will be described.
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the stop command reception process.
When the stop command reception process is executed in step S32-6, the process proceeds to step S35-1 as shown in FIG. 45.
In step S35-1, it is determined whether or not the stop designation command has been received, and if it is determined that the stop designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S35-2 and the stop designation command is received. If it is determined that there is no such process (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-7).
In step S35-2, the stop effect start process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-7). In the stop effect start process, the effect scenario data of the stop effect is set.
Specifically, in the stop effect setting process, the stop effect number stored in the stop effect number storage area is acquired, and the effect scenario data corresponding to the acquired stop effect number is read out. Then, the read effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data are set in the effect scenario setting area. As a result, the stop effect (stop display of the effect symbols z1 and z2) is started.

(Opening command reception processing)
Next, the opening command reception process of step S32-7 will be described.
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the opening command reception process.
When the opening command reception process is executed in step S32-7, the process proceeds to step S39-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S39-1, it is determined whether or not the opening designation command has been received, and if it is determined that the opening designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S39-2 and the opening designation command is received. If it is determined that there is no such process (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-8).
In step S39-2, the winning effect setting process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-8). In the winning effect setting process, the effect scenario data of the winning effect is set.
Specifically, in the winning effect setting process, the winning effect number is selected according to the type of the stop symbol designated by the opening designation command. In addition, the effect scenario data corresponding to the selected winning effect number is read out. Then, the read effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data are set in the effect scenario setting area. As a result, the winning production is started.

(Vsync interrupt processing)
Next, the Vsync interrupt process executed by the CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing Vsync interrupt processing.
The synchronization signal generation circuit of the display circuit 320 generates a vertical synchronization signal (Vsync) every second predetermined cycle (specifically, 16.66 [ms]) described above (vertical synchronization signal is defined as a high level). do).
The CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 starts the Vsync interrupt process shown in FIG. 47 at every second predetermined cycle based on the generation of the vertical synchronization signal by the synchronization signal generation circuit. When the Vsync interrupt processing is started, first, the process proceeds to step S40-1.
In step S40-1, it is determined whether or not the value set in the initial transfer completion flag area is "1", and it is determined that the value set in the initial transfer completion flag area is "1". In the case (Yes), the process proceeds to step S40-2, and when it is determined that the value set in the initial transfer completion flag area is not “1” (“0”) (No), the Vsync is concerned. End interrupt processing.

In step S40-2, the frame buffer switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-3. In the frame buffer switching process, the frame buffer area specification (drawing area specification / output area specification) is switched.
Specifically, in the frame buffer switching process, the frame buffer area specified in the drawing area of the two frame buffer areas is switched from the drawing area to the output area, and the frame buffer specified in the output area is switched. Switch the area specification from the output area to the drawing area.

In step S40-3, the drawing command buffer switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-4. In the drawing command buffer switching process, the drawing command buffer area specification (construction area specification / transfer area specification) is switched.
Specifically, in the drawing command buffer switching process, the drawing command buffer area specified in the construction area of the two drawing command buffer areas is switched from the construction area to the transfer area and is designated as the transfer area. The specification of the drawing command buffer area is switched from the transfer area to the construction area.
In step S40-4, the drawing / output start process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-5. In the drawing / output start processing, the start of the drawing process by the drawing circuit 322 is designated, and the start of the output process by the display circuit 320 is designated.
Specifically, in the drawing / output start processing, a value that specifies the start of the drawing process is set in the drawing register of the microcomputer 301. As a result, the drawing process by the drawing circuit 322 is started. That is, the drawing circuit 322 can generate drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer area designated as the drawing area by using the compressed image data for one frame stored (preloaded) in the preload area of the DRAM 304. It will be started.
Further, in the drawing / output start processing, a value that specifies the start of the output processing is set in the display register of the microcomputer 301. As a result, the output processing by the display circuit 320 is started. That is, the display circuit 320 starts the generation / output of the video signal based on the drawing data for one frame generated in the frame buffer area designated as the output area.

In step S40-5, the drawing command transfer start process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-6. In the drawing command transfer start process, the start of the transfer process by the transfer circuit 318 is specified, and the start of the preload process by the preloader circuit 319 is specified.
Specifically, in the drawing command transfer start process, a value that specifies the start of the transfer process for transferring the display list to the preloader circuit 319 is set in the data transfer register of the microcomputer 301. As a result, the transfer process by the transfer circuit 318 is started. That is, the transfer circuit 318 starts the transfer of the display list generated in the drawing command buffer area designated in the transfer area to the preloader circuit 319.
Further, in the drawing command transfer start processing, a value that specifies the start of the preload processing is set in the display preloader register of the microcomputer 301. As a result, the preload process by the preloader circuit 319 is started. That is, the transfer of compressed image data for one frame specified by the display list (drawing command) transferred by the preloader circuit 319 (transfer from the CGROM 303 to the preload area of the DRAM 304) and the display list (transfer to the preload area of the DRAM 304). Rewriting of the drawing command) and is started.

In step S40-6, the command construction task wake-up process is executed, and the Vsync interrupt process is terminated. In the command construction task wake-up process, the wake-up of the command construction task process is set. As a result, the command construction task processing described later is started.

(Command construction task processing)
Next, the command construction task process that is woken up in step S40-6 will be described.
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing command construction task processing.
When the command construction task process is woken up in step S40-6, it proceeds to step S46-1 as shown in FIG. 48.
In step S46-1, it is determined whether or not unanalyzed command information is stored in the display command buffer area, and if it is determined that unanalyzed command information is stored (Yes), step S46-. If it is determined in step 2 that the unanalyzed command information is not stored (No), the process proceeds to step S46-3.
In step S46-2, the command information analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S46-1. In the command information analysis process, unanalyzed command information is analyzed and processing is executed according to the result of the analysis.
Specifically, in the command information analysis process, when the unanalyzed command information is an effect start command, first, among the animation tables stored in the control ROM 302, it corresponds to the display effect number specified by the effect start command. Read the animation table. Then, in the animation table setting area of the DRAM 304, the read animation table, the frame rate corresponding to the animation table, and the display priority information corresponding to the animation table are set (stored / registered). At this time, the frame rate corresponding to the index number assigned to the animation table is acquired by referring to the frame rate setting table, and the acquired frame rate is set.
On the other hand, when the unanalyzed command information is the effect end command, the animation table corresponding to the display effect number specified by the effect end command among the animation tables set in the animation table setting area is cleared (erased). ..

In step S46-3, the command construction process is executed, and the command construction task process is terminated. In the command construction process, the display list is constructed in the drawing command buffer area specified in the construction area. The command construction process will be described later.

(Command construction process)
Next, the command construction process in step S46-3 will be described.
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the command construction process.
When the command construction process is executed in step S46-3, the process proceeds to step S45-1 as shown in FIG. 49.
In step S45-1, bit inversion processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S45-2. In the bit determination process, the value set in the update timing determination area of the DRAM 304 is inverted. That is, when "0" is set in the update timing determination area, "1" is set instead of this, and when "1" is set in the update timing determination area, it is replaced with this. And set "0".
In step S45-2, it is determined whether or not the value set in the update timing determination area of the DRAM 304 is "1", and it is determined that the value set in the update timing determination area is "1". In the case (Yes), the process proceeds to step S45-3, and when it is determined that the value set in the update timing determination area is not "1"("0") (No), step S45- Move to 5.
In step S45-3, the synchronization flag release process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S45-4. In the synchronization flag release process, "0" is stored (set) in the synchronization flag area of the DRAM 304. As a result, "0" is stored in the synchronization flag area every 1/30 [s].

In step S45-4, the frame update process A is executed, and the process proceeds to step S45-5. In the frame update process A, among the animation tables set in the animation table setting area, the animation table in which the frame rate = 30 [FPS] is set and the animation table in which the frame rate = 60 [FPS] is set. And, the frame information is updated.
Specifically, in the frame update process A, first, among the animation tables set in the animation table setting area, the frame information of each animation table is set for all the animation tables for which the frame rate = 60 [FPS] is set. To update. That is, as the frame information for constructing the display list, the frame information of the next rank is selected instead of the currently selected frame information.
Next, in the frame update process A, among the animation tables set in the animation table setting area, the frame information of each animation table is updated for all the animation tables for which the frame rate = 30 [FPS] is set. .. That is, as the frame information for constructing the display list, the frame information of the next rank is selected instead of the currently selected frame information.
As a result, the frame information is updated for all the animation tables set in the animation table setting area.

In step S45-5, the display list construction process is executed, and the command construction process is terminated. In the display list construction process, the display list is constructed in the drawing command buffer area specified in the construction area.
Specifically, in the display list construction process, first, for all the animation tables set in the animation table setting area, a process of generating a drawing command based on each animation table is executed.
In the process of generating a drawing command based on each animation table, among the frame information specified in the animation table, the frame information selected as the target for constructing the display list is acquired. Then, a drawing command is generated based on the acquired frame information.
In the drawing command, the image address of the image data used for drawing, the magnification at the time of drawing the image data (magnification / reduction ratio), the coordinates for drawing the image data (coordinates in the frame buffer area), and the time of drawing the image data. Transparency (transparency / transparency / transparency), etc. are specified.
In the command construction process, next, the drawing commands generated for all the animation tables set in the animation table setting area are arranged in a predetermined order to construct a display list.
At this time, the order of drawing commands corresponding to the animation table is set based on the display priority information of each animation table set in the animation table setting area.
That is, among a plurality of drawing commands, a plurality of drawing commands are used so that a drawing command having a lower display priority and a drawing command having a higher display priority are executed first in a drawing process based on the drawing command. Aligned to build a display list. In other words, among the plurality of drawing commands, the drawing command with the lower display priority is arranged so that the drawing process based on the drawing command is executed first, and the display list is constructed. ..

Further, in the display list construction process, for each animation table set in the animation table setting area, if the frame information selected as the target for constructing the display list includes the synchronization flag setting information, the synchronization flag setting is performed. Set the wake-up of the process. As a result, the synchronization flag setting process described later is started.
That is, in the animation table setting area, the stay animation table 0 is set, and among the frame information registered in the stay animation table 0, the first (first frame / frame 1) frame information is displayed. If it is selected as the target to build the list, the synchronization flag setting process is started.
Similarly, in the animation table setting area, the first (first frame / frame 1) frame information among the frame information in which the stay animation table 1 is set and registered in the stay animation table 1 is When selected as the target for building the display list, the synchronization flag setting process is started.
As a result, in the animation table setting area, one of the stay animation tables 0 and 1 is set, and the first frame information (first frame) registered in the stay animation table is set. -When the frame information of the frame 1) is selected as the target for constructing the display list, the synchronization flag setting process of 1 [times] is woken up in the display list construction process.
On the other hand, in the animation table setting area, both the stay animation tables 0 and 1 are set, and among the frame information registered in the stay animation tables 0 and 1, the first (first frame / frame 1) When the frame information of is selected as the target for constructing the display list, the synchronization flag setting process of 2 [times] is started in the display list construction process.

Further, in the display list construction process, when the frame information selected as the target for constructing the display list includes the synchronization monitoring information for each animation table set in the animation table setting area, the synchronization monitoring processing is performed. Set up to wake up. As a result, the synchronization monitoring process described later is started.
That is, when one or more standby animation tables are set in the animation table setting area, the synchronization monitoring process is started for each standby animation table.
As a result, when only the stay animation table 1 is set among the stay animation tables 1 to 4 in the animation table setting area, the synchronization monitoring process of 1 [time] is started in the display list construction process. To.
On the other hand, in the animation table setting area, when the stay animation tables 1 and 2 are set among the stay animation tables 1 to 4, the synchronous monitoring process of 2 [times] is started in the display list construction process. To.
On the other hand, in the animation table setting area, when the stay animation tables 1 to 3 are set among the stay animation tables 1 to 4, the synchronous monitoring process of 3 [times] is started in the display list construction process. To.
On the other hand, in the animation table setting area, when the stay animation tables 1 to 4 are set among the stay animation tables 1 to 4, the synchronization monitoring process of 4 [times] is started in the display list construction process. To.

In step S45-6, the frame update process B is executed, and the process proceeds to step S45-5. In the frame update process B, among the animation tables set in the animation table setting area, the frame information is updated for the animation table for which the frame rate = 60 [FPS] is set.
Specifically, in the frame update process B, among the animation tables set in the animation table setting area, the frame information of each animation table is updated for all the animation tables for which the frame rate = 60 [FPS] is set. do. That is, as the frame information for constructing the display list, the frame information of the next rank is selected instead of the currently selected frame information.
As described above, among the animation tables set in the animation table setting area, the frame information is updated only for the animation table for which the frame rate = 60 [FPS] is set.

(Synchronization flag setting process)
Next, the synchronization flag setting process that wakes up in step S45-5 will be described.
FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the synchronization flag setting process.
When the synchronization flag setting process is awakened in step S45-5, the process proceeds to step S47-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S47-1, "1" is stored (set) in the synchronization flag area of the DRAM 304, and the synchronization flag setting process is terminated.

(Synchronous monitoring process)
Next, the synchronous monitoring process woken up in step S45-5 will be described.
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the synchronization monitoring process.
When the synchronous monitoring process is awakened in step S45-5, it proceeds to step S48-1 as shown in FIG. 62.
In step S48-1, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the synchronization flag area of the DRAM 304 is "1", and it is determined that the value stored in the synchronization flag area is "1" (. In Yes), the process proceeds to step S48-2, and if it is determined that the value stored in the synchronization flag area is not “1” (“0”) (No), the synchronization monitoring process is terminated. do.
In step S48-2, the hold display synchronization process is executed, and the synchronization monitoring process is terminated. In the hold display synchronization process, synchronization of the hold display is started.
Specifically, in the hold display synchronization process, the wait animation table is discarded and the stay animation table is set for the hold display corresponding to the wait animation table that wakes up the synchronization monitoring process. At this time, loop playback is set for the stay animation table.
As a result, the hold display corresponding to the wait animation table that wakes up the synchronization monitoring process is synchronized with the hold display being executed at the hold display position (or the hold 1 display position).

(Sound interrupt processing)
Next, the sound interrupt process executed by the CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the sound interrupt process.
The CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 starts the sound interrupt process shown in FIG. 50 every first predetermined cycle (1/30 [s] in this embodiment) based on the generation of the clock pulse by the clock generation circuit. do. When the sound interrupt processing is started, first, the process proceeds to step S41-1.
In step S41-1, it is determined whether or not the value set in the initial transfer completion flag area is "1", and it is determined that the value set in the initial transfer completion flag area is "1". In the case (Yes), the process proceeds to step S41-2, and when it is determined that the value set in the initial transfer completion flag area is not "1"("0"), the sound is concerned. End interrupt processing.

In step S41-2, the command information analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-3. In the command information analysis process, it is determined whether or not unanalyzed command information is stored in the sound command buffer area, and when it is determined that unanalyzed command information is stored, the unanalyzed command information is responded to. Execute the processing.
Specifically, in the command information analysis process, when the unanalyzed command information is the effect start command, the sound table corresponding to the sound effect number specified by the effect start command among the sound tables stored in the control ROM 302. Is read, and the read sound table is set (stored) in the sound table setting area of the DRAM 304.
On the other hand, when the unanalyzed command information is the effect end command, the sound table corresponding to the sound effect number specified by the effect end command among the sound tables set in the sound table setting area is cleared (erased). ..

In step S41-3, the sound command construction process is executed, and the sound interrupt process is terminated. In the sound command construction process, a sound command is generated in the sound command buffer area.
Specifically, in the sound command construction process, sound commands are generated for all sound tables set in the sound table setting area based on the information registered in each sound table.

(Ramp interrupt processing)
Next, the lamp interrupt process executed by the CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing lamp interrupt processing.
The CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 starts the lamp interrupt process shown in FIG. 51 every first predetermined cycle (1/30 [s] in this embodiment) based on the generation of the clock pulse by the clock generation circuit. do. When the ramp interrupt processing is started, first, the process proceeds to step S42-1.
In step S42-1, the command information analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-2. In the command information analysis process, it is determined whether or not unanalyzed command information is stored in the lamp command buffer area, and when it is determined that unanalyzed command information is stored, the unanalyzed command information is responded to. Execute the processing.
Specifically, in the command information analysis process, when the unanalyzed command information is the effect start command, the lamp corresponding to the lamp effect number specified by the effect start command in the lamp control table stored in the control ROM 302. The control table is read, and the read lamp control table and the sub-scenario timer corresponding to the lamp control table are set (stored) in the lamp control table setting area of the DRAM 304.
On the other hand, when the unanalyzed command information is the effect end command, the lamp control table corresponding to the lamp effect number specified by the effect end command among the lamp control tables set in the lamp control table setting area is cleared ( to erase.

In step S42-2, the ramp command construction process is executed, and the ramp interrupt process is terminated. In the ramp command construction process, a ramp command is generated in the ramp command buffer area.
Specifically, in the lamp command construction process, a lamp command is generated for all the lamp control tables set in the lamp control table setting area based on the information registered in each lamp control table.

(Movable interrupt processing)
Next, the movable body interrupt process executed by the CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the movable body interrupt process.
The CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 performs the movable body interrupt process shown in FIG. 52 every first predetermined cycle (1/30 [s] in this embodiment) based on the generation of the clock pulse by the clock generation circuit. Start. When the movable body interrupt process is started, first, the process proceeds to step S43-1.
In step S43-1, register save processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S43-2. In the register save process, the register value is saved in the save area of the DRAM 304.
In step S43-2, the command information analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S43-3. In the command information analysis process, it is determined whether or not unanalyzed command information is stored in the movable body command buffer area, and when it is determined that unanalyzed command information is stored, the unanalyzed command information is used. Execute the corresponding processing.
Specifically, in the command information analysis process, when the unanalyzed command information is an effect start command, it corresponds to the movable body effect number specified by the effect start command in the movable body control table stored in the control ROM 302. The movable body control table to be read is read out, and the read movable body control table and the sub-scenario timer corresponding to the movable body control table are set (stored) in the movable body control table setting area of the DRAM 304.
On the other hand, when the unanalyzed command information is the effect end command, the movable body control corresponding to the movable body effect number specified by the effect end command in the movable body control table set in the movable body control table setting area. Clear (erase) the table.

In step S43-3, the motor command construction process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S43-4. In the motor command construction process, a motor command is generated in the motor command buffer area.
Specifically, in the motor command construction process, a motor command is generated for all the movable body control tables set in the movable body control table setting area based on the information registered in each movable body control table.
In step S43-4, the register return process is executed and the movable body interrupt process is terminated. In the register return processing, the value of the register saved in step S43-1 is restored.

(Processing from construction of drawing command to generation / output of video signal)
Next, the processing from the construction of the drawing command to the generation and output of the video signal will be described.
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a flow of processing from construction of a drawing command to generation / output of a video signal.
Here, in the following description, the time (period) from the occurrence of each Vsync (start of Vsync interrupt processing) to the occurrence of the next Vsync (start of the next Vsync interrupt processing) is defined as "1 frame (period)". ".
The CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 selects an effect (effect number) to be executed according to a control command received from the main control board 200, and corresponds to the effect scenario data corresponding to the selected effect number and the effect scenario data. The effect scenario timer to be performed is set in the effect scenario setting area of the DRAM 304.
Then, the CPU 310 controls the progress of the effect based on the effect scenario data set in the effect scenario setting area and the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data.
That is, the CPU 310 updates the effect scenario timer at a predetermined cycle, and based on the updated value of the effect scenario timer, the process data whose start time has arrived exists in the process data registered in the effect scenario data. Determine whether or not to do so. Then, when it is determined that the process data whose start time has arrived exists, the process based on the process data is executed.
At this time, when the process data whose start time has arrived includes command information for designating the start of the display effect (display effect number), the CPU 310 corresponds to the animation table corresponding to the display effect number and the animation table. The sub-scenario timer is set in the animation table setting area of the DRAM 304.
On the other hand, when the process data whose start time has arrived includes a display priority change command, the display priority information set in the animation table setting area is changed according to the command information.
Then, the CPU 310 controls the progress of the display effect based on the animation table set in the animation table setting area and the sub-scenario timer corresponding to the animation table.
That is, the CPU 310 updates the sub-scenario timer set in the animation table setting area every time Vsync (vertical synchronization signal) is generated. Further, for each animation table set in the animation table setting area, a drawing command is generated based on the information corresponding to the updated sub-scenario timer value among the information specified in the animation table. Further, the generated drawing commands are arranged in a predetermined order, and a display list is generated in the drawing command buffer area designated as the construction area. At this time, the order of drawing commands corresponding to the animation table is set based on the display priority information included in each animation table.
As a result, the VDP is controlled according to the display list generated in the drawing command buffer area, and the display effect (display of the effect image by various image display devices 31 and 32) is controlled.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 53, the CPU 310 switches the frame buffer area (switching the designation of the drawing area / output area) and the drawing command buffer area each time Vsync occurs (for each frame). After executing (switching the designation of the construction area / transfer area), the construction of the display list for one frame is started in the drawing command buffer area designated in the construction area. The construction of the display list by the CPU 310 is executed in one frame.
The display list constructed in the drawing command buffer area is set in the preloader circuit 319 when the next Vsync occurs (the designation of the drawing command buffer area is switched to the transfer area) (during the next frame). Will be transferred to. Then, the preloader circuit 319 starts preloading the compressed image data for one frame specified in the received display list and rewriting the display list according to the preload. The preload of the compressed image data for one frame by the preloader circuit 319 and the rewriting of the display list according to the preload are executed in one frame.
The display list rewritten by the preloader circuit 319 is transferred to the drawing circuit 322 when the next Vsync occurs (during the next frame). Then, the drawing circuit 322 starts generating drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer area designated as the drawing area according to the received display list. The generation of drawing data for one frame by the drawing circuit 322 is executed in one frame. At this time, the drawing circuit 322 generates drawing data for one frame using the compressed image data for one frame preloaded in the previous one frame.
The drawing data for one frame generated in the frame buffer area is displayed (during the next frame) when the next Vsync occurs (the designation of the frame buffer area is switched to the output area). The circuit 320 starts generating and outputting a video signal based on the drawing data. The generation / output of the video signal based on the drawing data for one frame by the display circuit 320 is executed in one frame.

As described above, when the display list of the nth frame is constructed in the predetermined one frame, the preload of the compressed image data of the nth frame is executed in the one frame one after the predetermined one frame. The drawing data of the nth frame is generated in one frame two after the predetermined one frame, and the video data of the nth frame is generated in one frame three times after the predetermined one frame. -The output is executed.
As a result, the image of the nth frame is displayed on the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 three frames after the construction of the display list of the nth frame.

(Operation of pachinko machine 1)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the following description, the game information corresponding to the hold display executed at the hold display position is referred to as "preceding game information", and one or more acquired during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol based on the first game information. The game information of is referred to as "subsequent game information".
The pachinko machine 1 corresponds to the newly acquired succeeding game information when new succeeding game information is acquired during the execution of the hold display (stay animation display) corresponding to the preceding game information at the hold display position. Hold display is started.
At this time, as a hold display corresponding to the newly acquired subsequent game information, the winning animation display is first started, and after the winning animation display is finished, the waiting animation display is started and stored in the synchronization flag area. Wait for the start of the stay animation display until the timing when the value changes from "0" to "1" occurs. Then, in response to the change in the value stored in the synchronization flag area from "0" to "1", the standby animation display is terminated and the stay animation display is started.
Here, in the present embodiment, during the loop reproduction of the stay animation corresponding to the preceding game information, the value stored in the synchronization flag area changes from "0" to "0" at the timing when the reproduction of each stay animation is started. It changes to "1".
As a result, when the value stored in the synchronization flag area changes from "0" to "1", the content of the hold display (stay animation display) corresponding to the preceding game information and the succeeding game information are supported. It is possible to synchronize the contents of the hold display (stay animation display) to be performed with each other.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1, if the subtraction of the number of holdings occurs during the period when the waiting animation display is being executed for a plurality of succeeding game information, the subtraction animation display is started as the holding display corresponding to each succeeding game information. Then, after the subtraction animation display is completed, the stay animation display is executed.
As a result, the contents of the hold display (stay animation display) related to the plurality of subsequent game information can be synchronized with each other when the subtraction of the hold number occurs.

(Modification 1)
Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, various modifications can be made in the above embodiment.
For example, in the above embodiment, the hold display is executed for the special figure 1 game information while the time reduction control is stopped, and the hold display is executed for the special figure 2 game information while the time reduction control is being executed. When a plurality of hold displays are executed regardless of whether the time reduction control is stopped or executed, the contents of the plurality of hold displays are synchronized.
However, when a plurality of hold displays are executed while the time reduction control is stopped, the contents of the plurality of hold displays are not synchronized, and when the time reduction control is stopped, a plurality of hold displays are executed. In addition, the contents of the plurality of hold displays may be synchronized.
Or, when a plurality of hold displays are executed while the time reduction control is stopped, the contents of the plurality of hold displays are synchronized, and when a plurality of hold displays are executed while the time reduction control is stopped. , The contents of the plurality of hold displays may not be synchronized.

(Modification 2)
Further, in the above embodiment, the hold display is executed for the game information corresponding to the game state among the special figure 1 game information and the special figure 2 game information. That is, while the time reduction control is stopped, the hold display is executed for the special figure 1 game information, and while the time reduction control is being executed, the hold display is executed for the special figure 2 game information.
At this time, at the time of transition (change) of the game state, if there is game information for which the start determination (or the derivation of the result of the start determination) is suspended for the game information corresponding to the game state after the transition (or (When the number of special figure reservations is "1" or more), the stay animation display may be started in a state of being synchronized with each other for all the game information for which the start determination is reserved.

Specifically, in response to the start of the time reduction control (end of the big hit game state), the hold display (stay animation display) corresponding to the special figure 2 game information is started. At this time, the hold display is started at the hold display position corresponding to the number of holds in Special Figure 2.
That is, when the special figure 2 game information is stored in the storage area 0 and the special figure 2 hold number at the start of the time reduction control is "0", the stay animation display (stay animation) is performed at the hold display position. ) Is started.
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 game information is stored in the storage area 0 and the special figure 2 hold number at the start of the time reduction control is "1", in each of the hold display position and the hold 1 display position. , Start the stay animation display (stay animation).
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 game information is stored in the storage area 0 and the special figure 2 hold number at the start of the time reduction control is "2", the hold display position, the hold 1 display position, and the hold 2 are held. The stay animation display (stay animation) is started at each of the display positions.
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 game information is stored in the storage area 0 and the special figure 2 hold number at the start of the time reduction control is "3", the hold display position, the hold 1 display position, and the hold 2 are held. The stay animation display (stay animation) is started at each of the display position and the hold 3 display position.
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 game information is stored in the storage area 0 and the special figure 2 hold number at the start of the time reduction control is "4", the hold display position, the hold 1 display position, and the hold 2 are held. The stay animation display (stay animation) is started at each of the display position, the hold 3 display position, and the hold 4 display position.
As a result, according to the start of the time saving control, the hold display is performed at two or more of the hold display positions, the hold 1 display position, the hold 2 display position, the hold 3 display position, and the hold 4 display position. When (stay animation display) is started, the contents of the hold display (stay animation display) started at the two or more hold display positions can be synchronized with each other.
That is, according to the start of the time saving control, it is possible to start the hold display related to the plurality of special figure 2 game information in a state of being synchronized with each other.

On the other hand, in response to the end of the time reduction control (the end of the variation display or the stop display of the second special symbol that triggers the end of the time reduction control), the hold display corresponding to the special figure 2 game information is terminated, and the special figure 1 game is terminated. Start the hold display (stay animation display) corresponding to the information. At this time, the hold display is started at the hold display position corresponding to the number of holds in Special Figure 1.
That is, when the special figure 1 game information is stored in the storage area 0 and the special figure 1 hold number at the start of the time reduction control is "0", the stay animation display (stay animation) is performed at the hold display position. ) Is started.
On the other hand, when the special figure 1 game information is stored in the storage area 0 and the special figure 1 hold number at the start of the time reduction control is "1", in each of the hold display position and the hold 1 display position. , Start the stay animation display (stay animation).
On the other hand, when the special figure 1 game information is stored in the storage area 0 and the special figure 1 hold number at the start of the time reduction control is "2", the hold display position, the hold 1 display position, and the hold 2 are held. The stay animation display (stay animation) is started at each of the display positions.
On the other hand, when the special figure 1 game information is stored in the storage area 0 and the special figure 1 hold number at the start of the time reduction control is "3", the hold display position, the hold 1 display position, and the hold 2 are held. The stay animation display (stay animation) is started at each of the display position and the hold 3 display position.
On the other hand, when the special figure 1 game information is stored in the storage area 0 and the special figure 1 hold number at the start of the time reduction control is "4", the hold display position, the hold 1 display position, and the hold 2 are held. The stay animation display (stay animation) is started at each of the display position, the hold 3 display position, and the hold 4 display position.
As a result, according to the end of the time saving control, the hold display is performed at two or more of the hold display positions, the hold 1 display position, the hold 2 display position, the hold 3 display position, and the hold 4 display position. When (stay animation display) is started, the contents of the hold display (stay animation display) started at the two or more hold display positions can be synchronized with each other.
That is, according to the end of the time saving control, it is possible to start the hold display related to the plurality of special figure 1 game information in a state of being synchronized with each other.

Here, at the time of transition (change) of the game state, the display of the plurality of pedestal images (moving images / animation images) included in the interface image is started in a state of being synchronized with each other as in the hold display. It doesn't matter.
This makes it possible to synchronize the timing at which the animation (display of the first frame) starts with respect to each pedestal image and the hold display corresponding to the pedestal image.

(Modification 3)
Further, in the above embodiment, when the power is turned on (when the power is restored after the power is cut off), the hold display may be started according to the stored game state and the number of special figure holds. At this time, if there is game information for which the start determination (or the derivation of the result of the start determination) is suspended for the game information corresponding to the stored game state (when the number of reserved special figures is "1" or more). (In some cases), the stay animation display may be started in a state of being synchronized with each other for all the game information for which the start determination is suspended.

Specifically, when the game state at the time of turning on the power is executing the time saving control, the hold display (stay animation display) corresponding to the special figure 2 game information is started. At this time, the hold display is started at the hold display position corresponding to the number of holds in Special Figure 2.
That is, when the special figure 2 game information is stored in the storage area 0 and the special figure 2 hold number at the start of the time reduction control is "0", the stay animation display (stay animation) is performed at the hold display position. ) Is started.
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 game information is stored in the storage area 0 and the special figure 2 hold number at the start of the time reduction control is "1", in each of the hold display position and the hold 1 display position. , Start the stay animation display (stay animation).
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 game information is stored in the storage area 0 and the special figure 2 hold number at the start of the time reduction control is "2", the hold display position, the hold 1 display position, and the hold 2 are held. The stay animation display (stay animation) is started at each of the display positions.
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 game information is stored in the storage area 0 and the special figure 2 hold number at the start of the time reduction control is "3", the hold display position, the hold 1 display position, and the hold 2 are held. The stay animation display (stay animation) is started at each of the display position and the hold 3 display position.
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 game information is stored in the storage area 0 and the special figure 2 hold number at the start of the time reduction control is "4", the hold display position, the hold 1 display position, and the hold 2 are held. The stay animation display (stay animation) is started at each of the display position, the hold 3 display position, and the hold 4 display position.
As a result, depending on the power being turned on, the hold display (stay) is performed at two or more hold display positions among the hold display position, hold 1 display position, hold 2 display position, hold 3 display position, and hold 4 display position. When the animation display) is started, the contents of the hold display (stay animation display) started at the two or more hold display positions can be synchronized with each other.
That is, it is possible to start the hold display related to the plurality of special figure 2 game information in a state of being synchronized with each other according to the power-on.
Here, when the power is turned on, the hold display may not be executed for the special figure 2 game information stored in the storage area 0. That is, the hold display may not be executed at the hold display position when the power is turned on. In such a configuration, among the hold 1 display position, hold 2 display position, hold 3 display position, and hold 4 display position, the hold display is displayed at the hold display position corresponding to the number of holds in the special figure 2 at the time of turning on the power. Will be executed.

On the other hand, when the game state at the time of turning on the power is stopped for the time saving control, the hold display (stay animation display) corresponding to the special figure 1 game information is started. At this time, the hold display is started at the hold display position corresponding to the number of holds in Special Figure 1.
That is, when the special figure 1 game information is stored in the storage area 0 and the special figure 1 hold number at the start of the time reduction control is "0", the stay animation display (stay animation) is performed at the hold display position. ) Is started.
On the other hand, when the special figure 1 game information is stored in the storage area 0 and the special figure 1 hold number at the start of the time reduction control is "1", in each of the hold display position and the hold 1 display position. , Start the stay animation display (stay animation).
On the other hand, when the special figure 1 game information is stored in the storage area 0 and the special figure 1 hold number at the start of the time reduction control is "2", the hold display position, the hold 1 display position, and the hold 2 are held. The stay animation display (stay animation) is started at each of the display positions.
On the other hand, when the special figure 1 game information is stored in the storage area 0 and the special figure 1 hold number at the start of the time reduction control is "3", the hold display position, the hold 1 display position, and the hold 2 are held. The stay animation display (stay animation) is started at each of the display position and the hold 3 display position.
On the other hand, when the special figure 1 game information is stored in the storage area 0 and the special figure 1 hold number at the start of the time reduction control is "4", the hold display position, the hold 1 display position, and the hold 2 are held. The stay animation display (stay animation) is started at each of the display position, the hold 3 display position, and the hold 4 display position.
As a result, depending on the power being turned on, the hold display (stay) is performed at two or more hold display positions among the hold display position, hold 1 display position, hold 2 display position, hold 3 display position, and hold 4 display position. When the animation display) is started, the contents of the hold display (stay animation display) started at the two or more hold display positions can be synchronized with each other.
That is, it is possible to start the hold display related to the plurality of special figure 1 game information in a state of being synchronized with each other according to the power-on.
Here, when the power is turned on, the hold display may not be executed for the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 0. That is, the hold display may not be executed at the hold display position when the power is turned on. In such a configuration, among the hold 1 display position, hold 2 display position, hold 3 display position, and hold 4 display position, the hold display is displayed at the hold display position corresponding to the number of hold in Special Figure 1 at the time of turning on the power. Will be executed.

When the power is turned on (when the power is restored after the power is turned off), the multiple pedestal images (moving images / animation images) included in the interface image are also started to be displayed in synchronization with each other, as in the hold display. It may be configured as such.
This makes it possible to synchronize the timing at which the animation (display of the first frame) starts with respect to each pedestal image and the hold display corresponding to the pedestal image.

(Modification example 4)
Further, in the above embodiment, as the types of the normal time special hold display (or the time reduction special hold display), a plurality of types having different cycles of the staying operation (stay animation display) are defined, and the hold notice is executed. If this is the case, the type of hold display that is the target of the hold notice may be selected by lottery.
For example, as the type of the normal hold display, the normal hold display and the normal special hold display are specified. Here, in this modification, in the normal default hold display, it is assumed that the cycle of operation during stay (one cycle) is configured by 30 frames. That is, in the normal default hold display, it is assumed that 30 frames are specified as the cycle (one cycle) of the operation during the stay.
In addition, the types of special hold display during normal times are round special hold display, character A special hold display, character B special hold display, character C special hold display, and card type special hold display. The star-shaped special hold display is specified.
Then, the cycle (one cycle) of the operation during the stay is different depending on the type of the hold display (type of the hold symbol h).

That is, in the round special hold display, a predetermined circular hold symbol h (hereinafter referred to as “circular hold symbol”) is displayed. Further, in the round special hold display, a cycle (one cycle) of operation during stay is configured by 30 frames. That is, in the round special hold display, 30 frames are defined as the cycle (one cycle) of the operation during the stay.
In addition, as a round special hold display, a round blue hold display in which a "blue" circular hold symbol is displayed, a round red hold display in which a "red" circular hold symbol is displayed, and a "gold" A round gold hold display on which a circular hold symbol is displayed is specified. Then, the jackpot expectations for each type of round special hold display are, in order from the one with the highest jackpot expectation, "round gold hold display", "round red hold display", "round blue hold display" ( High expectation of big hit → Low expectation of big hit).

On the other hand, in the character A system special hold display, the hold symbol h composed of the character A (hereinafter referred to as "character A hold symbol") is displayed. Further, in the character A system special hold display, a cycle (one cycle) of operation during stay is configured by 50 frames. That is, in the character A system special hold display, 50 frames are defined as the cycle (one cycle) of the operation during the stay.
In addition, as the character A special hold display, the character A white hold display in which the "white" character A hold symbol is displayed, the character A blue hold display in which the "blue" character A hold symbol is displayed, and the "red" Character A red hold display on which the character A hold symbol of "" is displayed, and character A gold hold display on which the character A hold symbol of "golden" is displayed. Then, the jackpot expectations for each type of character A special hold display are, in order from the one with the highest jackpot expectation, "Character A gold hold display", "Character A red hold display", "Character A blue hold display", "Character A white hold display" (high expectation of big hit → low expectation of big hit).

On the other hand, in the character B-based special hold display, the hold symbol h composed of the character B (hereinafter referred to as "character B hold symbol") is displayed. Further, in the character B system special hold display, a cycle (one cycle) of operation during stay is configured by 50 frames. That is, in the character B system special hold display, 50 frames are defined as the cycle (one cycle) of the operation during the stay.
In addition, as the character B special hold display, the character B white hold display in which the "white" character B hold symbol is displayed, the character B blue hold display in which the "blue" character B hold symbol is displayed, and the "red" Character B red hold display on which the character B hold symbol of "" is displayed, and character B gold hold display on which the character B hold symbol of "golden" is displayed. Then, the jackpot expectations for each type of character B special hold display are, in order from the one with the highest jackpot expectation, "Character B gold hold display", "Character B red hold display", "Character B blue hold display", "Character B white hold display" (high expectation of big hit → low expectation of big hit).

On the other hand, in the character C-based special hold display, the hold symbol h composed of the character C (hereinafter referred to as "character C hold symbol") is displayed. Further, in the character C system special hold display, a cycle (one cycle) of operation during stay is configured by 30 frames. That is, in the character C system special hold display, 30 frames are defined as the cycle (one cycle) of the operation during the stay.
In addition, as the character C special hold display, the character C white hold display in which the "white" character C hold symbol is displayed, the character C blue hold display in which the "blue" character C hold symbol is displayed, and the "red" character C hold display. Character C red hold display on which the character C hold symbol of "" is displayed, and character C gold hold display on which the character C hold symbol of "golden" is displayed. Then, the jackpot expectations for each type of character C special hold display are, in order from the one with the highest jackpot expectation, "Character C gold hold display", "Character C red hold display", "Character C blue hold display", "Character C white hold display" (high expectation of big hit → low expectation of big hit).

On the other hand, in the card-type special hold display, the card-type hold symbol h (hereinafter referred to as "card-type hold symbol") is displayed. Further, in the card-type special hold display, a cycle (one cycle) of operation during stay is configured by 30 frames. That is, in the card-type special hold display, 30 frames are defined as the cycle (one cycle) of the operation during the stay.
In addition, as card-type special hold displays, a card-type white hold display in which a "white" card-type hold symbol is displayed, a card-type blue hold display in which a "blue" card-type hold symbol is displayed, and a "red" card-type hold display. The card-shaped red hold display on which the card-shaped hold symbol of "" is displayed and the card-shaped gold hold display on which the "golden" card-shaped hold symbol is displayed are specified. Then, the jackpot expectations for each type of card-type special hold display are, in order from the one with the highest jackpot expectation, "card-type gold hold display", "card-type red hold display", "card-type blue hold display", "Card type white hold display" (high expectation of big hit → low expectation of big hit).

On the other hand, in the star-shaped special hold display, the star-shaped hold symbol h (hereinafter referred to as “star-shaped hold symbol”) is displayed. Further, in the star-shaped special hold display, a cycle (one cycle) of operation during stay is configured by 60 frames. That is, in the star-shaped special hold display, 60 frames are defined as the cycle (one cycle) of the operation during the stay.
In addition, as a star-shaped special hold display, a star-shaped rainbow hold display in which a star-shaped hold pattern whose color changes to "rainbow color" is displayed is specified. Then, the jackpot expectation of the star-shaped special hold display is made higher than that of other types of normal special hold display.

If the hold notice is started during the execution of the normal default hold display, the same period of operation during stay as the normal default hold display is specified as the type of hold display that is the target of the hold notice. It is configured that any type is selected from the round type special hold display, the character C type special hold display, and the card type special hold display. That is, in this case, as the type of hold display subject to the hold notice, the character A special hold display and the character B special hold, which specify a cycle of operation during stay that is different from the normal default hold display, are specified. One of the display and the star-shaped special hold display is not selected.
At this time, in the lottery to select the type of hold display that is the target of the hold notice, the round special hold display and character C special that specify the same cycle of operation during stay as the normal default hold display. Either type may be selected from the hold display and the card-type special hold display.
Alternatively, in the lottery to select the type of hold display that is the target of the hold notice, one of all types of normal special hold display is selected, and the stay is different from the normal default hold display. When the character A special hold display, the character B special hold display, or the star-shaped special hold display, which defines the cycle of the medium movement, is selected, the same staying movement as the default hold display at normal times is performed. It may be configured so that the cycle can be replaced with a specified type (for example, the default hold display at normal times).
Then, after the start of the hold notice, the staying operation of the hold display, which is the target of the hold notice, is synchronized with the staying operation of the normal default hold display.
Note that during the execution of the normal time default hold display, the type of normal time special hold display that defines the cycle of staying operation different from the normal time default hold display is not started, but all normal times After digesting the default hold display, it is possible to start a type of normal special hold display that defines a cycle of operation during stay that is different from the normal hold display.
Or, for a hold notice that starts during the execution of the normal default hold display, the character whose hold operation cycle different from the normal default hold display is specified as the type of hold display that is the target of the hold notice. When the A-type special hold display is selected, all the normal default hold displays may be replaced with the character A-type special hold display.

If another hold notice is started while the character A hold notice is being executed, the same hold operation as the character A hold notice is used as the type of hold display that is the target of the other hold notice. It is configured that either type is selected from the character A system hold display and the character B system hold display in which the cycle of is specified. That is, in this case, as the type of the hold display subject to the other hold notice, the round special hold display and the character C type, in which the cycle of the operation during the stay different from the character A hold display is specified, are specified. One of the special hold display, the card-type special hold display, and the star-shaped special hold display is not selected.
At this time, in the lottery for selecting the type of the hold display that is the target of the other hold notice, the character A-type hold display and the character, which specify the same cycle of movement during the stay as the character A-type hold display, and the character. Any type of the B-system hold display may be selected.
Alternatively, in the lottery to select the type of hold display that is the target of the other hold notice, one of all types of normal special hold display is selected, and the character A system hold display is used. When the round special hold display, the character C special hold display, the card special hold display, or the star special hold display, which specify different periods of movement during the stay, are selected, the character A system is selected. It may be configured to be replaced with a type (for example, the default hold display at normal times) in which the cycle of the operation during the stay is the same as that of the hold display.
Then, after the start of the other hold notice, the staying operation of the hold display, which is the target of the other hold notice, is synchronized with the staying action of the character A system hold display.

As described above, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the cycle of operation during the stay is not uniform in appearance for a plurality of hold displays executed at the same time, and it is possible to improve the effect of the effect.

(Action of pachinko machine 1)
In the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of guide holes gh are provided along the outer rail 14. This makes it possible to arrange the outer rail 14 at an accurate position on the game board 11.
Here, in the outer rail 14, the impact received by the collision of the launched game ball is greater at the portion on the starting end side than at the portion on the ending side, and the influence on the launching direction of the launched game ball is larger. Become. As a result, in the outer rail 14, higher mounting strength is required at the start end side portion than at the end end side portion, and more accurate placement is required.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the number of guide holes gh provided in the first range H1 is larger than that in the second range H2 in the outer rail 14, and the second range H2 is more than the third range H3. However, there are many guide holes gh provided.
That is, by increasing the number of guide holes gh provided in the portion on the proximal end side of the outer rail 14, it is possible to prevent misalignment and vibration in the portion on the proximal end side. In particular, it is possible to stabilize the trajectory of the game ball and execute the game as designed.
On the other hand, by reducing the number of guide holes gh provided in the terminal portion of the outer rail 14, it is possible to facilitate the processing of the outer rail 14 and the attachment to the game board 11.
As described above, it is possible to prevent the outer rail 14 from being displaced or vibrated, and to facilitate the processing of the outer rail 14 and the attachment to the game board 11.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when the normal time special hold display in which the operation during stay is repeated in the same cycle as the normal time default hold display is started while the normal time default hold display is being executed, the normal time special hold display is displayed. The staying action is synchronized with the staying action of the normal default hold display. On the other hand, during the execution of the normal time default hold display, the time saving default hold display in which the staying operation is repeated at a cycle different from the normal time default hold display is not started.
In addition, when the time saving default hold display is started while the time saving special hold display is being executed and the staying operation is repeated in the same cycle as the time saving special hold display, the staying operation of the time saving default hold display is It is synchronized with the operation during the stay of the special hold display in the time saving time. On the other hand, during the execution of the time-saving special hold display, the normal time special hold display in which the operation during stay is repeated at a cycle different from that of the time-saving special hold display is not started.
This prevents a situation in which a plurality of types of hold displays having different operation cycles during the stay are executed at the same time, and prevents the contents of the hold display from becoming complicated. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the hold display.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when other game information is acquired during the execution of the hold display corresponding to one game information, the hold display corresponding to the other game information is displayed as a standby animation (standby state / standby mode). ), The stay animation display (synchronization state / synchronization mode) synchronized with the hold display corresponding to one game information is set. As a result, the hold display corresponding to the other game information started later is set to the standby animation display, and then the stay animation display synchronized with the hold display corresponding to the one game information started earlier is set. .. Therefore, even before the timing when the hold display corresponding to other game information can be synchronized with the hold display corresponding to one game information (the timing when the stay animation display can be started) occurs, the other It is possible to start the hold display (standby animation display) corresponding to the game information of.
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the stay animation display is a moving image (animation image), and the standby animation display is a still image. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in the control load.
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the stay animation display is a moving image (animation image), the standby animation display is a still image, and in particular, the standby animation display is composed of an image of the first frame of the stay animation display. This makes it possible to naturally connect the standby animation display to the stay animation display.
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the hold display corresponding to one game information (stay animation display) and the hold display corresponding to other game information (stay animation display) are periodically repeated (loop playback is performed). ) It is said that the moving images (animation images) have the same contents as each other. In particular, when the display of the image of the first frame of the moving image related to the hold display (stay animation display) corresponding to one game information is started, the hold display corresponding to the other game information is set to one game information. It is synchronized with the hold display (stay animation display) corresponding to (the stay animation display). This makes it possible to simplify the process of synchronizing the hold display.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when other game information is acquired during the execution of the hold display corresponding to one game information, the wait time (standby animation display / standby mode) is set for the hold display corresponding to the other game information. After going through the standby state, it is synchronized with the hold display corresponding to one game information (stay animation display, synchronization mode, synchronization state), and when the power is turned on (when the power is restored after the power is cut off), the start judgment ( Alternatively, if there is game information for which the derivation of the result of the start determination) is suspended, the display of the reserved display related to all the game information is started in a state of being synchronized with each other. This makes it possible to simplify the process for synchronizing a plurality of hold displays when the power is turned on.
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when other game information is acquired during the execution of the hold display corresponding to one game information, the wait time (standby animation display / standby mode) is set for the hold display corresponding to the other game information. -After the standby state), it is synchronized with the hold display corresponding to one game information (stay animation display, synchronization mode, and synchronization state), and at the time of transition (change) of the game state, start judgment (or start). If there is game information for which the derivation of the determination result) is suspended, the display of all the game information is started in a state of being synchronized with each other. This makes it possible to simplify the process for synchronizing a plurality of hold displays at the time of transition of the gaming state.
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when other game information is acquired during the execution of the hold display corresponding to one game information, the wait time (standby animation display / standby mode) is set for the hold display corresponding to the other game information. -After the standby state), it is synchronized with the hold display corresponding to one game information (stay animation display, synchronization mode, and synchronization state), and the start determination (or the derivation of the result of the start determination) is suspended. When the start determination (or the derivation of the result of the start determination) is suspended when the number of game information is subtracted (decreased), if there is game information for which the start determination (or the derivation of the result of the start determination) is suspended, the pending display related to all the game information is synchronized with each other. The display starts. This makes it possible to simplify the process for synchronizing multiple hold displays when subtracting (decreasing) the number of game information for which start determination (or derivation of the result of start determination) is pending. Become.

1 Pachinko machine 12 Inner rail 13 Rail base 14 Outer rail 31 Main image display device 31a Display screen 200 Main control board 300 Directional control board 301 Microcomputer 302 Control ROM
303 CGROM
304 DRAM
310 CPU
316 VRAM
319 Priroda circuit 320 Display circuit 322 Drawing circuit gh Guide hole

Claims (2)

The game board that forms the game area,
The outer rail attached to the game board and
A display control means capable of executing a first hold display that repeats the operation display in the first cycle, a second hold display that repeats the operation display in the first cycle, and a third hold display that repeats the operation display in the second cycle. And, with
A plurality of guide portions for guiding the mounting position with respect to the game board are formed on the outer rail along the outer rail.
The range from the start end to the left apex of the outer rail is the first range, the range from the left apex to the upper apex of the outer rail is the second range, and the range from the upper apex to the end of the outer rail is the second range. In the case of three ranges, the number of the guide portions provided in the first range is larger than that in the second range, and the guide portion in the second range is larger than that in the third range. There are many that are provided,
The display control means is
When the second hold display is started during the execution of the first hold display, the operation display of the second hold display is controlled to be synchronized with the operation display of the first hold display.
A gaming machine characterized in that control is performed so that the third hold display is not started during the execution of the first hold display. The display control means is
It is possible to execute the fourth hold display that repeats the operation display in the second cycle.
When the third hold display is started during the execution of the fourth hold display, the operation display of the third hold display is controlled to be synchronized with the operation display of the fourth hold display.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is controlled so as not to start the second holding display during the execution of the fourth holding display.

Images